2015 F 150 Owners Manual Version 4 Om en US 08 2015

2015 F-150 Owner’s Manual
2015 F-150 Owner’s Manual

fordowner.com ford.ca
August 2015
Fourth Printing
Owner’s Manual
F-150
Litho in U.S.A.
PMFL3J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.

Part Number: 20150724195722
Table of Contents
Introduction Driver and Passenger Airbags...................44

About This Manual...........................................7 Front Passenger Sensing System............45
Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Side Airbags.....................................................47
Data Recording..................................................9 Safety Canopy™............................................48
California Proposition 65..............................11 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......49
Perchlorate.........................................................11 Airbag Disposal..............................................50
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts Keys and Remote Controls
Recommendation........................................11 General Information on Radio
Special Notices................................................12 Frequencies...................................................51
Mobile Communications Remote Control...............................................51
Equipment.....................................................13 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Export Unique Options..................................13 Control...........................................................56
Environment MyKey™
Protecting the Environment........................14 Principle of Operation...................................57
Creating a MyKey...........................................58
Child Safety Clearing All MyKeys.......................................58
General Information.......................................15 Checking MyKey System Status...............59
Installing Child Restraints............................16 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems........................................................60
Booster Seats..................................................28
MyKey Troubleshooting..............................60
Child Restraint Positioning.........................30
Child Safety Locks...........................................31
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................62
Seatbelts
Keyless Entry...................................................64
Principle of Operation...................................33
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................34
Security
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................67
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................39 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................69
Seatbelt Reminder........................................39
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Power Running Boards
Maintenance.................................................41 Using Power Running Boards.....................71
Personal Safety System™ Steering Wheel

Personal Safety System™..........................42 Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................73
Audio Control...................................................74
Supplementary Restraints Voice Control....................................................75
System Cruise Control..................................................75
Principle of Operation..................................43 Information Display Control.......................76
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Table of Contents
Pedals Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate.........................................................134
Adjusting the Pedals......................................77
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................137
Cabin Air Filter................................................137
Wipers and Washers
Remote Start.................................................138
Windshield Wipers.........................................78
Autowipers........................................................78
Seats
Windshield Washers.....................................79
Sitting in the Correct Position..................139
Head Restraints............................................139
Lighting
Manual Seats..................................................141
Lighting Control..............................................80
Power Seats....................................................142
Autolamps.......................................................80
Memory Function.........................................144
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................81
Rear Seats.......................................................146
Daytime Running Lamps.............................82
Heated Seats.................................................146
Automatic High Beam Control..................82
Climate Controlled Seats..........................147
Front Fog Lamps............................................84
Front Seat Armrest......................................149
Direction Indicators.......................................84
Rear Seat Armrest........................................149
Spot Lamps.....................................................84
Interior Lamps.................................................85
Universal Garage Door
Ambient Lighting............................................87 Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener...............150
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows.............................................88 Auxiliary Power Points
Exterior Mirrors................................................89
Auxiliary Power Points................................154
Interior Mirror...................................................93
Sun Visors.........................................................93 Storage Compartments
Moonroof...........................................................93
Center Console..............................................156
Overhead Console........................................157
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................95 Starting and Stopping the
Warning Lamps and Indicators................98 Engine
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........102 General Information....................................158
Ignition Switch...............................................158
Information Displays Keyless Starting............................................158
General Information....................................103 Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................159
Information Messages.................................118 Engine Block Heater....................................162
Climate Control Unique Driving Character-

Manual Climate Control..............................131 istics
Automatic Climate Control.......................133 Auto-Start-Stop...........................................164

Table of Contents
Fuel and Refueling Active Park Assist........................................202

Safety Precautions......................................166 Rear View Camera......................................206
Fuel Quality.....................................................167 360 Degree Camera...................................209
Running Out of Fuel....................................168
Refueling.........................................................169 Cruise Control
Fuel Consumption........................................170 Principle of Operation.................................212
Emission Control System............................171 Using Cruise Control....................................212
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................213
Transmission
Automatic Transmission............................174 Driving Aids
Driver Alert.....................................................220
Four-Wheel Drive Lane Keeping System................................220
Using Four-Wheel Drive............................180 Blind Spot Information System..............224
Cross Traffic Alert........................................226
Rear Axle Steering...........................................................229
Electronic Locking Differential................188 Collision Warning System........................230
Brakes Load Carrying

General Information....................................190 Load Limit.......................................................233
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Tailgate............................................................239
Brakes...........................................................190
Parking Brake.................................................190 Towing
Electric Parking Brake..................................191 Towing a Trailer............................................249
Hill Start Assist..............................................193 Trailer Sway Control...................................250
Recommended Towing Weights...........250
Traction Control Essential Towing Checks...........................261
Principle of Operation.................................195 Towing Points...............................................268
Using Traction Control................................195 Transporting the Vehicle..........................269
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......269
Stability Control
Principle of Operation................................196 Driving Hints
Using Stability Control................................197 Breaking-In.....................................................272
Economical Driving......................................272
Terrain Response Driving Through Water...............................273
Principle of Operation................................199 Floor Mats.......................................................273
Using Hill Descent Control........................199 Snowplowing.................................................274
Parking Aids Roadside Emergencies

Parking Aid......................................................201 Roadside Assistance...................................277

Table of Contents
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................278 Power Steering Fluid Check....................309

Fuel Shutoff...................................................278 Washer Fluid Check...................................309
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................279 Fuel Filter........................................................309
Post-Crash Alert System...........................281 Changing the 12V Battery........................309
Checking the Wiper Blades........................311
Customer Assistance Changing the Wiper Blades.......................311
Getting the Services You Need...............282 Adjusting the Headlamps..........................312
In California (U.S. Only)............................283 Changing a Bulb............................................313
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Bulb Specification Chart...........................318
Line Program (U.S. Only).....................284 Changing the Engine Air Filter................320
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).......................285
Vehicle Care
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................285 General Information....................................321
Ordering Additional Owner's Cleaning Products........................................321
Literature....................................................286 Cleaning the Exterior...................................321
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Waxing.............................................................322
Only).............................................................287 Cleaning the Engine....................................323
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Only).............................................................287 Blades..........................................................323
Cleaning the Interior...................................324
Fuses Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Fuse Specification Chart..........................289 Instrument Cluster Lens.......................324
Changing a Fuse...........................................297 Cleaning Leather Seats.............................325
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............326
Maintenance Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................326
General Information...................................298 Vehicle Storage.............................................327
Opening and Closing the Hood..............298
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L Wheels and Tires
EcoBoost™...............................................299 General Information...................................329
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Tire Care...........................................................331
Ecoboost™...............................................300
Using Snow Chains.....................................346
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................301
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........347
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L..................302
Changing a Road Wheel...........................352
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................303
Technical Specifications..........................360
Engine Oil Check..........................................303
Engine Coolant Check...............................304
Capacities and Specific-
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................308 ations
Transfer Case Fluid Check.......................308 Engine Specifications.................................361
Brake Fluid Check.......................................309 Motorcraft Parts...........................................362
Vehicle Identification Number................362

Table of Contents
Vehicle Certification Label.......................363 Information....................................................476

Transmission Code Designation............364 Climate............................................................485
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L Navigation......................................................488
EcoBoost™................................................365
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Accessories
Ecoboost™................................................369
Accessories....................................................497
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L.....373
Capacities and Specifications -
5.0L...............................................................378 Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Audio System Extended Service Plan (ESP)................499
General Information...................................383
Scheduled Maintenance
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM......384
General Maintenance Information........501
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD.................................................................386 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........504
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/ Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
SYNC...........................................................389 Maintenance.............................................507
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ Scheduled Maintenance Record............510
SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................391
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/ Appendices
CD..................................................................393
End User License Agreement.................520
Digital Radio..................................................395
Type Approvals.............................................535
Satellite Radio..............................................397
Audio Input Jack..........................................400
USB Port........................................................400
Media Hub.......................................................401
SYNC™
Using Voice Recognition...........................404
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........406
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......416
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................420
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................427
MyFord Touch™
Settings...........................................................443
Entertainment..............................................453
Phone...............................................................470

6

Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and E154903
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any A Right-hand side.
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe B Left-hand side.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable These are some of the symbols you may
local laws that may affect the use of see on your vehicle.
electronic devices while driving. Safety alert
Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout See Owner's Manual
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the Air conditioning system
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this E162384
manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

different models, so they may appear
different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling Battery
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
Battery acid
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum
based

Introduction
Brake system Front airbag
Cabin air filter Front fog lamps
Check fuel cap Fuel pump reset
Child safety door lock or unlock Fuse compartment
Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers
Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window
Cruise control Heated windshield
E71340
Do not open when hot Interior luggage compartment

release
Engine air filter Jack
Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children

E161353
Engine coolant temperature Lighting control
Engine oil Low tire pressure warning
Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level
Fan warning Note operating instructions
Fasten seatbelt Panic alarm

Introduction
Parking aid facilities may access or share among them

vehicle diagnostic information received
E139213 through a direct connection to your vehicle
Parking brake when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
Power steering fluid
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
Power windows front/rear to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
Power window lockout electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
Service engine soon for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 402).
Event Data Recording

Side airbag This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
Shield the eyes certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
E167012
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
Stability control this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
E138639 The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
Windshield wash and wipe
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
DATA RECORDING
• How various systems in your vehicle
Service Data Recording were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
Service data recorders in your vehicle are passenger safety belts were
capable of collecting and storing buckled/fastened;
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
• How far (if at all) the driver was
This potentially includes information about
depressing the accelerator and/or
the performance or status of various
the brake pedal; and
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake • How fast the vehicle was traveling;
systems. In order to properly diagnose and and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company, • Where the driver was positioning
Ford of Canada, and service and repair the steering wheel.

Introduction
This data can help provide a better Note: Including to the extent that any
understanding of the circumstances in law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
which crashes and injuries occur. applies to SYNC or its features, please
Note: Event data recorder data is note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
recorded by your vehicle only if a equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data may, through any paired and connected
is recorded by the event data recorder cell phone, disclose to emergency
under normal driving conditions and no services that the vehicle has been in a
personal data or information (e.g., name, crash involving the deployment of an
gender, age, and crash location) is airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
recorded (see limitations regarding 911 activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Assist and Traffic, directions and Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
Information privacy below). However, may also be capable of being used to
parties, such as law enforcement, could electronically or verbally provide to 911
combine the event data recorder data operators the vehicle location (such as
with the type of personally identifying latitude and longitude), and/or other
data routinely acquired during a crash details about the vehicle or crash or
investigation. personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
To read data recorded by an event data provide the most appropriate emergency
recorder, special equipment is required, services. If you do not want to disclose
and access to the vehicle or the event this information, do not activate the 911
data recorder is needed. In addition to Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 402).
the vehicle manufacturer, other
Additionally, when you connect to
parties, such as law enforcement, that
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
have such special equipment, can read
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
the information if they have access to
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
location, travel direction, and speed
Canada do not access event data
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
recorder information without obtaining
help provide you with the directions,
consent, unless pursuant to court order
traffic reports, or business searches
or where required by law enforcement,
that you request. If you do not want
other government authorities or other
Ford or its vendors to receive this
third parties acting with lawful
information, do not activate the
authority. Other parties may seek to
service. For more information, see
access the information independently
Traffic, Directions and Information,
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
Canada.
(page 402).
10

Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 For your convenience we offer a number

of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine Phone: 1-800-727-7000
exhaust, certain vehicle components, For more information regarding Ford Credit,
certain fluids contained in vehicles as well as to access Account Manager,
and certain products of component wear please go to www.fordcredit.com.
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. REPLACEMENT PARTS
Battery posts, terminals and related RECOMMENDATION
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the Your vehicle has been built to the highest
State of California to cause cancer and standards using quality parts. We
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain recommend that you demand the use of
other chemicals known to the State of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
California to cause cancer. Wash your whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
hands after handling. maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
PERCHLORATE Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt Scheduled Maintenance and
pretensioners and remote control batteries Mechanical Repairs
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle One of the best ways for you to make sure
end of life disposal. that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
For more information visit: recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
Web Address this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ specifications.
perchlorate
Collision Repairs
FORD CREDIT We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
(U.S. Only) Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing structural integrity, corrosion protection
and lease plans to help you acquire your and dent resistance. During vehicle
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
11

Introduction
development we validate these parts On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)

deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
sure you are getting this level of protection (OBD-II) system has a data port for
is to use genuine Ford replacement diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
collision parts. services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
Warranty on Replacement Parts aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement remote insurance company monitoring,
parts are the only replacement parts that remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage engine reprogramming, may cause
caused to your vehicle as a result of the interference or damage to vehicle systems.
failure of non-Ford parts may not be We do not recommend or endorse the use
covered by the Ford Warranty. For of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
additional information, refer to the terms OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
and conditions of the Ford Warranty. may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in device.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and
New Vehicle Limited Warranty utility type vehicles
For a detailed description of what is WARNING
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, Utility vehicles have a significantly
refer to the Warranty Manual that is higher rollover rate than other types
provided to you along with your Owner’s of vehicles.
Manual.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
Special Instructions this Owner’s Manual carefully. Your vehicle
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted is not a passenger car. As with other
with sophisticated electronic controls. vehicles of this type, failure to operate your
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
WARNINGS vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
Failure to follow the specific injury or death.
warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury. See Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Supplementary Restraints System See Snowplowing (page 274).
(page 43).
Front seat mounted rear-facing child Using your vehicle as an ambulance
or infant seats should NEVER be Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
placed in front of an active Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford
passenger airbag. Ambulance Preparation Package.
12

Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
EQUIPMENT Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
Using mobile communications equipment built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
is becoming increasingly important in the Manual for all other required
conduct of business and personal affairs. information and warnings.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
loss of vehicle control, crash and
you use extreme caution when using any
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
while driving and encourage the use of
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
13

Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

is compatible with and properly installed
See the following sections for directions in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
on how to properly use safety restraints station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
for children. free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
WARNINGS
check with your local St. John Ambulance
Always make sure your child is office for referral to a CPST or for further
secured properly in a device that is information, contact your provincial
appropriate for their height, age and ministry of transportation, locate your local
weight. Child safety restraints must be St. John Ambulance office by searching for
bought separately from your vehicle. St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Failure to follow these instructions and Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371
guidelines may result in an increased risk (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
of serious injury or death to your child. restrain children in safety seats made
All children are shaped differently. especially for their height, age, and weight
The recommendations for safety may result in an increased risk of serious
restraints are based on probable injury or death to your child.
child height, age and weight thresholds Do not leave children or animals
from National Highway Traffic Safety unattended in the vehicle. On hot
Administration and other safety days, the temperature in the trunk or
organizations, or are the minimum vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
requirements of law. Ford recommends Exposure of people or animals to these
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child high temperatures for even a short time
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and can cause death or serious heat-related
consult your pediatrician to make sure your injuries, including brain damage. Small
child seat is appropriate for your child, and children are particularly at risk.
15

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint

type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety seat
toddlers (generally age four or younger). (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a belt-positioning
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener- booster seat.
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle safety belt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 shoulder belt centered
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom- across the shoulder and
mended by child restraint manufacturer). chest, and seat back
upright.
• You are required by law to properly use

safety seats for infants and toddlers in INSTALLING CHILD
the United States and Canada. RESTRAINTS
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster Child Seats
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See E142594
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 45).
16

Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called • Place the vehicle seat upon which the
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or child seat will be installed in the upright
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or position.
children weighing 40 pounds (18 • Put the safety belt in the automatic
kilograms) or less (generally age four or locking mode. This vehicle does not
younger). require the use of a locking clip.
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts Perform the following steps when
(Except Front Center Position of installing the child seat with combination
Super Cab and Crew Cab) lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
WARNINGS a forward facing child seat, the steps are
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a the same for installing a rear facing child
child seat. Never place a rear-facing seat.
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the seat is installed all the way
back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
E142528
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
rendering those features potentially with a combination lap and shoulder
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants belt.
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with

combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button E142529
pointing up and away from the safety 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
seat, with the tongue between the child then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
seat and the release button, to prevent belt together.
accidental unbuckling.
17

Child Safety
E142530 E142875
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 5. To put the retractor in the automatic
portions together, route the tongue locking mode, grasp the shoulder
through the child seat according to the portion of the belt and pull downward
child seat manufacturer's instructions. until all of the belt is pulled out.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
E142531 retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142533
18

Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
Force the seat down with extra weight, (Front Center Position of Super
for example, by pressing down or Cab and Crew Cab)
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order WARNINGS
to force slack from the belt. This is Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
necessary to remove the remaining child seat. If you must use a
slack that will exist once the extra forward-facing child seat in the front
weight of the child is added to the child seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
restraint. It also helps to achieve the the seat is installed all the way back.
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean Rear facing child seats should never
toward the buckle will help to remove be placed in front of an active airbag.
remaining slack from the belt. Always use both lap and shoulder
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat safety belt in the center seating
is equipped). position.
The belt webbing below the tongue is the

lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above
the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path E142528
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no 1. Position the child safety seat in the
more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of front center seat.
movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
19

Child Safety

for that seating position until you hear
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E162708
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142533
5. While pushing down with your knee on

the child seat pull up on the shoulder
belt portion to tighten the lap belt
portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
E142530
6. Allow the safety belt to retract and
remove any slack in the belt to securely
3. While holding both shoulder and lap tighten the child safety seat in the
portions next to the tongue, route the vehicle.
tongue and webbing through the child 7. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
seat according to the child seat is equipped).
manufacturer's instructions. Be sure
that the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142534
E142531
20

Child Safety
8. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than 1
inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash. E146522
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety 2. After positioning the child safety seat
Technician to make certain the child in the proper seating position, grasp the
restraint is properly installed. In Canada, shoulder belt and lap belt together
check with your local St. John Ambulance behind the belt tongue.
office for referral to a Child Passenger
Safety Technician.
Using Inflatable Safety Belts

(Rear Seat Outboard Positions) (If
Equipped)
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat

with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
21

Child Safety
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the

inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to
move freely is normal, even after the lap belt
has been put into the automatic locking
mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
E146523 manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper device. In some instances, these devices
buckle (the buckle closest to the have been provided only for use in vehicles
direction the tongue is coming from) with safety belt systems that would
for that seating position until you hear otherwise require a locking clip.
sure the tongue is latched securely by 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
pulling on it. slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic

locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable safety belt and pull
upward until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. E146525
22

Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
Force the seat down with extra weight, for CHildren (LATCH)
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while WARNINGS
pulling down on the lap belt in order to Never attach two child safety seats
force slack from the belt. This is to the same anchor. In a crash, one
necessary to remove the remaining anchor may not be strong enough to
slack that will exist once the extra hold two child safety seat attachments
weight of the child is added to the child and may break, causing serious injury or
restraint. It also helps to achieve the death.
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean Depending on where you secure a
toward the buckle will additionally help child restraint, and depending on the
to remove remaining slack from the child restraint design, you may block
belt. access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat rendering those features potentially
is equipped). unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three

vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the vehicle seat back and
seat cushion meet (called the seat bight)
and one top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
E142534 attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
10. Before placing the child in the seat, positions in your vehicle. This type of
forcibly move the seat forward and attachment method eliminates the need
back to make sure the seat is securely to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
held in place. To check this, grab the however the safety belt can still be used
seat at the belt path and attempt to to attach the child seat if the lower anchors
move it side to side and forward and are not used. For forward-facing child
back. There should be no more than seats, the top tether strap must also be
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement attached to the proper top tether anchor,
for proper installation. if a top tether strap has been provided with
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA your child seat.
Certified Child Passenger Safety Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH lower
Technician to make certain the child anchors for child seat installation at the
restraint is properly installed. In Canada, following seating positions (LATCH is not
check with your local St. John Ambulance available on Regular Cab):
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
23

Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E166694
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors

from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (280
millimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
E166695 specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat between
the cushion and seatback. Follow the child The lower anchors at the center of the
seat manufacturer's instructions to second row rear seat are spaced 25.7
properly install a child seat with LATCH inches (652 millimeters) apart. The
attachments. standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 11 inches (280 millimeters)
Follow the instructions later in this chapter center to center. A child seat with rigid
on attaching child safety seats with tether LATCH attachments cannot be installed
straps. at the center seating position. LATCH
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the compatible child seats (with attachments
child seat only to the anchors shown. on belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child
seat manufacturer's instructions permit
use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not
attach a child seat to any lower anchor if
an adjacent child seat is attached to that
anchor.
24

Child Safety
Each time you use the safety seat, check Contact the manufacturer of your child
that the seat is properly attached to the seat for information about ordering a
lower anchors and tether anchor, if tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
side and forward and back where it is does not reach the appropriate top tether
secured to the vehicle. The seat should anchor in the vehicle.
move less than one inch when you do this
The passenger seats of your vehicle may
for a proper installation.
be equipped with built-in tether strap
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, anchors located behind the seats as
the risk of a child being injured in a crash described below.
greatly increases.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH loops of webbing above the seatback or
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child an anchor bracket behind the seat on the
Safety Seats rear edge of the seat cushion.
The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super
When used in combination, either the Cab has three straps along the top of the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors seat back that function as both routing
may be attached first, provided a proper loops for the tether straps and anchor
installation is achieved. Attach the tether loops.
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
Using Tether Straps top view):
Many forward-facing child safety seats Regular Cab
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
E166696
25

Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E166697
Attach the tether strap only to the 2. Locate the correct anchor for the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The selected seating position. You may
tether strap may not work properly if need to pull the seat back forward to
attached somewhere other than the access the tether anchors. Make sure
correct tether anchor. the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child seat.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
attachments, do not tighten the tether
shown.
strap enough to lift the child seat off the
vehicle seat cushion when the child is Regular Cab passenger and center
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug seats (located on back panel)
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
Front Seat Tether Strap

Attachment (Regular Cab)
E175295
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat and under the If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
head restraint. child safety seat may not be retained
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head properly in the event of a crash.
restraints, route the tether strap under the 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
head restraint and between the head according to the manufacturer's
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether instructions.
strap over the top of the seat back.
26

Child Safety
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,

the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford
also recommends its use.
Rear Seat Tether Strap

Attachment (Crew Cab and Super
Cab)
E162714
1. Route the tether strap under the head

restraint and through the loop directly
behind the child seat.
E167009
There are three loops of webbing just

above the back of the rear seat (along the
bottom edge of the rear window). Use
E162715
these loops as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child safety
seat tether straps. 2. Route the tether strap behind the head
restraint supports to a loop behind an
For example, the center loop can be used adjacent seating position, and hook the
as a routing loop for a child safety seat in strap hook onto the loop. If using the
the center rear seat and as an anchoring driver side, pass the strap behind the
loop for child seats installed in the shoulder belt for the center seat.
outboard rear seats. Always put the tether strap through the
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if routing loop. The head restraint
the tether strap is hooked to the loop support post will hold the child seat
directly behind the child seat. To provide tightly, but the head restraint post is
a tight tether strap: not strong enough to hold the child
seat during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
27

Child Safety
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,

the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford
also recommends its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
E142595
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm • Can the child sit all the way back
or behind the back because it against their vehicle seat back with
reduces the protection for the upper part knees bent comfortably at the edge of
of the body and may increase the risk of the seat cushion?
injury or death in a crash. • Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides hips?
may not accommodate the shoulder portion • Is the shoulder belt centered on the
of the inflatable safety belt. shoulder and chest?
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for • Can the child stay seated like this for
children who have outgrown or no longer the whole trip?
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
Always use booster seats in conjunction
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and Types of Booster Seats
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E68924
• Backless booster seats
28

Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a • High back booster seats

removable shield, remove the shield. If a If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
vehicle seating position has a low seat find a seating position that adequately
back or no head restraint, a backless supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat may place your child's head booster seat would be a better choice.
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case, Children and booster seats vary in size and
move the backless booster to another shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
seating position with a higher seat back or lap belt low and snug across the hips,
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, never up across the stomach, and lets you
or consider using a high back booster seat. adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E70710
E142596
29

Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle WARNINGS

seat upon which it is being used, placing a provided for installation and use in
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet conjunction with the instructions and
liner under the booster seat may improve warnings provided by your vehicle
this condition. Do not introduce any item manufacturer. A safety seat that is
thicker than this under the booster seat. improperly installed or utilized, is
Check with the booster seat inappropriate for your child's height, age,
manufacturer's instructions. or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
CHILD RESTRAINT
Never let a passenger hold a child on
POSITIONING his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
WARNINGS protect the child from injury in a crash,
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a which may result in serious injury or death.
child seat. Never place a rear-facing Never use pillows, books, or towels
child seat in front of an active airbag. to boost a child. They can slide
If you must use a forward-facing child seat around and increase the likelihood
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat of injury or death in a crash.
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back. When possible, all children Always restrain an unoccupied child
age 12 and under should be properly seat or booster seat. These objects
restrained in a rear seating position. If all may become projectiles in a crash or
children cannot be seated and restrained sudden stop, which may increase the risk
properly in a rear seating position, properly of serious injury.
restrain the largest child in the front seat. Never place, or allow a child to place,
Always carefully follow the the shoulder belt under a child's arm
instructions and warnings provided or behind the back because it
by the manufacturer of any child reduces the protection for the upper part
restraint to determine if the restraint device of the body and may increase the risk of
is appropriate for your child's size, height, injury or death in a crash.
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
30

Child Safety
WARNINGS WARNINGS
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt

Combined (lower (lower and top and LATCH only
Restraint weight of anchors anchors tether (lower
Type child and and top only) anchor anchors
child seat tether and top
anchor) tether
anchor)
Rear facing Up to 65 lb
X X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Rear facing Over 65 lb
X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Forward
Up to 65 lb
facing X X X
(29.5 kg)
child seat
Forward
Over 65 lb
facing X X
(29.5 kg)
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
139).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped)

When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
31

Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the

rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
32

Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

When possible, all children 12 years
WARNINGS old and under should be properly
Always drive and ride with your restrained in a rear seating position.
seatback upright and the lap belt Failure to follow this could seriously
snug and low across the hips. increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce the risk of injury, make Safety belts and seats can become
sure children sit where they can be hot in a vehicle that has been closed
properly restrained. up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
Never let a passenger hold a child on buckles before you place a child anywhere
his or her lap while the vehicle is near them.
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash, Front and rear seat occupants,
which may result in serious injury or death. including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
All occupants of the vehicle, protection in an accident.
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint All seating positions in this vehicle have
system is provided. Failure to properly wear lap and shoulder safety belts. All
your safety belt could seriously increase occupants of the vehicle should always
the risk of injury or death. properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a is provided.
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in The safety belt system consists of:
these areas are more likely to be seriously • Lap and shoulder safety belts.
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride • Shoulder safety belt with automatic
in any area of your vehicle that is not locking mode, (except driver safety
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be belt).
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly. • Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
person is significantly more likely to
outboard seating positions.
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly • Safety belt warning light and chime.
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never • Crash sensors and monitoring system
swing the safety belt around your neck over with readiness indicator.
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
33

Seatbelts
The safety belt pretensioners at the front

seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the pretensioners will be
activated when the Safety Canopy is
activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS E142588
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts 2. To unfasten, press the release button
similar and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination Using the Safety Belt with Cinch
lap and shoulder belts. Tongue (Front Center Seat)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down
the belt webbing when the belt is stowed
or while putting safety belts on. When you
buckle the lap and shoulder safety belt,
the cinch tongue will allow you to shorten
the lap portion, but pinches the webbing
to keep the lap portion from getting longer.
The cinch tongue is designed to slip during
a crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
either the lap or shoulder portions.
E142587 Before you can reach and latch a lap and
shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it.
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
34

Seatbelts
While you are fastened in the safety belt,

the lap and shoulder belt with a cinch
tongue adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will
become locked and help reduce your
forward movement.
Using Safety Belts During

Pregnancy
E162708 WARNING
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some Always ride and drive with your
webbing out of the shoulder belt seatback upright and the safety belt
retractor. properly fastened. The lap portion of
2. While holding the webbing below the the safety belt should fit snug and be
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion) positioned low across the hips. The
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the shoulder portion of the safety belt should
webbing and slide the tongue upward. be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue

WARNING
The lap belt should fit snugly and as
low as possible around the hips, not
across the waist.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the

retractor so that the shoulder belt
portion of the safety belt crosses your
shoulder and chest. E142590
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the Pregnant women should always wear their
belt is twisted, remove the twist. safety belt. Position the lap belt portion of
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper a combination lap and shoulder belt low
buckle for your seating position until across the hips below the belly and worn
you hear a snap and feel it latch. as tight as comfort will allow. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
4. Make sure you securely fasten the shoulder and the center of the chest.
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
35

Seatbelts
Safety Belt Locking Modes Automatic Locking Mode
WARNINGS In this mode, the shoulder belt is

automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
After any vehicle crash, the safety
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt system at all passenger seating
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
positions must be checked by an
available on the driver safety belt.
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for When to Use the Automatic Locking
child seats is still functioning properly. In Mode
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function. Use this mode any time you install a child
safety seat in a front outboard passenger
The belt and retractor must be
seating position in a Regular Cab,
replaced if the safety belt assembly
SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating
automatic locking retractor feature
position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
or any other safety belt function is not
optional front seat's center safety belt has
operating properly when checked by an
a cinch mechanism. Children 12 years old
authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
and under should be properly restrained in
belt and retractor assembly could increase
a rear seat whenever possible. See Child
the risk of injury in crashes.
Safety (page 15).
All safety restraints in the vehicle are How to Use the Automatic Locking
combination lap and shoulder belts. The Mode
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode, and the front outboard Non-inflatable safety belts
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,
turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph E142591
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward 1. Buckle the combination lap and
movement of the driver and passengers. shoulder belt.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If downward until you pull the entire belt
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and out.
pull webbing out again in a slow and 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
controlled manner. retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
36

Seatbelts
Rear outboard inflatable safety belts Note: The rear inflatable safety belts are
(second row only– if equipped) compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the safety
belt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder safety belt webbing.
• Lap safety belt webbing with
E146363 automatic locking mode.
1. Buckle the combination lap and • The same warning light, electronic
shoulder belt. control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front safety belts.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until the entire belt is • Impact sensors located in various parts
pulled out. of the vehicle.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt How does the rear inflatable safety belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. system work?
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode. The rear inflatable safety belts will
function like standard restraints in
How to Disengage the Automatic everyday usage.
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If

Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or E146364
modify the rear inflatable safety belt.
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
The rear inflatable safety belts are fitted webbing.
in the shoulder portion of the safety belts
of the second-row outboard seating
positions.
37

Seatbelts
If the safety belt is too short when fully

extended, you can obtain a safety belt
extension assembly from an authorized
dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at
the end of the webbing on the label or on
the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the
safety belt extension only if the safety belt
is too short for you when fully extended.
E146365
SEATBELT HEIGHT
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
ADJUSTMENT
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body WARNING
than regular safety belts. This helps reduce Position the safety belt height
pressure on the chest and helps control adjuster so that the belt rests across
head and neck motion for passengers. the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
WARNING
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
If the rear inflatable safety belt has and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
deployed, it will not function again.
The rear inflatable safety belt system
must be replaced by an authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable safety belts are

designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
crashes, rollovers and some side impact
crashes. The fact that the rear inflatable
safety belt did not inflate in a crash does
not mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause
activation.
E145664
Safety Belt Extension Assembly Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
WARNINGS the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the To adjust the shoulder belt height:
torso. 1. Pull the button and slide the height
Do not use extensions with an adjuster up or down.
inflatable safety belt.
38

Seatbelts
2. Release the button and pull down on SEATBELT WARNING LAMP

the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place. AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver's safety belt is not buckled The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
before the ignition switch is turned to the 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
on position... 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the The safety belt warning light and warning
indicator light is illuminated and the chime turn off.
warning chime is sounding...
The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- chime remain off.
tion...
The system uses information from the

front passenger sensing system to
SEATBELT REMINDER determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
Belt-Minder™ of a warning. To avoid activating the
This feature supplements the safety belt Belt-Minder feature for objects you place
warning function by providing additional in the front passenger seat, only the front
reminders that intermittently sound a tone seat passengers receive warnings as
and illuminate the safety belt warning light determined by the front passenger sensing
when you are in the driver seat or you have system.
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
unbuckled. (warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
39

Seatbelts
If... Then...
You and the front seat passenger buckle The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
You or the front seat passenger do not The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle safety belt warning light illuminates and a
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
on... or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute safety belt warning light illuminates and a
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on... or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before

Deactivating and Activating the proceeding with the programming
Belt-Minder Feature procedure.
WARNING Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed • The parking brake is set.
to improve your chances of being • The transmission is in park (P).
safely belted and surviving an accident. • The ignition is off.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may • The driver and front passenger safety
use the vehicle. belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
Note: The driver and front passenger engine.
warnings switch on and off independently. 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
When you perform this procedure for one turns off (about one minute). After
seating position, do not buckle the other Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds
position as this will terminate the process. before proceeding with Step 3. Once
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot you start Step 3, you must complete
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the the procedure within 30 seconds.
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled,
it will be re-enabled during the use of
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 57).
40

Seatbelts
3. For the seating position you are Ford Motor Company recommends that
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
safety belt three times at a moderate involved in a crash be replaced. However,
speed, ending in the unbuckled state. if the crash was minor and an authorized
After Step 3, the safety belt warning dealer finds that the belts do not show
light turns on. damage and continue to operate properly,
4. While the safety belt warning light is they do not need to be replaced. Safety
on, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash
belt. After Step 4, the safety belt should also be inspected and replaced if
warning light flashes for confirmation. either damage or improper operation is
noted.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on. Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 321).
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND

SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
41

Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System provides an How Does the Personal Safety
improved overall level of frontal crash System Work?
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of The Personal Safety System can adapt the
airbag-related injuries. The system is able deployment strategy of the safety devices
to analyze different occupant conditions according to crash severity and occupant
and crash severity before activating the conditions. A collection of crash and
appropriate safety devices to help better occupant sensors provides information to
protect a range of occupants in a variety the restraints control module. During a
of frontal crash situations. crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
The Vehicle Personal Safety System or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
consists of: based on crash severity and occupant
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag conditions.
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage
sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
42

Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The airbags are a supplemental restraint

system and are designed to work with the
WARNINGS safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
Airbags do not inflate slowly or body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
gently, and the risk of injury from a there is a risk of injury from a deploying
deploying airbag is the greatest close airbag.
to the trim covering the airbag module.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
All occupants of your vehicle, cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
including the driver, should always airbag deploys. This is normal.
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
system is provided. Failure to properly wear upon activation. After airbag deployment,
your safety belt could seriously increase it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
the risk of injury or death. residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
Always transport children 12 years (to lubricate the bag) or sodium
old and under in the back seat and compounds (for example, baking soda)
always properly use appropriate that result from the combustion process
child restraints. Failure to follow this could that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
seriously increase the risk of injury or death. sodium hydroxide may be present which
Never place your arm over the airbag may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
module as a deploying airbag can the residue is toxic.
result in serious arm fractures or While the system is designed to help
other injuries. reduce serious injuries, contact with a
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
child seat. Never place a rear-facing or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
child seat in front of an active airbag. a possibility as a result of the noise
If you must use a forward-facing child seat associated with a deploying airbag.
in the front seat, move the seat upon which Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
the child seat is installed all the way back. with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
Do not attempt to service, repair, or facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
modify the airbag supplemental particularly to occupants who are not
restraint systems or its fuses as you properly restrained or are otherwise out of
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact position at the time of airbag deployment.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Thus, it is extremely important that
Several airbag system components occupants be properly restrained as far
get hot after inflation. To avoid risk away from the airbag module as possible
of injury, do not touch them after while maintaining vehicle control.
inflation. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag required.
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
43

DRIVER AND PASSENGER Proper Driver and Front Passenger

Seating Adjustment
AIRBAGS
WARNING
WARNINGS
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Never place your arm or any objects Administration recommends a
over an airbag module. Placing your minimum distance of at least 10
arm over a deploying airbag can inches (25 centimeters) between an
result in serious arm fractures or other occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
injuries. Objects placed on or over the module.
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury. To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
child seat. Never place a rear-facing • Move your seat to the rear as far as you
child seat in front of an active airbag. can while still reaching the pedals
If you must use a forward-facing child seat comfortably.
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat • Recline the seat slightly (one or two
upon which the child seat is installed all degrees) from the upright position.
the way back. After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will Children and Airbags
deploy during significant frontal and near WARNING
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag child seat. Never place a rear-facing
system consists of: child seat in front of an active airbag.
• driver and passenger airbag modules. If you must use a forward-facing child seat
• front passenger sensing system. in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
· crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 49).
44

WARNINGS
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always
sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
E142846 performance of the front passenger
Children must always be properly sensing system which could seriously
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that increase the risk of injury or death.
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
E181984
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the The front passenger sensing system uses
adults. A child or infant properly restrained a passenger airbag status indicator which
in the center front seat should not incur will illuminate indicating that the front
risk of serious injury from the airbags. passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled). The indicator
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING lamp is located in the center stack of the
instrument panel.
SYSTEM
Note: When the ignition is first turned on,
WARNINGS the passenger airbag status indicator OFF
and ON lamps will illuminate for a short
Even with Advanced Restraints period to confirm it is functional.
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a The front passenger sensing system is
rear seating position. Failure to follow this designed to disable (will not inflate) the
could seriously increase the risk of injury or front passenger frontal airbag under
death. certain conditions:
• The front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
45

• A passenger takes their weight off of If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
the seat for a period of time. passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
• If there is a problem with the airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit, it is
system or the passenger sensing possible that the person is not sitting
system. properly in the seat. If this happens:
Even with this technology, parents are • Turn your vehicle off and ask the
strongly encouraged to always properly person to place the seatback in the full
restrain children in the rear seat. upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
• When the front passenger sensing centered on the seat cushion, with the
system disables (will not inflate) the person's legs comfortably extended.
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator will • Restart your vehicle and have the
illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to person remain in this position for about
remind you that the front passenger two minutes. This will allow the system
frontal airbag is disabled. to detect that person and enable the
passenger's frontal airbag.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status • If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then even after this, you should advise the
turn your vehicle off, remove the child person to ride in the rear seat.
restraint from your vehicle and reinstall Note: When the passenger airbag status
the restraint following the child indicator OFF lamp is illuminated, the
restraint manufacturer's instructions. passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may
The front passenger sensing system works be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
with sensors that are part of the front deployment issues.
passenger seat and safety belt. The After all occupants have adjusted their
sensors are designed to detect the seats and put on safety belts, it is very
presence of a properly seated occupant important that they continue to sit
and determine if the front passenger properly. A properly seated occupant sits
frontal airbag should be enabled. upright, leaning against the seatback, and
• When the front passenger sensing centered on the seat cushion, with their
system enables the front passenger feet comfortably extended on the floor.
frontal airbag (may inflate), the Sitting improperly can increase the chance
passenger airbag status indicator will of injury in a crash event. For example, if
illuminate the ON lamp and remain an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
illuminated. sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
46

• Objects hanging off the seatback. • Wait at least two minutes and verify
• Objects stowed in the seatback map that the airbag readiness light in the
pocket. instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• If the airbag readiness light in the
• Cargo interference with the seat instrument cluster remains illuminated,
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on this may or may not be a problem due
the seat. to the front passenger sensing system.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting Do not attempt to repair or service the
or pushing on the seat. system. Take your vehicle immediately to
The conditions listed above may cause the an authorized dealer.
weight of a properly seated occupant to If it is necessary to modify an advanced
be incorrectly interpreted by the front front airbag system to accommodate a
passenger sensing system. The person in person with disabilities, contact the Ford
the front passenger seat may appear Customer Relationship Center.
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the previous list.
SIDE AIRBAGS
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
WARNINGS
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 49). Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the cover, on the side of the seatbacks
following: (of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
The driver and adult passengers should deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
check for objects lodged underneath the instructions may increase the risk of
front passenger seat or cargo interfering personal injury in the event of a crash.
with the seat.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering The use of accessory seat covers
with the seat, please take the following may prevent the deployment of the
steps to remove the obstruction: side airbags and increase the risk of injury
• Pull your vehicle over. in an accident.
• Turn your vehicle off. Do not lean your head on the door.
• Driver or adult passengers should The side airbag could injure you as it
check for any objects lodged deploys from the side of the
underneath the front passenger seat seatback.
or cargo interfering with the seat. Do not attempt to service, repair, or
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found). modify the airbag, its fuses or the
• Restart your vehicle. seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
47

WARNINGS Note: The passenger sensing system will

If the side airbag has deployed, the deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
airbag will not function again. The side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
side airbag system (including the seat.
seat) must be inspected and serviced by The design and development of the side
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not airbag system included recommended
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase testing procedures that were developed
the risk of injury in a crash. by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
The side airbags are located on the Working Group. These recommended
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front testing procedures help reduce the risk of
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the injuries related to the deployment of side
airbag on the side affected by the crash airbags.
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and SAFETY CANOPY™
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
E152533
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
The system consists of the following: the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
• A label or embossed side panel headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
indicating that side airbags are fitted airbags as you could be seriously injured
to your vehicle. or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks. All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
• Front passenger sensing system. wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
• Crash sensors and monitoring system seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
with readiness indicator. See Crash To reduce risk of injury, do not
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page obstruct or place objects in the
49). deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
48

WARNINGS The system consists of the following:

If the curtain airbags have deployed, • Safety canopy curtain airbags located
the curtain airbags will not function above the trim panels over the front
again. The curtain airbags (including and rear side windows identified by a
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) label or wording on the headliner or
must be inspected and serviced by an roof-pillar trim.
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is • A flexible headliner which opens above
not replaced, the unrepaired area will the side doors to allow air curtain
increase the risk of injury in a crash. deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
The Safety Canopy will deploy during system with a readiness
significant side crashes or when a certain indicator. See Crash Sensors
likelihood of a rollover event is detected and Airbag Indicator (page 49).
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet Children 12 years old and under should
metal, behind the headliner, above each always be properly restrained in the rear
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will with children restrained using a properly
be activated, regardless of which seats are installed child or booster seat because it
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed is designed to inflate downward from the
to inflate between the side window area headliner above the doors along the side
and occupants to further enhance window opening.
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events. The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND

AIRBAG INDICATOR
E75004 WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
49

Your vehicle has a collection of crash and The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
occupant sensors which provide or front airbags did not activate for both
information to the restraints control front seat occupants in a crash does not
module which deploys (activates) the mean that something is wrong with the
front safety belt pretensioners, optional system. Rather, it means the restraints
rear inflatable safety belts, driver airbag, control module determined the accident
passenger airbag, seat mounted side conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
airbags, and the Safety Canopy®. Based were not appropriate to activate these
on the type of crash (frontal impact, side safety devices.
impact or rollover), the restraints control • The design of the front airbags is to
module will deploy the appropriate safety activate only in frontal and near-frontal
devices. crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
The restraints control module also rear impacts unless the crash causes
monitors the readiness of the above safety sufficient frontal deceleration).
devices plus the crash and occupant • The design of the safety belt
sensors. The readiness of the safety pretensioners and optional rear
system is indicated by a warning indicator inflatable safety belts is to activate in
light in the instrument cluster or by a frontal, near-frontal and side crashes,
backup tone if the warning light is not and in rollovers.
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
• The design of the side airbags is to
95). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
not required.
Side airbags may activate in other
A difficulty with the system is indicated by types of crashes if the vehicle
one or more of the following: experiences sufficient sideways motion
The readiness light will not or deformation.
illuminate immediately after the • The design of the Safety Canopy is to
ignition is turned on. inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
• The readiness light will either flash or may activate in other types of crashes
stay lit. if the vehicle experiences sufficient
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The sideways motion or deformation, or a
tone pattern will repeat periodically certain likelihood of rollover.
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired. AIRBAG DISPOSAL
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
restraint system serviced at an authorized possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the qualified personnel.
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
50

Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON computers or cell phones can interfere with

remote operation. Operating your remote
RADIO FREQUENCIES control near metal or metallic-finished
purses, bags or clothing can interfere with
This device complies with Part 15 of the remote operation. You can lock and unlock
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada the doors with the key.
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
conditions: (1) This device may not cause leaving it unattended.
harmful interference, and (2) This device Note: If you are in range, the remote control
must accept any interference received, will operate if you press any button
including interference that may cause unintentionally.
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not Intelligent Access
expressively approved by the party The system uses a radio frequency signal
responsible for compliance could void the to communicate with your vehicle and
user's authority to operate the equipment. authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
The term IC before the radio certification of the following conditions are met:
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met. • You touch the inside of the front
exterior door handle.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10 • You press the tailgate release button.
meters). Vehicles with the remote start • You press a button on the transmitter.
feature will have a greater range. One of If excessive radio frequency interference
the following could cause a decrease in is present in the area or if the transmitter
operating range: battery is low, you may need to
• weather conditions mechanically unlock your door. You can
• nearby radio towers use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
• structures around the vehicle door in this situation. See Remote
• other vehicles parked next to your Control (page 51).
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, REMOTE CONTROL
such as amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
controls and alarm systems may operate (If Equipped)
on the same frequency as your remote
control. If other transmitters are operating Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
on those frequencies, you may not be able unlock or lock the driver door from outside
to use your remote control. Using your your vehicle. The transmitter portion
remote control near some types of functions as the remote control.
electronic equipment, such as USB devices,
51

Your intelligent access keys operate the

power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade

The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E191532
Press the button to release the key. Press

and hold the button to fold the key back
in when not in use.
E176269
Slide the release on the back of the remote

control and pivot the cover off to access
E151795
the key blade.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a
security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with

a security tag that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in
a safe place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery

Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
E191531
52

Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the

battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
103).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter E151799
The remote control uses one coin-type 3. Carefully remove the cover.
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key before
beginning the procedure.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
E191533
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
1. Insert a screwdriver in the position release the battery.
shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
53

6. Install a new battery with the + facing

up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Transmitter

The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
E176226
3. Remove the batteries.

4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
E151796
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off. You can use the remote control to recall
memory settings for the driver seat, power
mirrors, steering column and power foot
pedals.
Press the unlock button on a linked remote
control to recall the memory positions. If
you enable the easy-entry-and-exit
feature, the seat moves to the easy-entry
position. The seat moves to the driver
memory position when you put the key in
the ignition.
Linking a Preset Position to your

E153890 Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing. See Memory Function (page 144).
54

Car Finder Many states and provinces restrict the use

of remote start. Check your local and state
Press the button twice within or provincial laws for specific requirements
three seconds. The horn sounds regarding remote start systems.
E138623 and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method The remote start system does not work if:
to locate your vehicle, rather than using • The ignition is on.
the panic alarm. • The alarm system triggers.
• You disable the feature.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
• The hood is open.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when • The transmission is not in P.
the ignition is off.
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
Press the button to activate the
• The service engine soon light is on.
alarm. Press the button again or
E138624 switch the ignition on to Remote Control Feedback
deactivate.
An LED on the remote control provides
Remote Start (If Equipped)
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
WARNING
LED Status
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked Solid green Remote start or
indoors or areas that are not well extension
ventilated. successful
Solid red Remote stop
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
successful; vehicle
is low on fuel.
off
The remote start button is on the
transmitter. Blinking red Remote start or
E138625 stop failed
This feature allows you to start your Blinking green Waiting for status
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The update
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
Remote Starting the Vehicle
You can configure vehicles with automatic
climate control to turn on the automatic Note: You must press each button within
climate control when you remote start your three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
vehicle. See Automatic Climate Control remote starts only if you follow this
(page 133). A manual climate control sequence.
system runs at the setting you set it to
when you switched off the vehicle.
55

Extending the Vehicle Run Time

Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start period. If you programmed
the periods to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes begins after what is left of the
first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle has run from the first remote start
E138626 for five minutes, the vehicle continues to
run now for a total of 20 minutes. You can
The tag with your transmitter details the extend the remote start up to a maximum
starting procedure. of 35 minutes.
To remote start your vehicle: Wait at least five seconds before remote
1. Press the lock button. starting after a vehicle shutdown.
2. Press the remote start button twice. Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
The exterior lamps flash twice. Starting
The horn sounds if the system fails to start, Press the button once. The
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the parking lamps turn off.
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce E138625
noise. You can switch it on or off in the You may have to be closer to the
information display. See General vehicle than when starting due to ground
Information (page 103). reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
Note: If you have remote started your
vehicle with an integrated keyhead You can disable or enable the remote start
transmitter, you must switch on the ignition system through the information display.
before driving your vehicle. With an See General Information (page 103).
intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the brake pedal before driving your
vehicle. REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
The power windows do not work during REMOTE CONTROL
the remote start and the radio does not
turn on automatically. Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
The parking lamps remain on and the Authorized dealers can program remote
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes controls for your vehicle. See Passive
depending on the setting. Anti-Theft System (page 67).
56

MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Driver assist features, if equipped on

your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
MyKey allows you to program keys with blind spot information system (BLIS),
restricted driving modes to promote good cross traffic alert, lane departure
driving habits. All but one of the keys warning and forward collision warning
programmed to the vehicle can be system.
activated with these restricted modes. • Satellite radio adult content
Any keys that have not been programmed restrictions (available only in some
are referred to as administrator keys or markets).
admin keys. They can be used to:
Configurable Settings
• Create a MyKey.
With an admin key, you can configure
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
certain MyKey settings when you first
• Clear all MyKey features. create a MyKey and before you recycle the
When you have programmed a MyKey, you key or restart the vehicle. You can also
can access the following information using change the settings afterward with an
the information display: admin key:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are • A vehicle speed limit can be set.
programmed to your vehicle. Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
• The total distance your vehicle has vehicle reaches the set speed. You
traveled using a MyKey. cannot override the set speed by fully
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the depressing the accelerator pedal or by
same settings. You cannot program them setting cruise control.
individually.
WARNING
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a Do not set MyKey maximum speed
MyKey and an admin key are present when limit to a limit that will prevent the
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes driver from maintaining a safe speed
the admin key only. considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
Non-configurable Settings always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
The following settings cannot be changed Failure to do so could result in accident or
by an admin key user: injury.
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
57

MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be You can program the configurable features
set. Once you select a speed, it will be now or at any time. You can advance
shown in the display, followed by an through the settings without programming
audible tone when the preselected them by pressing the OK button. MyKey
vehicle speed is exceeded. then keeps all of the default settings.
• Audio system maximum volume of When you finish programming your MyKey,
45%. A message will be shown in the the Type 3 information display adds a
display when you attempt to exceed confirmation screen, New MyKey Has
the limited volume. Also, the Been Created.
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be Programming/Changing
disabled. Configurable Settings
• Always on setting. When this is Use the information display to program or
selected, you will not be able to turn change your configurable MyKey settings.
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or 1. Place your admin key into the ignition
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is or, if your vehicle is equipped with
equipped with these features). keyless start, place your admin
transmitter into the backup position.
Details on the backup position's
CREATING A MYKEY location are in another chapter. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
Use the information display to create a 159).
MyKey. 2. Depending on your display options,
To create a MyKey: select either Settings or Advanced
1. Place your key into the ignition or, if Settings, then MyKey and finally to
your vehicle is equipped with keyless various configurable features.
start, place your transmitter into the 3. Scroll down through the choices, and
backup position. Details on the backup then highlight the feature you want to
position's location are in another configure.
chapter. See Starting a Gasoline Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
Engine (page 159). settings at any time during the same key
2. Switch the ignition on. cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
3. Access the main menu using your have switched the engine off, however, you
left-hand-side steering wheel controls. will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
4. Depending on your display options,
select either Settings or Advanced
Settings, then MyKey and finally CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
Create MyKey.
5. When the menu reads Hold OK to You can clear all MyKeys within the same
Create MyKey, press and hold the OK key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
button to program a MyKey. switch your ignition off, however, you will
need to use an admin key to clear your
6. The display then prompts you to MyKeys.
program the Configurable settings.
58

MyKey™
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status at once. STATUS
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, You can find information on programmed
use the information display and the MyKey(s) using the information display
left-hand-side steering wheel controls: control on the steering wheel. See
1. Access the main menu and select Information Displays (page 103).
Settings, then MyKey and finally
Clear MyKeys.
2. Press and hold OK.
3. When you finish clearing all MyKeys,
the Type 3 information display adds a
confirmation screen, MyKey Cleared.
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to

access the main menu and scroll to:
Message Description
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
{0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
59

MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start

systems. If you choose to install a remote
START SYSTEMS start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MyKey is not compatible with non
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 159).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable • The key or transmitter used to start your
settings. vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. • The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
MyKey (page 58).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.
60

MyKey™
Condition Potential Causes
I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft

System (page 67).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
No MyKey functions with the keyless • An admin transmitter is present at vehicle

entry transmitter. start.
MyKey (page 58).
61

Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Press the button again within three

seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
You can use the power door lock control indicators flash.
or the remote control to lock and unlock Press and hold both the lock and unlock
your vehicle. buttons on the remote control for four
See Tailgate (page 239). seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
Power Door Locks (If Equipped) allows your entire vehicle to unlock with
one press of the button. The direction
The power door lock control is on the driver indicators flash twice to indicate a change
and front passenger door panels. to the unlocking mode. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control and
keyless entry keypad.
Intelligent access at the driver door will
unlock your entire vehicle when you disable
two-stage unlocking.
Locking the Vehicle
E138628
A Unlock.
B Lock.
Remote Control (If Equipped)

You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage E187796

Unlock)
Press the button to lock all doors. The
direction indicators flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors are closed.
Mislock
If any door is open, or if the hood is open
on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn will sound twice and
E187795
the direction indicators will not flash.
Press the button to unlock the driver door.
62

Locks
Activating Intelligent Access (If At the Electronic Tailgate

Equipped)
The intelligent access key must be within

3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
At the Front Doors
Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock
and open the door. The unlock sensor is on
the back of the handle. Make sure not to
touch the lock sensor area on the front of
the handle.
E187693
Press the exterior tailgate release button

inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate
will unlock and open. See Tailgate (page
239).
Smart Unlock (If Equipped)

This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
E190690 rear cargo area.
Press and hold the lock sensor area for If you leave your key in the ignition, when
about a second to lock your vehicle. To you open the driver door and lock your
avoid unlocking the door inadvertently, vehicle with the power door lock control,
make sure you only touch the lock sensor the doors lock then unlock.
and not other areas of the door handle. You can still lock your vehicle with the key
After locking the doors with the lock in the ignition by:
sensor, there is a brief delay before you can • Using the manual lock on the inside of
unlock your vehicle. This delay lets you pull the door.
the handle to make sure it locked.
• Locking the driver door with a key.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean • Using the keyless entry keypad.
to avoid issues with operation.
• Using the lock button on the remote
control.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent

Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
63

Locks
When you lock your vehicle using the Illuminated Entry

power door lock control (with the door
open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your The interior lamps and select exterior
vehicle will search for an intelligent access lamps illuminate when you unlock the
key in the passenger compartment after doors with the remote entry system.
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a The illuminated entry system turns off the
key, all of the doors will immediately lights if:
unlock.
• The ignition is on.
In order to override the smart unlock • You press the remote control lock
feature and intentionally lock the button.
intelligent access key inside your vehicle,
you can lock your vehicle after all doors • After 25 seconds of illumination.
are closed by using the keyless entry The dome lamp does not turn on if the
keypad, pressing the lock button on control is set to the off position.
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another The lights do not turn off if:
intelligent access key in your hand. • You switch them on with the dimmer
control.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock • Any door is open.
control, all doors will lock then unlock if
the ignition is on. Battery Saver
The battery saver turns off the interior
Autolock and Autounlock (If Equipped) lamps 30 minutes after you switch off the
The autolock feature locks all the doors ignition if a door is open and the dome
when your doors are closed, the ignition is lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior
on, and your vehicle reaches a speed lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp
greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). switch is off.
When your doors autolock while driving, Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
stopping the vehicle then switching the Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
ignition off or to accessory and opening
the driver door unlocks all your doors. This If you leave the ignition on after leaving
autounlock feature remains active for 10 your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after
minutes after stopping. you close all of the doors.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
have electronically locked them before KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
opening the driver door.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
Enabling or Disabling KEYPAD
You can enable or disable these features The keypad is located near the driver
independently of each other using the window. It is invisible until touched and
information display. An authorized dealer then it illuminates so you can see and
can also help you enable or disable these touch the appropriate buttons.
features. See General Information (page
103).
64

Locks
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast To program additional personal entry
on the keypad, the unlock function may not codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly. • Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
E190936
You can use the keypad to: Erasing a Personal Code

• Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
• Program and erase user codes. 2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. within five seconds.
You can operate the keypad with the 3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code This must be done within five seconds
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the of completing Step 2.
glove box and is available from an All personal codes erase and only the
authorized dealer. You can also create up factory-set five-digit code will work.
to five of your own five-digit personal entry
codes. Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
Programming a Personal Entry Code
The programmed entry codes will recall
To create your own personal entry code: driver memory positions as follows:
1. Enter the factory-set code. • Entry code one will recall driver 1
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five memory positions.
seconds. • Entry code two will recall driver 2
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You memory positions.
must enter each number within five • Entry code three will recall driver 3
seconds of each other. memory positions.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save Note: Personal entry codes four and five
personal code one. will not recall memory positions
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
65

Locks
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See General
Information (page 103).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
66

Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT Replacement Keys

SYSTEM (If Equipped) Note: Your vehicle may have two integrated
keyhead transmitters.
Note: The system is not compatible with The integrated keyhead transmitter
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. functions as a programmed ignition key. It
Use of these systems may result in vehicle operates all the locks, starts the vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security and acts as a remote control.
protection.
If your programmed transmitters or
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost
or a second coded key on the same key or stolen and you do not have an extra
chain may cause vehicle starting problems coded key, you need to have your vehicle
if they are too close to the key when starting towed to an authorized dealer. You need
the engine. Prevent these objects from to erase the key codes from your vehicle
touching the coded key while starting the and program new coded keys.
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the Store an extra programmed key away from
coded key and restart the engine if a your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
problem occurs. any inconveniences. Contact an authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key replacement keys.
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle. Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
SecuriLock™
Note: You can program a maximum of
The system is an engine immobilization eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight
system. It helps prevent the engine from can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the You can program your own integrated
wrong key may prevent the engine from keyhead transmitter or standard
starting. A message may appear in the SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
information display. procedure programs both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
If you are unable to start the engine with a portion of the remote control to your
correctly coded key, the system has vehicle.
malfunctioned. A message may appear in
the information display. Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
Automatic Arming You must have two previously
The system arms immediately after you programmed coded keys and the new
switch the ignition off. unprogrammed key readily accessible.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
Automatic Disarming spare key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the system. Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
67

Security
1. Insert the first previously programmed Note: If your programmed transmitters are
coded key into the ignition. lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep coded key, you need to have your vehicle
the ignition on for at least three towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys. Store an extra
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the programmed key away from your vehicle in
first coded key from the ignition. a safe place to help prevent any
4. After three seconds but within 10 inconvenience. Contact an authorized dealer
seconds of switching the ignition off, to purchase additional spare or replacement
insert the second previously coded key keys.
into the ignition. You must have two previously
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep programmed intelligent access keys inside
the ignition on for at least three your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. intelligent access keys readily accessible.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the Contact an authorized dealer to have the
second previously programmed coded spare key programmed if two previously
key from the ignition. programmed keys are not available.
7. After three seconds but within 10 Make sure that your vehicle is off before
seconds of switching the ignition off beginning this procedure. Make sure that
and removing the previously you close all the doors before beginning
programmed coded key, insert the new and that they remain closed throughout
unprogrammed key into the ignition. the procedure. Perform all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep and wait for at least one minute before
the ignition on for at least six seconds starting again if you perform any steps out
until you hear the door locks cycle. of sequence.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
Read and understand the entire procedure
key from the ignition.
before you begin.
The key starts the engine if programming
Type One
is successful. You can operate the remote
entry system if the new key is an integrated
keyhead transmitter.
If programming was not successful, wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent

Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle. E187576
68

Security
Type Two 7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent

access key in the backup slot and press
the push button ignition switch. After
three seconds but within 10 seconds
of switching the ignition off and
removing the previously programmed
coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
E187577 If programming was not successful, wait
1. Place the first programmed key in the 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.
backup slot (A) in the center console, If you are still unsuccessful, take your
then press the push button ignition vehicle to an authorized dealer.
switch. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
ignition.
2. Wait five seconds and then press the The active anti-theft system is designed
push button ignition switch again. to warn you in the event of unauthorized
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep vehicle entry and is also designed to help
the ignition on for at least three prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. You can choose what is monitored by
3. Remove the intelligent access key. arming the system in different ways. See
Switch the ignition off and remove the Information Displays (page 103).
first coded key from the ignition. The direction indicators flash and the horn
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second sounds if the system triggers while the
programmed intelligent access key in alarm is armed.
the backup slot. Press the push button Take all remote controls to an authorized
ignition switch. After three seconds but dealer if there is any potential alarm
within 10 seconds of switching the problem with your vehicle.
ignition off, insert the second previously
coded key into the ignition. Reduced Guard (If Equipped)
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
To monitor the following:
push button ignition switch again.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep • Doors.
the ignition on for at least three • Hood.
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
• Tailgate.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
Switch the ignition off and remove the Lock your vehicle using the key in the driver
second previously programmed coded door lock cylinder.
key from the ignition.
69

Security
Full Guard (If Equipped) • Switch the ignition on or start your

vehicle.
To monitor the following:
• Use a key in the driver door lock
• Doors. cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
• Hood. switch the ignition on within 12
seconds.
• Tailgate.
• Movement inside your vehicle. Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control stops the horn and direction
• Change in vehicle inclination, for indicators, but will not disarm the system.
example, unwanted towing.
Lock your vehicle using the remote control
or the power door lock control with the
accompanying door open and then close
all doors.
Note: Do not choose full monitor mode if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur or when the vehicle is in transport.
Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure all
windows are closed prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences and
make sure of correct interior motion
detection. Additionally, the interior motion
sensing system will not arm if any door is
ajar.
Arming the Alarm

The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
to arm the alarm.
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm

Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad.
70

Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
USING POWER RUNNING Automatic Power Deploy

BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the
running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
Turn off the running boards before E166682
jacking or placing any object under
The running boards automatically extend
your vehicle. Never place your hand
down and out when you open the door.
between the extended running board and
This can help you enter and exit your
your vehicle. A moving running board may
vehicle.
cause injury.
Automatic Power Stow
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board When you close the doors, the running
motors, or the running board underbody boards return to the stowed position after
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking. a two-second delay.
Always use proper jacking points.
Manual Power Deploy
Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures. You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display. See
Note: The running board mechanism may General Information (page 103).
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this Set the running boards in the deployed
happens, manually set the running boards position to access the roof.
to the deployed position. Then, wash the The running boards return to the stowed
system, in particular the front and rear hinge position and enter automatic mode when
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand. the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling

You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
103).
71

Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
• When disabled (OFF), the running

boards move to the stowed position
regardless of the door position.
• When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
72

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 139).
E180534
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering

Column (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

E180482 correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
1. Unlock the steering column. Position (page 139).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
73

Steering Wheel
Easy Entry and Exit Feature

The column moves to the full up and in
position when you switch the ignition off.
It returns to the previous setting when you
switch the ignition on. You can enable or
disable this feature in the information
display.
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)

You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E180535
E191327
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position. A Volume up.
To adjust: B Media.
• tilt: press the top or bottom of the C Seek up or next.
control
D Volume down.
• telescope: press the front or rear of the
control. E Seek down or previous.
Memory Feature Media

You can save and recall the steering Press repeatedly to scroll through available
column position with the memory function. audio modes.
See Memory Function (page 144).
Pressing the adjustment control during Seek, Next or Previous
memory recall cancels the operation. The Press the seek button to:
column responds to the adjustment
control. • Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or previous track.
74

Steering Wheel
Press and hold the seek button to: CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band. Type 1
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E191329
Type 2
E191328
A Mute.
B Voice recognition.
C End call.
D Answer call.
See SYNC™ (page 402). See MyFord

Touch™ (page 436).
E191337
See Cruise Control (page 212).
75

Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E191336
See Information Displays (page 103).
76

Pedals
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If The Horizontal Control

Equipped)
Note: Never use the controls when your feet

are on the accelerator or brake pedals,
especially when the vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).
Depending on your vehicle and equipment
level, the shape and location of your A B
power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
E162916
• If your control is vertical, then it is to
the left of the steering column and on
A. Farther.
the instrument panel.
• If your control is horizontal, then it is on B. Closer.
the left side of the steering column.
Both horizontal and vertical controls
The Vertical Control operate the same way:
1. Press and hold A to move the pedals
away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals
closer to you.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 144).
E176213
A. Farther.
B. Closer.
77

Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before Note: Make sure you switch off the wipers
switching on the windshield wipers. before entering a car wash.
Note: Make sure you switch off the Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
windshield wipers before entering a car ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
wash. inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper smearing.
blades if they begin to leave streaks or In these conditions, you can do the
smears. If that does not resolve the issue, following to help keep your windshield
install new wiper blades. clear:
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers.
windshield. This may scratch the glass, • Change the wiper speed to normal or
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper high-speed wipe as necessary.
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry • Switch the autowipers off.
windshield. The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the
amount of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It will
adjust the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield. You can switch this feature on
or off in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 103).
E172816
Rotate the end of the control:

• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed dependent wipers (if

equipped) E172817
When your vehicle speed increases, the

interval between wipes decreases.
78

Wipers and Washers
Use the rotary control to adjust the • A brief press causes a single wipe
sensitivity of the rain sensor. With low without washer fluid.
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when • A brief press and hold causes the
the sensor detects a large amount of wipers to swipe three times with
moisture on the windshield. With high washer fluid.
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when
the sensor detects a small amount of • A long press and hold will turn on the
moisture on the windshield. wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean
because the rain sensor is very sensitive. If A wipe will occur a few seconds after
the area around the interior mirror is dirty, washing to clear any remaining washer
then the wipers may turn on, for example, fluid. You can switch this feature on or off
if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. in the information display. See
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E172818
79

Lighting
LIGHTING CONTROL Headlamp Flasher
E163268
E142449
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
A Off. release it to flash the headlamps.
B Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
rear lamps.
C Headlamps. WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
High Beams not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch

the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams E142451
off.
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
80

Lighting
If equipped, the following also activate INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them DIMMER
on in the information display:
Note: You disable the manual dimmer
• Configurable daytime running lamps. when you adjust the setting to Auto
• Automatic high beam control. Dimming in the information display. See
• Adaptive headlamp control. Information Displays (page 103).
The headlamps remain on for a period of Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
time after you switch the ignition off. Use becomes discharged, the illuminated
the information display controls to adjust components will switch to the maximum
the period of time that the headlamps setting.
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 103).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
E161902
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper Press repeatedly or press and hold until
activation: you reach the desired level.
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
81

Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
Equipped) or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
WARNING 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
The daytime running lamps system position.
does not activate the rear lamps and 5. The headlamps are off.
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also, The other lighting control switch positions
the autolamps switch position may not do not activate the daytime running lamps,
activate the headlamps in all low visibility and you can use them to temporarily
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure override autolamp control.
the headlamps are switched to auto or on, When switched off in the information
as appropriate, during all low visibility display, the daytime running lamps are off
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a in all lighting control switch positions.
crash.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable) CONTROL (If Equipped)
The daytime running lamps turn on when: The system automatically turns on the high
1. The ignition is switched to the on beams if it is dark enough and no other
position. traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
vehicles with automatic transmissions lighting, the system turns off the high
or the parking brake is released for beams before they distract other drivers.
vehicles with manual transmissions. The low beams remain on.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
Note: If it appears that automatic high
lamp or autolamps positions.
beam is not functioning properly, check the
4. The headlamps are off. windshield in front of the camera for a
blockage. A clear view of the road is required
Type 2 - Configurable for proper system operation. Make sure that
Switch the daytime running lamps on or authorized personnel repair any windshield
off using the information display controls. damage in the area of the camera's field of
See Information Displays (page 103). view.
The daytime running lamps turn on when: Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
1. They are switched on in the information and you do not observe changes, the system
display. See Information Displays may go into low beam mode until you clear
(page 103). the blockage. A message may also appear
2. The ignition is switched to the on in the information display noting the front
position. camera is blocked.
82

Lighting
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water Activating the System
spots do not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam control. However, in Switch on automatic high beam control
cold or inclement weather conditions, you using the information display and
may notice a decrease in the availability of autolamps. See Information Displays
the automatic high beam control, especially (page 103).
at start up. If you want to change the beam
state independently of the system, you may
switch the high beams on or off using the
lighting control switch. Automatic high
beam control resumes when conditions are
correct.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
E142451
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle, Switch the lighting control to the
continuously monitors conditions to decide autolamps position.
when to switch the high beams off and on.
Manually Overriding the System
Once the system is active, the high beams
switch on if: When automatic high beam control has
• The outside light level is low enough. activated the high beams, pushing or
pulling the stalk provides a temporary
• There is no traffic in front of your override to low beam.
vehicle.
Use the information display menu to
• The vehicle speed is greater than
permanently deactivate the system, or
32 mph (52 km/h).
switch the lighting control from autolamps
The high beams switch off if: to headlamps.
• The system detects the headlamps of
an approaching vehicle or the rear
lamps vehicle in front of you.
• Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph
(44 km/h).
• The outside light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
83

Lighting
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped) • To operate the left direction indicator,
push the lever down until it stops and
releases.
• To operate the right direction indicator,
push the lever up until it stops and
releases.
• To cancel direction indicator operation
manually, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
E142453
stop position and release. The direction
Press the control to switch the fog lamps indicators flash three times and stop.
on or off. • Push the lever up or down to the first
You can switch the fog lamps on when the stop position and hold. The direction
lighting control is in any position except indicators flash for as long as you hold
Off and the high beams are not on. the lever in this position.
DIRECTION INDICATORS SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped)

The spot lamps are positioned on the
forward-facing side of the exterior mirrors.
When the parking lamps are on due to the
lighting control switch being in the parking
lamps, headlamps, or autolamps position,
press the buttons located above the
lighting control switch to activate the
left-hand or right-hand side spot lamps.
E163272
The direction indicator lever does not

mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The
direction indicator activation and
cancellation is electronic.
E176842
84

Lighting
Once switched on, the spot lamps light the

area in front of and to the side of your
vehicle.
Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by
moving the position of the exterior mirrors.
For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim
of the lamps by folding the exterior mirror
into or away from the windows. For
power-folding mirrors, use the switch
located on the driver-side door. See
Exterior Mirrors (page 89).
Note: The spot lamps turn off
automatically when you reach a speed of
6 mph (10 km/h).
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps

The cargo lamps are positioned in the
central high mounted stop lamp and to
either side of the cargo box.
The trailer hookup lamp is positioned on
E190880
the tailgate next to the handle.
To switch on the lamps, press When switched on, these lamps light the
the button located in the lighting cargo area of your vehicle and the trailer
E189587 control panel, or the button hitch.
located in the cargo box near the lamp. Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn off automatically when you reach a
speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also turn off
automatically after 10 minutes, fading
gradually to off.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The following lamps switch on when:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
Front Interior Lamps

Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each switch on the overhead console
depends upon which roof, sunroof, and
window shade features are equipped on the
vehicle.
85

Lighting
Note: Touch the required switch to switch Type 2

the door function off when you open any
door. When the door function is off and you
open a door, the courtesy and door lamps
will stay off. Touch the switch again to
switch the door function back on. When the
door function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps will switch on.
Type 1
E176210 D A B C D
E192153
A. Left-hand side map lamp switch.
B. All lamps on switch. A. All lamps on switch.
C. Door function switch. B. Door function switch.
D. Right-hand side map lamp C. All lamps off switch.
switch.
D. Map lamp switches.
E187342
A. All lamps on switch.

B. Door function switch.
86

Lighting
Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped) You can switch the lamps on or off by
pressing the button.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)

Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen. See MyFord Touch™ (page
436). See MyFord Touch™ (page 436).
E187343
You can switch the lamps on or off by

pressing the button.
E182517
A. Left-hand side map lamp switch.

B. Right-hand side map lamp
switch.
E187345
87

Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped) Restoring the One-Touch Up Function

You may lose the one-touch function if the
WARNINGS vehicle battery is low.
Do not leave children unattended in To reset the function after the battery
your vehicle and do not let them play recharges:
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves. 1. Pull the switch all the way up.
When closing the power windows, 2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
you should verify they are free of and continue to hold for two seconds.
obstructions and make sure that 3. Press the switch down and operate the
children and pets are not in the proximity window to the full down position.
of the window openings. One-touch up will now be functional.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window will stop automatically while
closing. It will reverse some distance if
there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
E176215 WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
Press the switch to open the window.
feature, the window will not reverse
Lift the switch to close the window. if it detects an obstacle. Take care
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when when closing the windows to avoid
just one of the windows is open. Lower the personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise. Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped) bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
Press or lift the switch fully and release it. The window will stop if you release the
Press or lift it again to stop the window. switch before the window closes fully.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.
88

Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock (If Equipped) Press and hold the control to open the
window. Pull and hold the control to close
the window.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)

You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
E176216 Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear WARNING
window controls.
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
Power Sliding Back Window (If vehicle is moving.
Equipped)
WARNINGS
When operating the power sliding
back window, you must make sure
all rear seat occupants and cargo are
not in the proximity of the back window.
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
E144073
A Left-hand mirror.
B Adjustment control.
C Right-hand mirror.
E176217
The control is on the overhead console.
89

Windows and Mirrors
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the E176218
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position. To fold both mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped) the engine running) and then:
1. Press the control.
2. Press control again to unfold the
mirrors.
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.
The left-hand and right-hand mirrors move
at different rates. For example, one mirror
may stop while the other one continues to
move. This is normal.
E163061 Moving the mirrors 10 or more times within
one minute, or repeated folding and
This feature lets you extend the mirror unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
about 3 inches (75 millimeters). It is useful control down during full travel, may disable
when towing a trailer. You can manually the system to protect the motors from
pull out or push in the mirrors to the desired overheating. Wait approximately three
position. minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
90

Windows and Mirrors
Loose Mirror To adjust your mirrors, make sure you

switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in
If your power-folding mirrors are manually accessory mode or the engine running) and
folded, they may not work properly even then:
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if: 1. Press and release the control. It lights.
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive. 2. Press the adjustment control to
position the mirrors.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• Press the left arrow to extend the
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or mirrors out. Press the right arrow to
unfolded position. retract the mirrors in.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal • Press the up or down arrow to fold
driving position. the mirrors toward the window
To reset the power-fold feature, use the glass. Press the up or down arrow
power-folding mirror control to fold and again to fold the mirrors out.
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
noise as you reset the power-folding within one minute, or repeated folding and
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
process as needed each time the mirrors control down during full travel, may disable
are manually folded. the system to protect the motors from
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping overheating. Wait approximately three
Mirrors (If Equipped) minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
This feature lets you position both mirrors system to reset and for function to return to
at the same time. normal.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page

137).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror

positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 144).
Auto-dimming Feature (if

E176218 equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming
mirror turns on.
91

Windows and Mirrors
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped) Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
While the vehicle is running, the If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
forward-facing portion of the appropriate mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
mirror housing blinks when you switch on is at a safe distance, signal that you are
the direction indicator. going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped) carefully change lanes.
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
The lower, outer part of the mirror housings

light when you switch the headlamps or
parking lamps on. C
Spot Lamps (If Equipped)
The area lights are on the forward-facing
portion of the mirror housing. You can
switch them on and off by using the
controls located on the instrument panel.
See Lighting (page 80). B
360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
Each mirror includes a camera.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If A

Equipped)
WARNING E138665
Objects in the blind spot mirror are

The image of the approaching vehicle is
closer than they appear.
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated image becomes larger and begins to move
convex mirror built into the upper outboard outboard across the main mirror as the
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can vehicle approaches (A). The image
assist you by increasing visibility along the transitions from the main mirror and begins
side of your vehicle. The blind spot mirror to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
is only on the driver exterior mirror. vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
92

Windows and Mirrors
Blind Spot Information System (If SUN VISORS

Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System

(page 224).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of E138666

any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning Rotate the sun visor toward the side
products. window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
E162197
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
view when backing up.
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
93

Windows and Mirrors
WARNINGS closed. Note: The sunshade

When closing the moonroof, you stops short of its fully opened
should verify that it is free of position for the comfort of rear
obstructions and make sure that passengers. To open the
children and pets are not in the proximity sunshade fully, press the control
of the roof opening. again.
D Sunshade close. Press and
The moonroof controls are located on the release to close the sunshade.
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its E Moonroof close. Press and
movement during one-touch operation, release to close the moonroof
press the control a second time. from either the open or vent
positions.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses
some distance if an obstacle is detected
while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two
seconds after the roof comes to a stop
following a bounce-back reversal.
E191272
A Moonroof open. Press and

release to open the moonroof.
The moonroof stops short of the
fully opened position. Press and
release the control again to open
the moonroof fully.
B Moonroof vent. Press and
release to vent the moonroof.
C Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
94

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E176090
A Engine oil pressure gauge

B Engine coolant temperature gauge
C Fuel gauge
D Transmission fluid temperature gauge
E Speedometer
F Information display See General Information (page 103).
G Tachometer
95

Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E176091
A Engine oil pressure gauge

B Engine coolant temperature gauge
C Fuel gauge
D Transmission fluid temperature or Turbo boost (Ecoboost engine only) gauge
E Speedometer
F Information display See General Information (page 103).
G Tachometer
96

Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
should stay in the normal operating range the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
(between L and H). If the needle falls side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
below the normal range, stop your vehicle, located.
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is The needle should move toward F when
correct, have your vehicle checked by an you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
authorized dealer. to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
Engine Coolant Temperature After refueling some variability in needle
Gauge position is normal:
WARNING • It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
Never remove the coolant reservoir This is normal and depends upon the
cap while the engine is running or hot. slope of pavement at the gas station.
• The fuel amount dispensed into the
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At tank is a little less or more than the
normal operating temperature, the level gauge indicated. This is normal and
indicator will be in the normal range. If the depends upon the slope of pavement
engine coolant temperature exceeds the at the gas station.
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off
safely possible, switch off the engine and
before the tank is full, try a different
let the engine cool.
gas pump nozzle.
Fuel Gauge Low Fuel Reminder
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. gauge needle is at 1/16th or about 35 miles
(56km) to empty, whichever occurs first.
Variations:
Note: The low fuel warning and distance-to-empty warning can appear at different fuel
gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.
Driving type (fuel economy Fuel gauge position Distance-to-empty
conditions)
Highway driving 1/16th 35 miles to 80 miles (56 km

to 129 km)
Severe duty driving (trailer 1/16th-1/4 10 miles to 35 miles (16 km
towing, extended idle) to 56 km)
97

Instrument Cluster
Transmission Fluid Temperature WARNING LAMPS AND

Gauge
INDICATORS
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level The following warning lamps and
indicator will be in the normal range. If the indicators will alert you to a vehicle
transmission fluid temperature exceeds condition that may become serious. Some
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon lamps will illuminate when you start your
as safely possible and verify the airflow is vehicle to make sure they work. If any
not restricted such as snow or debris lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
blocking airflow through the grill. Also, refer to the respective system warning
higher than normal operating temperature lamp for further information.
can be caused by special operation Note: Some warning indicators appear in
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or the information display and function the
off-road use). Refer to Special operating same as a warning lamp but do not display
conditions in the scheduled maintenance when you start your vehicle.
information for instructions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods with the Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
gauge in the higher than normal area may
cause internal transmission damage. You The speed control system
need to alter the severity of your driving indicator light changes color to
E144524
conditions to lower the transmission indicate what mode the system
temperature into the normal range. If the is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
gauge continues to show high (page 213).
temperatures, see an authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Braking System
Information Display
If it illuminates when you are
Odometer driving, this indicates a
Located in the bottom of the information malfunction. You will continue
display. Registers the accumulated to have normal braking (without Anti-lock
distance your vehicle has traveled. braking system) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
Compass system checked by an authorized dealer.
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Automatic High Beam (If Equipped)
Trip Computer
Illuminates when this feature is
See General Information (page 103). on. See Automatic High Beam
Control (page 82).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 103). Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)
It will illuminate to inform you
when the engine shuts down or
in conjunction with a message.
98

Instrument Cluster
Battery Cruise Control (If Equipped)

If it illuminates while driving, it Illuminates gray or green when
indicates a malfunction. Switch you switch this feature on. See
off all unnecessary electrical E71340 Using Cruise Control (page
equipment and have the system checked 212).
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Direction Indicator
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
Illuminates when the left or right
It will illuminate when you switch turn signal or the hazard warning
this feature off or in conjunction flasher is turned on. If the
E151262
with a message. See Blind Spot indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
Information System (page 224). a burned out bulb.
Brake System Door Ajar

It will illuminate when you Displays when the ignition is on
engage the parking brake with and any door is not completely
E144522
the ignition on. closed.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that you do not have the parking brake Electronic Locking Differential
engaged. If you do not have the parking
brake engaged, this indicates low brake Illuminates when using the
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. electronic locking differential.
E163170
Have the system checked immediately by
an authorized dealer. Electric Park Brake (If Equipped)
WARNING It will illuminate or flash when
Driving your vehicle with the warning E146190
the electric parking brake has a
lamp on is dangerous. A significant malfunction. See Electric
decrease in braking performance Parking Brake (page 191).
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by Engine Coolant Temperature
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake Illuminates when the engine
engaged can cause brake failure and the coolant temperature is high.
risk of personal injury. Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
Check 4X4 (If Equipped) See Engine Coolant Check (page 304).
Illuminates with the message

CHECK 4X4 when a four-wheel
drive fault is present. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 180).
99

Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine E163175
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to E181779
do so and switch the engine off. Check the Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check engaged.
(page 303).
Front Airbag
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct. If it fails to illuminate when you
Have the system checked by your authorized start your vehicle, continues to
dealer immediately. flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
Fasten Safety Belt by an authorized dealer.
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
your safety belt.
It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If
Equipped)
High Beam
Note: Some indicators will appear different
depending on vehicle options. Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the
E163173
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)

E181778
Illuminates momentarily when you select Illuminates when hill descent is
two-wheel drive high. switched on.
E163171
Low Fuel Level

E181781
Illuminates when the automatic Illuminates when the fuel level
four-wheel drive system is engaged. is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
E163174
Low Tire Pressure Warning
E181780 Illuminates when your tire
Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is pressure is low. If the lamp
engaged. remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
100

Instrument Cluster
It will also illuminate momentarily when WARNING

you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate Under engine misfire conditions,
when you switch the ignition on, or begins excessive exhaust temperatures
to flash at any time, have the system could damage the catalytic
checked by your authorized dealer. converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
Parking Lamps dealer service your vehicle immediately.
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on. When you first switch the ignition on,
before engine start, the service engine soon
indicator light illuminates to check the bulb
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced and to indicate whether your vehicle is
Power/Electronic Throttle Control ready for inspection maintenance testing.
Illuminates when the system has Normally, the service engine soon light will
detected a powertrain or an stay on until you crank the engine, and then
all-wheel drive fault. Contact an turn itself off if no malfunctions are
authorized dealer as soon as possible. present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
Service Engine Soon it means that your vehicle is not ready for
inspection maintenance testing. See
If the service engine soon Emission Control System (page 171).
indicator light stays illuminated
after you start the engine, it Sport Mode
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics Illuminates when you switch the
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction sport mode on.
of your vehicle emissions control system. E176099
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more Traction and Stability Control
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System Illuminates when the system is
(page 171). active. If it remains illuminated
E138639 or does not illuminate when you
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is switch the ignition on, this indicates a
occurring which could damage your malfunction. During a malfunction the
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate system will switch off. Have the system
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and checked by an authorized dealer
deceleration) and have your vehicle immediately. See Using Stability
serviced immediately. Control (page 197).
Traction and Stability Control Off

Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on
or when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 197).
101

Instrument Cluster
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped) Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)

Illuminates when the tow/haul Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
feature has been activated. If the vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
E161509 light flashes steadily, have the the last door is closed and your keyless
system serviced immediately, damage to vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
the transmission could occur. See still on.
Automatic Transmission (page 174).
Rear Park Aid Warning
A detection warning sounds when
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND obstacles are within a certain range of the
INDICATORS bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever you switch the
Airbag Secondary Warning ignition on.
Sounds if there is a malfunction with the Parking Brake On Warning
safety belt warning lamp and there is a
fault in the supplemental restraints Sounds when you have left the parking
system. brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
Beltminder Warning released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
Sounds when a safety belt is unfastened immediately.
in an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving. Service Advancetrac Warning
Door Ajar Warning Sounds when there is a malfunction with
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) or
Sounds when any door is not completely Rollover Stability Control (RSC) system.
closed and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h).
Headlamps On Warning
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Key in Ignition Warning

Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
102

Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Information Display Controls

(Type 1 and 2)
WARNING
against the use of any handheld device
Various systems on your vehicle can be

controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
E176092
• Press the up and down arrow buttons

to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
Main menu (Type 1)

• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel economy
• Driver assist
• Settings
103

Note: Some options may appear slightly

different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 & 2
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip options.
Trip 1 & 2
Digital Speed - Press OK for km/h

Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
Average Fuel
• Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• Fuel Used - Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
• Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
Fuel Economy
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Auto StartStop status
• Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
• Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
• Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time. Press and hold
OK to reset this value.
• Auto StartStop status - Shows the current status of the auto startstop system.
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
104

Driver Assist
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different driver setting choices.
Driver Assist
Driver Assist Engine Hour Engine Hours XXXXXX

Engine Idle Hours XXXXXX
Tire Pressure Vehicle graphic with tire pres-
sures
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Trlr Brake Electric
Elect.ov.Hydro.
Trailer Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Tire Pressure
E185360
Displays your current vehicle tire pressures.
Settings
Settings
Vehicle DTE Calc. Normal

Towing
Lighting Autolamp Delay Off or XXX seconds
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Locks Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
105

Settings
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled

Remote Unlock Driver's Door or All
Doors
Oil Life Reset Remaining Life XX% - Hold OK to reset
Remote Start Climate Control Auto or Last setting
Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Wipers Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabled
MyKey MyKey Status Admin Keys and MyKeys
MyKey Mileage
Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
911 Assist Always On or Selectable
Do Not Always On or Selectable
Disturb
AdvanceTrac Always On or Selectable
Max Speed Choose desired speed or Off
Speed Minder Choose desired speed or Off
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Clear MyKeys Clear MyKeys - Press OK to clear MyKeys
Display Setup Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L
Temperature °Fahrenheit or °Celsius
Tire Pressure psi, kPa or bar
Language Choose your applicable setting
• Off Road
Main menu (Type 2)
• Settings
• Display Mode
Note: Some options may appear slightly
• Trip/Fuel different or not at all if the items are
• Towing optional.
106

Display Mode
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Display Mode
DTE
Transmission Temp
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h
Engine Information - Oil Life, Engine Hours, Engine Idle Hours - Hold OK to Reset
MyKey Status - Admin Keys and MyKey Mileage
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Transmission Temp - Shows the trans temp value.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure psi.
• Engine Information - Shows engine information.
• MyKey Status - Shows the status of your MyKeys.
Tire Pressure
E184771
Trip/Fuel
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel options.
107

Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Compass - Press OK for Options Fixed North or Rotating North
Trip 1 or 2
• Gal used - Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
• Mi - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Towing
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices.
Note: Trailer options are not available if your vehicle speed is greater than 3mph (5km/h).
Towing
Trailer Status Trailer connection status

active trailer name or Default Trailer
accumulated trailer miles
Trailer brake gain
Output
Trailer Trailer Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Options
Change Trailer Selected no active trailer
Programmed trailers
108

Towing
Default Trailer
Change Trailer Settings Rename Trailer List of named
trailers, No Stored
Trailers - Press OK
to rename
Reset Trailer List of named or
Mileage default trailers -
Press OK to select
Change Trailer Default (Electric,
Brake Type Surge, None) or
Electric over
Hydraulic
Delete Trailer List of named
trailers, No stored
trailers - Press OK to
select
Change Trailer List of named
Setup trailers or default
trailers - Press OK to
Select
Add Trailer New Trailer - Press OK to select
Trailer Brake Mode Default (Electric,
Surge, None) or
Elect over Hydraul
Connection Conventional, Fifth Wheel or Gooseneck
Checklist
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Off Road
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different off road choices.
Off Road
Pitch, steering angle and roll

Power Distribution
109

Settings
Settings
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled

Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
DTE Calcula- Normal
tion
Towing
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting Autolamp Off or XXX seconds
Delay
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Locks Autolock - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Vehicle Remote Drivers Door or All Doors
Unlock
Remote Start Climate Auto or Last setting
Control
Seats Auto or Off
Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Advanced Wipers Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing - check
Settings enabled or uncheck disabled
MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
911 Assist Always On or User Selectable
Do Not Always On or User Selectable
Disturb
AdvanceTrac Always On or User Selectable
110

Settings
MAX Speed 65, 70, 75, 80 MPH (105, 115, 120, 130 km/
h) or Off
Speed Minder 45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90, 100 km/h) or
Off
Clear MyKey Hold OK to Clear MyKeys
Display Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L
Setup
• Press the up and down arrow buttons

Information Display Controls to scroll through and highlight the
(Type 3) (If Equipped) options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
Main menu
You can access the menus using the
information display control.
My View
E176094
Trip/Fuel
E176095
Truck Info
E163181
Towing
E176096
Off Road
E176093
E176097
111

Settings My View
E176098 Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following My View
E176094
options.
My View
Configure My View Add/Remove Trip/Fuel Trip 1

Screens
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Navigation/Compass
Auto StartStop
Truck Info Tire Pressure Monitor
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
MyKey Status
Towing Trailer Status
Trailer Information
Trailer Light Check
Off Road Off Road Status
Power Distribution
Reorder Screens Screen Selection 1 Up/Down moves selec-
-7 tion in the list
Press OK to select
Trip/Fuel
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following trip and
E176095 fuel options.
112

Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Navigation
Compass - Press OK for Options Fixed North or Rotating North
Trip 1 or 2
• Gal used - Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
• Mi - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Note: Some items are optional and may

Truck Info not appear.
In this mode, off-road
information depicted with
E163181 graphics are available.
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Truck Info
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h
113

Truck Info
Engine Information - Oil Life, Engine Hours, Engine Idle Hours - Hold OK to Reset
MyKey Status - Admin Keys, MyKeys and MyKey Mileage
• Gauge View - Shows the turbo boost or transmission temp value.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure psi.
• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Engine Information - Shows engine information.
• MyKey Status - Shows the status of your MyKeys.

Tire Pressure
Towing
between the following towing
E176096 options.
E184771
Note: Trailer options are not available if your vehicle speed is greater than 3mph (5km/h).
Towing
Towing Pitch Angle, sterring angle, gain and output display

Status
Towing Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles - Press OK for Trailer Options
Informa-
tion
Trailer Running, Brake/Turn Signal Light Status or No Trailer Detected
Light
Status
Trailer Trailer Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Setup -
Press OK
for Trailer
Options
114

Towing
Select Trailer no active trailer

Programmed trailers
Default Trailer
Change Trailer Settings Rename Trailer List of named
trailers, No Stored
Trailers - Press OK
to rename
Reset Trailer List of named or
Mileage default trailers -
Press OK to select
Trailer Brake Type Default (Electric,
Surge, None) or
Electric over
Hydraulic
Delete Trailer List of named
trailers, No stored
trailers - Press OK
to select
Change Trailer Conventional, Fifth
Setup Wheel or Goose-
neck
Add Trailer New Trailer - Press OK to select
Trailer Brake Mode Default (Electric,
Surge, None) or
Electric over
Hydraulic
Connec- Conventional, Fifth Wheel or Gooseneck - Press OK to Select
tion Check-
list
Off Road
between the following off road
E176097 options.
115

Off Road
Pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4

Power Distribution
Note: Some items are optional and may

Settings not appear.
Use the arrow buttons to
configure different driver setting
E176098 choices.
Settings
Auto High Beam - check enabled or uncheck disabled

Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Driver Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Collision Sensitivity High, Normal or Low
Warn
Warn On or Off
Cruise Adaptive or Normal
Control
Lane keeping Mode Alert only, Aid only or both
Sys
Intensity High, Normal or Low
DTE Calcula- Normal or Towing
tion
Vehicle Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting Autolamp Delay Off or XXX
seconds
Daytime Lights - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Locks Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
116

Settings
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck

disabled
Remote Unlock All Doors or
Driver First
Alarm All Sensors or Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Power Running Auto, Off or Out
Boards
Remote Start Climate Control Auto or Last
setting
Front Seats or Front Auto or Off
Seats and Wheel
Advanced Duration 5, 10 or 15
Settings minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Wiper Controls Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing
MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
911 Assist Always On or User Selectable
Do Not Disturb Always On or User Selectable
AdvanceTrac Always On or User Selectable
MAX Speed 65, 70, 75, 80 MPH (105, 115, 120, 130
km/h) or Off
Speed Minder 45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90, 100 km/h)
or Off
Clear MyKey Hold OK to Clear MyKeys
Display Setup Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L
117

Settings

INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E184451
Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
118

Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control

Malfunction from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
213).
Adaptive Cruise Not A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
Available tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
213).
Adaptive Cruise Not You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
Available Sensor water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
Blocked See Manual sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
213).
Normal Cruise Active The system has disabled the automatic braking.
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.
Resume Control
Adaptive Cruise Speed Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.
Too Low to Activate
Adaptive Cruise Shift The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
Down distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
Message Action
Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AdvanceTrac Off The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac On The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
119

Message Action
AdvanceTrac SPORT The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
MODE it on.
Traction Control Off The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 195).
Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 195).
Airbag
Message Action
REMOVE OBJECTS Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

NEAR PASSENGER blocked sensor.
SEAT
Alarm and Security
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm to Stop Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm, Start Vehicle Alarm (page 69).
120

Battery and Charging System
Message Action
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Battery Features The battery management system detects an extended low-
Temporarily Turned Off voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Turn Power Off to Save The battery management system determines that the battery
Battery is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message Action
Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
Sensor Blocked See tion System (page 224).
Manual
Cross Traffic Vehicle The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
Coming From X System (page 224).
Cross Traffic Not Avail- The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
able Sensor Blocked See system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
Manual System (page 224).
Cross Traffic System A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Fault dealer as soon as possible.
121

Collision Warning System
Message Action
Collision Warning A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Malfunction dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
Available Sensor water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
Blocked See Manual sensor to resolve. See Collision Warning System (page
230).
Collision Warning Not A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Available dealer as soon as possible.
Doors and Locks
Message Action
X Door Ajar The door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest break soon.
Suggested
Drivetrain
Message Action
Locking Differential The electronic locking differential (ELD) is enabled or

Engaged/Disengaged disabled.
To Engage Locking The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed
Differential Slow to XX requirement to engage.
mph/km/h
To Engage Locking The electronic locking differential request the accelerator to
Differential Release be released in order to engage.
Accelerator Pedal
122

Message Action
Check Locking Differen- An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is

tial present. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 180).
Neutral Tow Enabled The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
Leave Transmission in indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
Neutral wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Engine
Message Action
Power Reduced to Lower Engine The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
Temp engine temperature.
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message Action
Press Brake to START A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.
No Key Detected The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 158).
Restart Now or Key is You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
Needed and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Run Power Active Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.
Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
123

Message Action
Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Max Number of Keys You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
Learned system.
Not Enough Keys You have not programmed enough keys to the system.
Learned
Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.
Soon
Engine On Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.
Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
Malfunction Service as soon as possible.
Required
Front Camera Tempor- The system has detected a condition that has caused the
arily Not Available system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires you to
ility Clean Screen clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
tion Service Required as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
Wheel wheel.
124

Maintenance
Message Action
LOW Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 303).
Oil Change Required The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 303).
Brake Fluid Level LOW The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 309).
Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
Mode not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
See Manual The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.
MyKey
Message Action
MyKey Not Created You cannot program a MyKey.

MyKey Active Drive MyKey is active.
Safely
Speed Limited to XX When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
MPH/km/h that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top Speed of You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.
MyKey Setting
Check Speed Drive You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.
Safely
Buckle Up to Unmute Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.
Audio
125

Message Action
AdvanceTrac On - With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.

MyKey Setting
Traction Control On - With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.
MyKey Setting
MyKey Park Aid Cannot With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.
be Deactivated
Lane Keeping Alert On With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.
MyKey Setting
Off Road
Message Action
Hill Descent Control- Active Hill descent control mode is active.

Hill Descent Control- OFF Hill descent control mode is inactive.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
XX MPH/km/h or Less entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Select Gear You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
Hill Descent Driver Resume Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
Control resume control.
Hill Descent Control Fault A hill descent system fault is present.
Hill Descent Control Off System The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.
Cooling
Hill Descent Control-READY The hill descent control system is ready.
126

Park Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Parking Aid (page 201).
Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Parking Aid (page 201).
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Park Brake
Message Action
To Release: Press Brake The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
and Switch attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
Park Brake Use Switch The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
to Release attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Release Park Brake The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3mph (5km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Park Brake Not Applied The electric park brake is not fully applied.
Park Brake Not Released The electric park brake is not fully released.
Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special
Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Required Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
127

Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Fault Service The power steering system has detected a condition that
Now requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
Safely in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within
Service Required the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Remote Start
Message Action
To Drive: Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
and Gear Shift Button to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
Seats
Message Action
Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.
Permitted While Driving
Memory X Saved Shows where you have saved your memory setting.
Starting System
Message Action
Press Brake to Start A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .
Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Engine Start Pending The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.
Please Wait
Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start.
128

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
LOW Tire Pressure One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 347).
Tire Pressure Monitor The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
Fault warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 347).
Tire Pressure Sensor A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
Fault use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 347). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer
Message Action
Trailer Brake Gain = XZ.Z Output The current gain setting for the trailer brake.
= BAR 1
Trailer Brake Gain = XZ.Z No The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
Trailer trailer is not connected.
Trailer Brake Module Fault Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 249).
Trailer Connected A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.
Trailer Wiring Fault There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 249).
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
Check Lamps. lamp.
129

Message Action
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
Check Lamps lamp.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
Manual a Trailer (page 249).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Manual See Towing a Trailer (page 249).
4WD
Message Action
Check 4x4 A 4X4 system fault is present. See Using Four-Wheel

Drive (page 180).
4x4 Shift in Progress The 4X4 system is making a shift.
For 4x4 Low Shift to N When your vehicle is at a stop and you need to shift
into Neutral before you select 4X4 LOW.
For 4x4 Low Slow to 3 MPH When your vehicle is moving and you need to reduce
your speed to select 4X4 LOW.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N You select 2WD while your vehicle is at a stop in 4X4
LOW and you need to shift into Neutral.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH You select 2WD while your vehicle is operating in 4X4
LOW and you need to reduce your speed.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward May display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled A 4X4 system fault is present and the system is
temporarily disabled. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
(page 180).
4x4 Auto Restored The 4X4 system has been restored.
4x4 Temporarily Locked A 4X4 system fault is present and the system is
temporarily locked. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
(page 180).
130

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E217932
A Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
B Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 146).
C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
D Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
E Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
F Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in your vehicle.
131

Climate Control
G MAX Defrost: Adjust to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the
windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
H MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents and air conditioning automatically turns on.
I A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.
J Air distribution control: Press to switch airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
Note: At least one of these buttons remain on while the system is on.
K Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 137).
132

Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E217905
A AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired

temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
B MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the
windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
D Air distribution control: Press to switch airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
133

Climate Control
E Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
F MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
G DUAL: Press to switch separate passenger side temperature control off and
on. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature settings remain the same as
the driver settings.
H Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the
passenger side.
I A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.
J Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 146).
K Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on
and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 147).
L Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
M Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 137).
N Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air

from the footwell air vents regardless of the
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE air distribution setting.
INTERIOR CLIMATE Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
General Hints switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
WARNING
Note: Do not place objects under the front
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
cause the windows to fog up. If the
to the rear seats.
windows fog up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
134

Climate Control
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from Automatic Climate Control
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield. Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
Note: To improve the time to reach a not necessary. The system automatically
comfortable temperature in hot weather, adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
drive with the windows open until you feel selected temperature as quickly as possible.
cold air through the air vents. For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
Manual Climate Control be fully open.
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield Note: If you select AUTO during cold
during humid weather, adjust the air outside temperatures, the system directs
distribution control to the windshield air airflow to the windshield and side window
vents position. vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to a high speed Press the AUTO button.
setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting. desired setting.
3 Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
135

Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press the AUTO button.
setting.
midway point of the hot settings. desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
3 Select the footwell air vents using the
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1 Adjust the temperature control to the Press the MAX A/C button.
MAX A/C position.
2 Drive with the windows fully open until
you feel cold air through the air vents.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press the AUTO button.
setting.
midway point of the cold settings. desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
necessary.
3 Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
136

Climate Control
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
1 Select the windshield air vents using the Press the defrost button.
2 Press the A/C button if the indicator is Adjust the temperature control to the
off. desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
necessary.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
HEATED WINDOWS AND petroleum-based cleaning products.
MIRRORS (If Equipped)
CABIN AIR FILTER
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
before operating the heated windows. filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice • It improves your driving comfort by
E184884
and fog. The heated rear window reducing particle concentration.
will automatically turn off after a short • It improves the interior compartment
period of time. Start the engine before you cleanliness.
switch the heated rear window on. • It protects the climate control
Note: Do not use razor blades or other components from particle deposits.
sharp objects to clean or remove decals You can locate the cabin air filter behind
from the inside of the heated rear window. the glove box.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
grid lines. installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped) the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
When you switch the heated rear window system.
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
automatically turn on.
Scheduled Maintenance (page 501).
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
137

Climate Control
For additional cabin air filter information,

or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)

The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your previous
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back
on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 103).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
138

Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or • Do not recline the seatback more than
with the seatback reclined too far 30 degrees.
can take weight off the seat cushion • Adjust the head restraint so that the
and affect the decision of the passenger top of it is level with the top of your
sensing system, resulting in serious injury head and as far forward as possible.
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit Make sure that you remain
upright against your seat back, with your comfortable.
feet on the floor. • Keep sufficient distance between
Do not recline the seatback as this yourself and the steering wheel. We
can cause the occupant to slide recommend a minimum of 10 in
under the safety belt, resulting in (25 cm) between your breastbone and
serious injury in the event of a crash. the airbag cover.
Do not place objects higher than the • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
seatback to reduce the risk of serious slightly bent.
injury in the event of a crash or during • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
heavy braking. press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
E68595
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
When you use them properly, the seat, the head restraint when your vehicle is
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will moving.
provide optimum protection in the event The head restraint is a safety device.
of a crash. Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. An improperly
adjusted head restraint may not
adequately protect an occupant during an
impact from the rear.
139

Seats
WARNINGS Rear Seat Center Head Restraint

Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury A B
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright

driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that D C
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position. E166701
Front Seat Head Restraint The head restraints consist of:

A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
E Fold button (rear seat outboard
only).
E138642
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints
Raising the Head Restraint
A
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint

B
E 1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
C
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
D reaches the highest adjustment
E166700
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
140

Seats
Note: For rear seat outboard seats, you can 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
fold the head restraint forward for easier your head to the desired position.
removal. After the head restraint reaches the
Installing the Head Restraint forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves position.
and push the head restraint down until it Note: Do not attempt to force the head
locks. restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
Folding the Head Restraint continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
Note: The rear seat outboard head
restraints may fold forward for improved
visibility. MANUAL SEATS
1. Press and hold button E. WARNING
2. Pull it back up to reset. Do not adjust the driver's seat or
Front Seat Center Head Restraint seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a front
row center head restraint that you cannot Moving the Seat Backward and
adjust or remove. Forward
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E175314
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright

driving or riding position.
141

Seats
Recline Adjustment The lumbar support control is located on

the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while the vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
E175315
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped) it to the original position.
E166702
142

Seats
E176038
Note: The engine must be running or the

Power Lumbar (If Equipped) vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seatback and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E176039
Multi-Contour Front Seats With

Active Motion (If Equipped)
E156301
Note: The massage system will turn off
after 20 minutes.
143

Seats
Massage mode Lumbar and bolster mode
A Back massage intensity Upper lumbar

adjustment
B Massage intensity decrease Lumbar decrease
*
and off
C Cushion massage intensity Lower lumbar
**
adjustment
D Massage intensity increase Lumbar increase
E On and off -
*
The massage feature will default to an
alternating massage mode with back MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature will default to the WARNINGS
middle lumbar mode. Before activating the seat memory,
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back make sure that the area immediately
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the surrounding the seat is clear of
cushion bolster. obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the Do not use the memory function
system displays directions for you to adjust when your vehicle is moving.
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function. To access and make This function automatically recalls the
adjustments to the lumbar setting: position of these features:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle • Driver seat.
> Multi-contour Seat. • Power mirrors.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust. • Optional power steering column.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar • Optional power adjustable pedals.
intensity.
The memory control is on the driver door.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Lo or Hi.
144

Seats
You can also recall a preset memory

position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if you linked
it to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Keyless
Entry (page 64).
E142554
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off will
Saving a PreSet Position move the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors, power Linking a PreSet Position to your
adjustable pedals and power steering Remote Control or Intelligent
column to your desired position. Access Key
3. Press and hold the desired preset Your vehicle can save the preset memory
button until you hear a single tone. positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
Note: A confirmation that you saved a
memory preset appears in the information 1. With the ignition on, move the memory
display. features to the position you desire.
You can save up to three preset memory 2. Press and hold the desired preset
positions. You can save a memory preset button for about five seconds. A tone
at any time. sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
Recalling a PreSet Position second tone.
Press and release the preset button 3. Within three seconds, press the lock
associated with your desired driving button on the remote control you are
position. The seat, mirrors, pedals and linking.
steering column move to the position To unlink a remote control, follow the
stored for that preset. same procedure – except in Step 3, press
Note: You can only recall a preset memory the unlock button on the remote control.
position when the ignition is off, or when you
place the transmission in park (P) or neutral Easy Entry and Exit Feature
(N) if the ignition is on. If you enable the easy entry and exit
Note: Press any seat or mirror adjustment feature, it automatically moves the driver
switch (or any memory button) during a seat position rearward up to two inches
memory recall to cancel the operation. (five centimeters) when you switch the
ignition off. The driver seat returns to the
previous position when you switch the
ignition on.
145

Seats
You can enable or disable this feature in

the information display. See Information
Displays (page 103).
REAR SEATS
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion.
You can flip each seat cushion up into a
vertical storage position.
E166704
Pull the control on the bottom of the seat

cushion to release the seat cushion from
the storage position.
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
E181250 age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
into the vertical storage position. exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
Returning the Seat to the Seating seat. The heated seat may cause burns
Position even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
WARNING anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
Make sure that cargo or any objects may cause the heated seat to overheat.
are not trapped underneath the seat Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
cushion before returning the seat or other pointed objects. This may damage
cushion to its original position, and that the the heating element which may cause the
seat cushion locks into place. Failure to do heated seat to overheat. An overheated
so may prevent the seat from operating seat may cause serious personal injury.
properly in the event of a crash, which
could increase the risk of serious injury.
146

Seats
Do not do the following: Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat. • Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any • Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly. seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the • Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge. the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle

through the various heat settings and off. E146322
More indicator lights indicate warmer Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
settings. through the various heat settings and off.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped) More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
WARNING The heated seat module resets at every
People who are unable to feel pain ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
to the skin because of advanced age, the on position, press the heated seat
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord switch to enable heating mode. When
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, activated, they turn off automatically when
or other physical conditions, must exercise you switch off the engine.
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on (If Equipped)
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may Heated Seats
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
147

Seats
WARNING Cooled Seats

Persons who are unable to feel pain The cooled seats only function when the
to the skin because of advanced age, engine is running.
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not E146309
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or To operate the cooled seats:
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may Touch the cooled seat symbol to cycle
cause the seat heater to overheat. An through the various cooling settings and
overheated seat may cause serious off. More indicator lights indicate cooler
personal injury. settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
Note: Do not do the following: the cooled seats are on, the feature turns
itself off. You need to reactivate it.
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any Climate controlled seat air filter
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the replacement
seat to dry thoroughly.
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
• Operate the heated seats unless the filters that are integrated with the seats.
engine is running. Doing so can cause Regular maintenance or replacement is
the battery to lose charge. not needed.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle

through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
148

Seats
FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)

Equipped)
E181222
E175382 Pull the strap located on the center

seatback to access the armrest and
Press the release control to move the front
cupholders.
seat armrest up or down.
The cupholders are located inside the rear
seat armrest. To open the cupholders:
1. Push in gently on the center of the
plastic panel on the front edge of the
armrest. The cupholders will partially
open.
2. Pull the cupholder fully open before
using.
E184821
Lift the latch to open the lid and gain

access to the optional storage
compartment under the center seat
cushion.
The cupholder is located inside the front
seat armrest. You can also flip the
cupholder so that it faces forward. See
Center Console (page 156).
149

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control

System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse E188211
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door The universal garage door opener replaces
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). the common hand-held garage door
A garage door opener which cannot detect opener with a three-button transmitter
an object, signaling the door to stop and integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
reverse, does not meet current federal The system includes two primary features,
safety standards. Using a garage door a garage door opener and a platform for
opener without these features increases remote activation of devices within the
the risk of serious injury or death. home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
Note: Make sure you keep the original systems, entry door locks and home or
remote control transmitter for use in other office lighting.
vehicles as well as for future system Additional system information can be
programming. found online at www.homelink.com,
Note: We recommend that upon the sale www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or lease termination of your vehicle, you or by calling the toll-free help line at
erase the programmed function buttons for 1-800-355-3515.
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section. In-Vehicle Programming
Note: You can program a maximum of This process is to program your in-vehicle
three devices. To change or replace any of HomeLink function button with your
the three devices after it has been initially hand-held transmitter.
programmed, you must first erase the Note: The programming steps below
current settings. See Erasing the Function assume you will be programming HomeLink
Button Codes. that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
150

If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press

and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
E188212 For questions or comments, please contact
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
garage, switch your ignition to the on www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
position, but do not start your vehicle. or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program. Programming Your Garage Door
3. Hold your hand-held garage door Opener Motor
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
the HomeLink button you want to unit and you may need to remove the cover
program. or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have E142659
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator 1. Press the learn button on the garage
/ Canadian Programming. door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button steps.
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice 2. Return to your vehicle.
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
151

E188212 E188213
3. Press and hold the function button you 1. Press and hold the outer two function
want to program for 2 seconds, then buttons simultaneously for
release. Repeat this step. Depending approximately 10 seconds until the
on your brand of garage door opener, indicator light above the buttons
you may need to repeat this sequence flashes rapidly.
a third time. 2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
Gate Operator / Canadian
codes for all buttons.
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require Reprogramming a Single Button
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) To program a device to a previously trained
after several seconds of transmission – button, follow these steps:
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, NOT release the button.
some U.S. gate operators are designed to 2. The indicator light begins to flash after
“time-out” in the same manner. 20 seconds. Without releasing the
Note: If programming a garage door opener button, follow Step 1 in the
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the Programming section.
device during the “cycling” process to For questions or comments, contact
prevent possible overheating. HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
1. Press and release, every two seconds, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
your hand-held transmitter until the or by calling the toll-free help line at
HomeLink indicator light changes to a 1-800-355-3515.
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
152

FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
153

Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point Locations

WARNING Power points may be in the following
locations:
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter • On the instrument panel.
socket (if equipped). Improper use • In the front of the center console.
of the lighter can cause damage not • In the 20% seat bin.
covered by your warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury. • In the center console storage bin.
• On the rear of the center console.
Note: If used when the engine is not
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC
running, the battery can discharge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
Power Outlet
engine. WARNING
Note: Do not insert objects other than an Do not keep electrical devices
accessory plug into the power point. This plugged in the power outlet when
damages the outlet and blows the fuse. the devices are not in use. Do not use
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
accessory bracket from the plug. power outlet, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Do not use a single
Note: Do not use the power point over the
power outlet to power multiple devices. It
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
may cause the power outlet to exceed the
a fuse may blow.
400 watt load limit and overload, resulting
Note: Do not use the power point for in fire or serious injury.
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is not
running. E191617
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when the vehicle is parked
for extended periods.
154

Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light, located on the • Measuring devices which process
power outlet, is: precise data, for example medical
• On and the light is solid — the power equipment or measuring equipment.
outlet is available or the plugged in • Other appliances requiring an
device is within the power range and extremely stable power supply, for
does not exceed the outlet's power example microcomputer-controlled
limits. electric blankets or touch sensor
• Three flashes and off — the power lamps.
outlet is overloading. Note: This feature works only when the
• Off — the power outlet power supply vehicle is running.
is off; ignition is not on. Note: This feature has a maximum output
• Constant flashing — the power outlet of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).
is in fault mode, and requires you to Note: While in drive (D), the maximum
restart your vehicle. outlet output is 300 watts.
The power outlet temporarily turns off Note: When powering electric devices that
power when in fault mode if the device require more than 10 watts in vehicles
exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your equipped with keyless start, the vehicle
device and switch the ignition off. Switch must remain running. It does not allow you
the ignition back on, but do not plug your to switch the ignition off or switch the
device back in. Let the system cool off and ignition to accessory mode.
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
You can use the 400 watt power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
• Electric hand drills.
• Rechargeable power tools.
• Video games.
• Laptops.
• Television screens.
You should not use the 400 watt power
outlet for these types of electric devices:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other
electric power tools, or
compressor-driven refrigerators.
155

Storage Compartments
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)

Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
In vehicles with a 40-20-40 split-bench
seat, the cup holders are inside of the
folding console.
E176222
A. Front cup holders.

B. Rear cup holders.
E176223
Available console features include:

A. 12 volt DC power point.
B. One of the following:
• USB ports and SD card slot.
• Audio input jack and USB port.
E185121
• Audio input jack.
To use the cup holders: C. 12-volt power point.
1. Lift the console lid up to open. D. Locking storage compartment with
2. Lift the cup holders up and rotate them hanging file folder supports and room
outward. for a laptop computer.
3. Close the console. E. 110 volt AC power point.
Vehicles with a console-mounted shifter F. 12 volt DC power point.
feature cup holders molded into the
console.
156

Storage Compartments
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.
157

Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH

WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high C
temperatures in the engine and B
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage. D
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground A
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
E163165
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas. A (off) - The ignition is off.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always Note: When you switch the ignition off and
open the garage door before you start the leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
engine. the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
If you smell exhaust fumes inside battery to lose charge.
your vehicle, have your vehicle B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
checked by an authorized dealer accessories, such as the radio, to operate
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if while the engine is not running.
you smell exhaust fumes.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
vehicle battery to lose charge.
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles C (on) - All electrical circuits are
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This operational and the warning lamps and
is because the engine management system indicators illuminate.
must realign itself with the engine. You can D (start) - Cranks the engine.
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all KEYLESS STARTING
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the Note: The keyless starting system may not
impulse electrical field or radio noise. function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
When you start the engine, avoid pressing phones.
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal Note: A valid key must be located inside
when you have difficulty starting the your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
engine. start the engine.
158

Ignition Modes Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the engine
for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you
are limited to a 15-second engine cranking
E144447
time. You need to wait 60 minutes before
you can crank the engine for 60 seconds
The keyless starting system has three again.
modes: Before starting the engine, check the
Off: Turns the ignition off. following:
• Without applying the brake pedal, • Make sure all occupants have fastened
press and release the button once their safety belts.
when the ignition is in the on mode, or • Make sure the headlamps and
when the engine is running but the electrical accessories are off.
vehicle is not moving.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
On: All electrical circuits are operational • Move the transmission selector lever
and the warning lamps and indicators to position P.
illuminate.
• Turn the ignition key to on. If your
• Without applying the brake pedal, vehicle is equipped with a keyless
press and release the button once. ignition, see the following instructions.
Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts. Vehicles with an Ignition Key
• Press the brake pedal, and then press Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
the button for any length of time. An 1. Fully press the brake pedal. If your
indicator light on the button illuminates vehicle is equipped with a manual
when then ignition is on and when the transmission, fully press the clutch
engine starts. pedal also.
2. Turn the key to start to start the engine.
STARTING A GASOLINE Release the key when the engine starts.
ENGINE Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
When you start the engine, the idle speed
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
increases. This helps to warm up the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
159

Vehicles with Keyless Start 2. If your vehicle is equipped with Type

Two, make sure the buttons are facing
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. the rear of the vehicle and the key ring
Note: You must have your intelligent access up. Place the key into the backup slot.
key in the vehicle in order to shift the 3. With the key in this position, press the
transmission out of position P. brake pedal, and then the button to
1. Fully press the brake pedal. switch on the engine.
2. Press the button. Fast Restart
The system does not function if: The fast restart feature allows you to
• The key frequencies are jammed. restart the engine within 20 seconds of
• The key battery has no charge. switching it off, even if a valid key is not
present.
If you are unable to start the engine, locate
the backup slot (A) in one of two positions: Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
Type One button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without
the key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If
you open and close a door while the engine
is running, the system searches for a valid
key. You cannot restart the engine if the
system does not detect a valid key within
20 seconds.
E187576 Failure to Start

Type Two If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
E187577
1. If your vehicle is equipped with Type

One, make sure to place the key
properly into the backup slot.
160

Automatic Engine Shutdown Stopping the Engine When Your

Vehicle is Stationary
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically Vehicles with an Ignition Key
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also 1. Move the transmission selector lever
turns off in order to save battery power. to position P.
Before the engine shuts down, a message 2. Turn the key to off.
appears in the information display showing
3. Apply the parking brake.
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, Vehicles with Keyless Start
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to 1. Move the transmission selector lever
inform you that the engine has shut down to position P.
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as 2. Press the button once.
you normally do.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Note: This switches off the ignition, all
Note: You cannot permanently switch off electrical circuits, warning lamps and
the automatic engine shutdown feature. indicators.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
on at the next ignition cycle. the ignition and engine automatically shut
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset down.
the timer, at any point before the Stopping the Engine When Your
30-second countdown has expired by
Vehicle is Moving
doing any of the following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting WARNING
with your vehicle (such as pressing the Switching off the engine when the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal). vehicle is still moving will result in a
• You can temporarily switch off the loss of brake and steering assistance.
shutdown feature any time the ignition The steering will not lock, but higher effort
is on (for the current ignition cycle will be required. When the ignition is
only). Use the information display to switched off, some electrical circuits,
do so. See Information Displays including air bags, warning lamps and
(page 103). indicators may also be off. If the ignition
• During the countdown before engine was turned off accidentally, you can shift
shutdown, you are prompted to press into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily Vehicles with an Ignition Key
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only). 1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
the transmission selector lever to
position P and turn the key to off.
161

3. Apply the parking brake. WARNINGS

Vehicles with Keyless Start Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
1. Move the transmission selector lever two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
to position N and use the brakes to of electrical shock.
bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Do not fully close the hood, or allow
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move it to drop under its own weight when
the transmission selector lever to using the engine block heater. This
position P. could damage the power cable and may
3. Press and hold the button for one cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
second, or press it three times within injury and property damage.
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake. Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
WARNING warming the engine coolant. This allows
If you smell exhaust fumes inside the climate control system to respond
your vehicle, have your vehicle quickly. The equipment includes a heater
checked by your authorized dealer element (installed in the engine block) and
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if a wire harness. You can connect the
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon system to a grounded 120-volt AC
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. electrical source.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous We recommend that you do the following
effects. for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
Important Ventilating Information that is product certified by
If you stop your vehicle and leave the Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
engine idling for long periods, we Canadian Standards Association
recommend that you do one of the (CSA). This extension cord must be
following: suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
• Open the windows at least 1 in Suitable for Use with Outdoor
(2.5 cm). Appliances. Do not use an indoor
• Set your climate control to outside air. extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If • Use as short an extension cord as
Equipped) possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
WARNINGS • Make sure that when in operation, the
Failure to follow engine block heater extension cord plug and heater cord
instructions could result in property plug connections are free and clear of
damage or serious personal injury. water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
162

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a

clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater

Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
163

Unique Driving Characteristics
AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped) • Your foot is on the brake pedal.

• The transmission is in drive (D) or Sport
The system helps reduce fuel consumption mode.
by automatically shutting off and restarting • The driver door is closed.
the engine while stopped. The engine will
restart automatically when you release the • There is adequate brake vacuum.
brake pedal. • The interior compartment has cooled
or warmed to an acceptable level.
In some situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example: • The front windshield defroster is off.
• To maintain interior comfort. • You have not turned the steering wheel
rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
• To recharge the battery. angle.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when • The vehicle is not on a steep road
the engine is off. grade.
WARNINGS • The battery is within optimal operating
The engine may restart conditions (battery state of charge and
automatically if required by the temperature in range).
system. • The engine coolant is at operating
Switch the ignition off before temperature.
opening the hood or performing any • Elevation is below about 10000 feet
maintenance. Failure to do so may (3048 meters).
result in serious injuries due to automatic • Ambient temperature is moderate.
engine restart.
• You have selected 4X2 or Auto mode.
Always switch the ignition off before • The trailer is not connected.
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have turned the engine off, but • You have not selected Tow haul.
the ignition will still be on and automatic • You have not selected Manual mode.
restart may occur.
Note: The system allows multiple
successive Auto StartStop events, but it
The Auto StartStop system status is may not operate in conditions of heavy
available at a glance within the information traffic or in extended low speed operation.
display. See Information Displays (page
103). The green Auto StartStop
indicator light on the instrument
Enabling Auto StartStop cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
The system automatically enables every
time you start your vehicle if: If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey Auto
• You do not press the Auto StartStop E146361
StartStop indicator light, it
button (not illuminated). illuminates when automatic engine stop
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed is not available due to one of the above
of 3 mph (4 km/h) after you have noted conditions not being met.
initially started your vehicle.
• You have stopped your vehicle.
164

Unique Driving Characteristics
Automatic Engine Restart Disabling Auto StartStop

Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• You have moved the transmission from
drive (D) to any gear except park (P). E181352
• Your vehicle is moving.
Press the Auto StartStop button located
• The interior compartment does not on the center console to switch the system
meet customer comfort when air off. The button will illuminate. This will only
conditioning or heat is on. deactivate the system for the current
• Fogging of the windows could occur ignition cycle. Press the button again to
and the air conditioning is on. restore Auto StartStop function.
• The battery is not within optimal Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
operating conditions. message appears and the amber Auto
• You have exceeded the maximum StartStop indicator light is flashing,
engine off time. automatic restart is not available. You must
restart the vehicle manually. See
• When you press the Auto StartStop Information Displays (page 103).
button with the engine automatically
stopped. If your vehicle is in an engine off Auto
StartStop state and you change the
• The front defroster is turned to the Max transmission to reverse (R) while the brake
setting. pedal is not pressed, the message Auto
Any of the following conditions may result StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine will
in an automatic restart of the engine: appear. You must press the brake pedal
• You have increased the blower fan within 10 seconds or a shift to park (P) and
speed or changed the climate control a manual restart will be required.
temperature.
• You have an electrical accessory
turned on or plugged in.
Note: You may notice that the climate seat
fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.
165

Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The • Automotive fuels can be harmful or
pressure in an overfilled tank may fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray gasoline is highly toxic and if
and fire. swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If swallowed, call a
The fuel system may be under physician immediately, even if no
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound symptoms are immediately apparent.
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel The toxic effects of fuel may not be
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may visible for hours.
spray out, which could cause serious
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
personal injury.
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
Automotive fuels can cause serious to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
injury or death if you misuse or In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
mishandle them. breathing of fuel vapor can cause
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may serious illness and permanent injury.
contain benzene, which is a • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
cancer-causing agent. you splash fuel in your eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
When refueling always shut the
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
engine off and never allow sparks or
attention. Failure to seek proper
open flames near the filler neck.
medical attention could lead to
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
permanent injury.
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
inhaling excess fumes. through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump remove contaminated clothing and
nozzle can produce static electricity, wash your skin thoroughly with soap
which can cause a fire if you pump and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
fuel into an ungrounded fuel container. contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
Observe the following guidelines when • Be particularly careful if you are taking
handling automotive fuel: “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If you splash fuel on your skin, promptly
wash your skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
166

Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY • Fuels containing metallic based

additives, including manganese-based
Choosing the Right Fuel Without compounds.
a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped) • Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or manganese tricarbonyl (MMT)
UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 15% ethanol in your gasoline • Leaded fuel (The use of leaded fuel is
vehicle. If your vehicle is a Flex Fuel Vehicle prohibited by law).
(FFV), the fuel fill inlet will have a yellow Note: Use of any fuel other than
housing. recommended fuel can cause powertrain
Do not use: damage, impair the emission control system
or cause loss of vehicle performance. Any
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol damage to vehicle that is caused by use of
or E-85 fuel. fuel not recommended will not be covered
• Fuel with methanol. under warranty.
• Fuels containing metallic based Octane Recommendations
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Leaded fuel (The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
Note: Use of any fuel other than
recommended fuel can cause powertrain E161513
damage, impair the emission control system
or cause loss of vehicle performance. Any Do not be concerned if the engine
damage to vehicle that is caused by use of sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
fuel not recommended will not be covered knocks heavily under most driving
under warranty. conditions while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, contact an
Choosing the Right Fuel With a authorized dealer to prevent any engine
Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped) damage.
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or 2.7L and 3.5L EcoBoost Engines
UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E-85) in your We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV). If your vehicle is a with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV), the fuel fill inlet Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
will have a yellow housing. with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not
Do not use: recommend fuels with an octane rating
• Fuels containing more than 85% below 87.
ethanol or E-100 fuel. To provide improved performance, we
• Fuel with methanol. recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage, such as trailer tow.
167

Fuel and Refueling
3.5L V6 and 5.0L V8 Engines WARNINGS

We recommend regular unleaded gasoline Do not try to pry open or push open
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. the capless fuel system with foreign
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular objects. This could damage the fuel
with an octane rating below 87, particularly system and its seal and cause injury to you
in high altitude areas. We do not or others.
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
• In SuperCab and SuperCrew vehicles,
Avoid running out of fuel. This may have the funnel is located under the second
an adverse effect on powertrain row passenger side seat near the spare
components. tire toolbox.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel: • On regular cab vehicles, the funnel is
located behind the passenger seat.
• You may need to cycle the ignition from
Off to On several times after refueling When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
to allow the fuel system to pump the a fuel container, do the following:
fuel from the fuel tank to the engine. 1. Locate the plastic funnel.
On restarting, cranking time will take a
few seconds longer than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gal (3.8 L) of fuel is
enough to restart the engine. If the
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gal (3.8 L) may be
required.
• The service engine soon indicator may
come on. For more information on the
service engine soon indicator, See
Audible Warnings and Indicators
(page 102).
E142668
For information on calculating DTE
(Distance to empty), See Instrument 2. Insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
Cluster (page 95). tank filler pipe opening.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the
Refilling With a Portable Fuel portable fuel container.
Container
4. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
WARNINGS back in your vehicle or properly dispose
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel of it.
container or an aftermarket funnel Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
into the fuel filler neck. This may an authorized dealer if you choose to
damage the fuel system filler neck or its dispose of the funnel.
seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.
168

Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact

with the fuel container while filling.
WARNINGS • Do not use a device that would hold
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
fire can cause severe injuries.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. WARNING
The fuel system may be under
When refueling always shut the
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
engine off and never allow sparks or
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
open flames near the fuel tank filler
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
spray out, which could cause serious
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
personal injury.
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
When fueling your vehicle:
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended 1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
when refueling your vehicle. This is into park (P) and switch the ignition
against the law in some places. off.
Keep children away from the fuel 2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
pump; never let children pump fuel. it engages.
Wait at least 10 seconds before

removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when E156032
refueling.
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
Use the following guidelines to avoid first notch on the nozzle. Hold handle
electrostatic charge build-up, which can higher during insertion for easier
produce a spark, when filling an access. Leave the fuel pump nozzle
ungrounded fuel container: fully inserted until you are done
pumping.
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
169

Fuel and Refueling
If this action corrects the problem, the

message may not reset immediately. It
may take several driving cycles for the
message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after 4 or
more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving. Continuing to
drive with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on as
well.
E154765 FUEL CONSUMPTION

4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fully Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
close the fuel tank filler door. remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if indicates empty. The amount of usable
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
tank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drain not be relied upon to increase driving range.
hole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drain • The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
through the drain hole and drip onto the the amount of fuel that can be added
ground. into the tank after the gauge indicates
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, empty
a service engine warning lamp may appear • The advertised capacity is the total fuel
on the instrument cluster. tank size. See Capacities and
At the next opportunity, do the following: Specifications (page 361). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely empty reserve.
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P). • Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
2. Switch the ignition off. advertised capacity of the fuel tank
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove even when the fuel gauge reads empty.
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. Filling the Tank
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the For consistent results when refueling:
fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
several times to allow the inlet to close
inaccurate reading results if the engine
properly. This will dislodge any debris
is left running.
preventing the inlet from sealing.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
170

Fuel and Refueling
Calculating Fuel Economy • Fuel economy may decrease with lower

temperatures.
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is • Fuel economy may decrease when
your engine’s break-in period). A more driving short distances.
accurate measurement is obtained after • You will get better fuel economy when
2,000 mi (3,200 km) to 3,000 mi driving on flat terrain than when driving
(4,800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency on hilly terrain.
of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not
accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading. WARNINGS
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
the amount of fuel added. in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel The emission system heats up the
tank and record the current odometer engine compartment and exhaust system,
reading. which can start a fire.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
from the current odometer reading. harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100 you smell exhaust fumes inside your
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per smell exhaust fumes.
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
Keep a record for at least one month and emission control components and a
record the type of driving (city or highway). catalytic converter that will enable your
This provides an accurate estimate of your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
vehicle’s fuel economy under current emission standards. To make sure that the
driving conditions. Keeping records during catalytic converter and other emission
summer and winter will show how control components continue to work
temperature impacts fuel economy. properly:
Conditions • Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces • Avoid running out of fuel.
fuel economy. • Do not turn off the ignition while your
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your vehicle is moving, especially at high
vehicle may reduce fuel economy. speeds.
• Adding certain accessories to your • Have the items listed in scheduled
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars maintenance information performed
or light bars, running boards and ski according to the specified schedule.
racks may reduce fuel economy. The scheduled maintenance items listed
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may in scheduled maintenance information are
lower fuel economy. essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
171

Fuel and Refueling
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft When the service engine soon
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
replacements, or for service of system has detected a
components affecting emission control, malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
such non-Ford parts should be the cause the service engine soon indicator to
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company illuminate.
parts in performance and durability.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or • the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, engine may misfire or run poorly
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine • poor fuel quality or water in the
power could indicate that the emission fuel—the engine may misfire or run
control system is not working properly. poorly
An improperly operating or damaged • the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
exhaust system may allow exhaust to properly. See Refueling (page 169).
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or • driving through deep water—the
improperly operating exhaust system electrical system may be wet.
inspected and repaired immediately.
You can correct these temporary
Do not make any unauthorized changes to malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
owners and anyone who manufactures, fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades out. After three driving cycles without these
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles or any other temporary malfunctions
are not permitted to intentionally remove present, the service engine soon indicator
an emission control device or prevent it should stay off the next time you start the
from working. Information about your engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle engine startup followed by mixed
Emission Control Information Decal city/highway driving. No additional vehicle
located on or near the engine. This decal service is required.
also lists engine displacement
If the service engine soon indicator remains
Please consult your warranty information on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
for complete details. available opportunity. Although some
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
Your vehicle has a computer known as the continued driving with the service engine
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that soon indicator on can result in increased
monitors the engine’s emission control emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
system. The system protects the engine and transmission smoothness, and
environment by making sure that your lead to more costly repairs.
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
172

Fuel and Refueling
Readiness for Drive on an expressway or highway for a

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
Testing of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs hours without starting the engine. Then,
to inspect the emission control equipment start the engine and complete the above
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this driving cycle. The engine must warm up to
inspection could prevent you from getting its normal operating temperature. Once
a vehicle registration. started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
If the service engine soon vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you
indicator is on or the bulb does will have to repeat the above driving cycle.
not work, you may need to have
the vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if

the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
may need to perform the following driving
cycle consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
173

Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and latch the gearshift in park (P).
Turn the ignition to the off position
and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
Do not use the tow/haul feature
when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
E184456
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
and your vehicle to swing around with the
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
possible loss of vehicle control.
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
Understanding the Shift Positions 2. Move the gearshift lever into the
of a 6–Speed Automatic desired gear.
Transmission (If Equipped) 3. Come to a complete stop.
Column-shift transmission: 4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
E184457
Neutral (N)
Floor-shift transmission:
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
174

Transmission
Manual (M) with floor shifter The tow/haul feature:

With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the • Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
driver can change gears up or down as of transmission shifting.
desired. By moving the gearshift lever from • Provides engine braking in all forward
drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you gears, which will slow your vehicle and
now have control of selecting the gear you assist you in controlling your vehicle
desire using buttons on the shift lever. See when descending a grade.
Understanding your SelectShift • Depending on driving conditions and
Automatic™ transmission later in this load conditions, may downshift the
section. transmission, slow your vehicle and
To return to normal drive (D) position, control your vehicle speed when
move the shift lever back from manual (M) descending a hill, without pressing the
to drive (D). accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided will vary
The transmission will operate in gears one based upon the amount the brake
through six. pedal is pressed.
Third (3) with column shifter The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
Transmission operates in third (3) gear trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
only. Use third (3) gear for improved gear ranges are available when using
traction on slippery roads. tow/haul.
Second (2) To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
Transmission operates in second (2) gear button on the gearshift lever twice. The
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on TOW HAUL light will deactivate. Tow/haul
slippery roads. will also deactivate when you power down
First (1) your vehicle.
• Transmission operates in first (1) gear WARNING

only. Do not use the tow/haul feature
• Provides maximum engine braking. when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
lever. and your vehicle to swing around with the
• Will not downshift into first (1) gear at possible loss of vehicle control.
high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds. Sport Mode
Tow/Haul Mode To activate Sport Mode, press
To activate tow/haul, press the the button on the gearshift lever
button on the gearshift lever
E176099 twice. The SPORT or S indicator
E161509 once. The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate in the instrument
light will illuminate in the instrument display
cluster.
175

Transmission
The sport mode feature: Understanding your SelectShift

• Provides additional grade (engine) Automatic™ transmission (If Equipped)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or Automatic™ transmission gearshift lever.
mountainous areas. This will increase The SelectShift Automatic transmission
engine RPM during engine braking. gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic In order to prevent the engine from running
transmission shift strategy. at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift will still automatically
• Selects gears more quickly and at make some downshifts if it has determined
higher engine speeds. that you have not downshifted in time.
To deactivate the sport mode feature and Although SelectShift will make some
return to normal driving mode, press the downshifts for you, it will still allow you to
button on the gearshift lever once. The downshift at any time as long as the
SPORT or S indicator light will deactivate. SelectShift determines that damage will
The sport mode feature will also not be caused to the engine from
deactivate when your vehicle is powered over-revving.
down. SelectShift will not automatically upshift,
Automatic Transmission Adaptive even if the engine is approaching the RPM
Learning limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
This feature may increase durability and Note: Engine damage may occur if you
provide consistent shift feel over the life maintain excessive engine revving without
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or shifting.
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered The SelectShift Automatic transmission
normal and will not affect function or feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully PRS (Progressive Range Selection)
update transmission operation. Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
Forced Downshifts
shifting range. This may provide you with
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul an improved driving experience (for
feature on or off. example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep grade).
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
appropriate gear. the – button to active PRS. The available
and selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
176

Transmission
All available gears will display with the

current gear indicated. Press the – button
again to lock out gears beginning with the
highest gear. Example: press the – button
twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only
the available gears will display and the
transmission will automatically shift
between the available gears. Press the +
button to unlock gears to allow the
transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission will shift automatically within
the gear range you select.
E192285
Manual (M) with floor shifter
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual according to the following chart:
(M) position will allow you to manually
select the gear you desire. Only the current
gear will display. Use the buttons on the
gearshift lever to manually select gears.
Press the + button to upshift or the –
button to downshift. Return the
transmission to a different gearshift
position to deactivate manual control.
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1–2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2–3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3–4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4–5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5–6 50 mph (80 km/h)
WARNINGS
Brake-Shift Interlock
When doing this procedure, you will
WARNINGS be taking your vehicle out of park (P)
Do not drive your vehicle until you which means your vehicle can roll
verify that the brake lamps are freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
working. movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
177

Transmission
WARNINGS 6. Remove the three fasteners under the

If you fully release the parking brake column that secure the lower shroud
and the brake warning lamp remains half to the column.
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift

interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed, E163185
a malfunction may have occurred. It is 7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
possible that a fuse has blown or your position and remove the lower shroud
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating cover by pulling the lever handle
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart through the slot in the cover.
(page 289).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
Column-shifter
1. Apply the parking brake and switch off
your vehicle.
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat). E163186
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.

8. Apply the brake, pull the white disk
4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boot then move the shifter to neutral (N).
hole and pull top half of shroud up and
9. Start your vehicle.
forward to separate it from the lower
half of the shroud. There is a hinge at Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
the forward edge of the top shroud. making sure to engage the hinge pivots
Roll the top half of the shroud upward between the upper and lower halves of the
on the hinge point to clear the hazard shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
flasher button, then pull straight direction as the halves rotate together.
rearward toward the driver’s seat to
remove. Floor-shifter
5. Remove the top half of the shroud. 1. Apply the parking brake and switch off
your vehicle.
178

Transmission
2. Remove the rubber mat between the 6. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle,
shifter and cup holder. Using a and release the parking brake. See your
screwdriver (or similar tool), carefully authorized dealer as soon as possible
pry up the access panel from the if this procedure is used.
attachment points and disconnect it
from the console to expose the inside If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
of the gearshift. or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
E182464
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
3. Locate the white brake shift interlock
lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
E183128
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using light finger

pressure move the white lever forward
while pulling the gearshift lever out of
the park (P) position and into the
neutral (N) position.
5. Install the access panel and rubber
mat.
179

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE 4X4 HIGH

Continuously illuminates when
WARNING 4H is selected.
E181779
For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle, 4X4 LOW
see General Information in the
Wheels and Tires chapter. Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
E181780
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce CHECK 4X4
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4H or 4L mode Displays when a 4X4 fault is
is only intended for consistently slippery or present.
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these
surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks), but will not damage Using the Electronic Shift on the
drive components. Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
Note: If 4L is selected while your vehicle is
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD
system will not perform a shift. This is
normal and should be no reason for concern.
Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low)
for proper operation.
4WD Indicator Lights

Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2 E191851
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an 2H (4X2)
authorized dealer.
For general on-road driving. Sends power
4X2 to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
Momentarily illuminates when optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
2H is selected. high speeds.
E181778
4X4 Auto 4H (4X4 HIGH)
Continuously illuminates when Used for extra traction such as in snow or

4A is selected (2-Speed icy roads or in off road situations. This
E181781 Automatic 4WD vehicles only). mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
180

4L (4X4 LOW) The information display will display a

message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum progress. The information display will then
power to all four wheels at reduced display the system mode selected. If any
speeds. Intended only for off-road of the above shift conditions are not
applications such as deep sand, steep present, the shift will not occur and the
grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4x4 information display will display information
low) will not engage while your vehicle is guiding the driver through the proper
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is shifting procedures.
normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD
(4x4 low) for proper operation. displays in the information display, a
transfer case gear tooth blockage is
Shifting between system modes present. To alleviate this condition, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
pedal while a shift in progress message (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
displays will improve neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
engagement/disengagement performance. complete the range shift.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping. Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD
System (If Equipped)
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal. This system includes an electronically
You can move the control from 2H or 4H controlled transfer case with a high
at a stop or while driving. The information capacity clutch. The system is interactive
display may display a message indicating with the road, continually monitoring and
a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is adjusting torque delivery to the front and
complete the message center will then rear wheels to optimize traction.
display the system mode selected. Note: The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the transfer
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low) case clutch and disable it during driving
Note: You may hear some noise as the maneuvers when necessary.
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
E181500
181

2H (4X2) You can move the control from 2H to 4A

or 4H at a stop or while driving. The
For general on-road driving, this mode information display may display a message
provides optimal smoothness and fuel indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once
economy at high speeds. Sends power to the shift is complete the message center
the rear wheels only. will then display the system mode
selected.
4A (4X4 AUTO)
Provides electronic control four-wheel Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
drive with power delivered to the front and Note: You may hear some noise as the
rear wheels, as required, for increased system shifts or engages; this is normal.
traction. This is appropriate for all on-road
driving conditions, including dry road 1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
surfaces, but is especially useful on wet (5 km/h) or less.
pavement, snow, dirt, or gravel. 2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
4H (4X4 HIGH) 3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
Used for extra traction such as in snow or
The information display will display a
icy roads or in off road situations. This
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
mode is not for use on dry pavement.
progress. The information display will then
4L (4X4 LOW) display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum present, the shift will not occur and the
power to all four wheels at reduced information display will display information
speeds. Intended only for off-road guiding the driver through the proper
applications such as deep sand, steep shifting procedures.
grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4x4
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD
low) will not engage while your vehicle is
displays in the information display, a
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
transfer case gear tooth blockage is
normal and should be no reason for
present. To alleviate this condition, place
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L
the transmission in a forward gear, move
(4x4 low) for proper operation.
your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
Shifting between system modes (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator complete the range shift.
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays will improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
182

How Your Vehicle Differs From Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Other Vehicles Utility Vehicles
WARNING Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
Vehicles with a higher center of your vehicle is moving can cause some
gravity such as utility and four-wheel momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
drive vehicles handle differently than This is the front drivetrain coming up to
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. speed and the automatic locking hubs
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are engaging and is not cause for concern.
not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
low-slung sports cars are designed to a front air dam that can become damaged
perform satisfactorily under off-road (due to reduced ground clearance) when
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive taking your vehicle off-road. You may
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these remove this air dam by removing eight bolts.
vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could Note: Vehicles equipped with 2.7L
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle Ecoboost, 3.5L Ecoboost and 3.5L TiVCT
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and engines have an underbody transmission
death. shield and brackets that may become
damaged (due to reduced ground
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from clearance) when taking your vehicle
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be off-road. Remove the shield by disengaging
higher to allow it to travel over rough the fasteners at each corner of the shield.
terrain without getting hung up or Then, remove the shield rear brackets by
damaging underbody components. removing the bracket to frame bolts.
The differences that make your vehicle so Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
versatile also make it handle differently equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
than an ordinary passenger car. and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
Maintain steering wheel control at all
different from conventional vehicles, both
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
on and off the road.
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure The transfer case supples power to all four
you grip the steering wheel from the wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the
outside. Do not grip the spokes. transfer case allows you to select different
4WD modes when necessary. You can find
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
information on transfer case operation and
from concealed objects such as rocks and
shifting procedures in this chapter. You can
stumps.
find information on transfer case
You should either know the terrain or maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
examine maps of the area before driving. You should become thoroughly familiar
Map out your route before driving in the with this information before you operate
area. To maintain steering and braking your vehicle.
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
183

Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD Emergency Maneuvers

mode) uses all four wheels to power your
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling In an unavoidable emergency situation
you to drive over terrain and road where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
conditions that a conventional two-wheel remember to avoid over-driving your
drive vehicle cannot. vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
Basic Operating Principles emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
can affect the normal steering pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
characteristics of your vehicle. required. Avoid abrupt steering,
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces acceleration and braking. This could result
made slippery by loose sand, water, in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care. of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
• Do not use four-wheel drive on dry,
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
wear and may damage drive skidding the tires and do not attempt any
components. Four-wheel drive modes sharp steering wheel movements.
are only for consistently slippery or If your vehicle goes from one type of
loose surfaces. surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your steering, acceleration or braking).
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed decreases, ease Sand
your vehicle back onto the road. Do not When driving over sand, try to keep all four
turn the steering wheel sharply while wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
returning your vehicle to the road. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the road and slow down gradually before the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
returning to the road. You may lose control and avoid excessive wheel slip.
if you do not slow down or if you turn the When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. under high outside temperatures, use a low
It may be less risky to strike small objects, gear when possible. Low gear operation
such as freeway reflectors, with minor will maximize the engine and transmission
damage to your vehicle rather than cooling capability.
attempt a sudden return to the road which Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways causes vehicle momentum to work against
out of control or roll over. Remember, your you and your vehicle could become stuck
safety and the safety of others should be to the point that assistance may be
your primary concern. required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
184

Mud and Water Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.

A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
Mud sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle Whenever driving on a hill, determine
speed or direction when you are driving in beforehand the route you will use. Do not
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle what conditions are on the other side. Do
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide not drive in reverse over a hill without the
until you regain control of your vehicle. aid of an observer.
After driving through mud, clean off residue When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating a lower gear from a higher gear once the
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that ascent has started. This reduces strain on
could damage drive components. the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
Water around because this could cause vehicle
If you must drive through high water, drive roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
slowly. Traction or brake capability may safe location.
be limited. Apply just enough power to the wheels to
When driving through water, determine the climb the hill. Too much power will cause
depth and avoid water higher than the the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system resulting in loss of vehicle control.
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
by applying light pressure to the brake
pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary. E143949
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
Although natural obstacles may make it brake application and brake overheating.
necessary to travel diagonally up or down Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
a hill or steep incline, you should always overdrive or move the transmission
try to drive straight up or straight down. selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
185

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply Make sure you allow sufficient distance
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the between you and other vehicles for
brakes. stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
Driving on Snow and Ice emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
WARNING pedal. See Hints on Driving With
If you are driving in slippery Anti-Lock Brakes (page 190).
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for Snow
longer stopping distances and avoid
WARNING
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead Do not spin the wheels at over
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in and injure a passenger or bystander.
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause forward and reverse gears, stopping
transmission damage. between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
ice but can skid like any other vehicle. is not at normal operating temperature,
Should you start to slide while driving on damage to the transmission may occur.
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
in the direction of the slide until you regain than a minute, damage to the transmission
control. and tires may occur or the engine may
Avoid sudden applications of power and overheat.
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and Parking
steadily when starting from a full stop.
WARNINGS
Avoid sudden braking. Although a If the parking brake is fully released,
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate but the brake warning lamp remains
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in illuminated, the brakes may not be
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as working properly. See your authorized
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not dealer.
become overconfident as to road
conditions. Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in park (P). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
186

On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when

the transfer case is in the neutral (N)
position, the engine and transmission
disconnect from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, your vehicle is free to roll even
if the automatic transmission is in park (P)
or the manual transmission is in gear. Do
not leave your vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the neutral (N) position.
Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving your vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications

The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(such as ladders or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
187

Rear Axle
ELECTRONIC LOCKING • In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking

differential will automatically
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped) disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically
Note: The electronic locking differential is reengage at speeds below 56 mph
for off-road use only and is not for use on (90 km/h).
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in • The AdvanceTrac system has the
increased tire wear, noise and vibration. ability to take over control of the
electronic locking differential and
The electronic locking differential is a disable it during driving maneuvers
device housed in the rear axle that allows when necessary.
both rear wheels to turn at the same
speed. The electronic locking differential When you switch the system on, if you do
can provide additional traction should your not meet the required conditions for
vehicle become stuck. You can activate electronic locking differential activation,
the differential electronically and shift it the instrument cluster will display the
on the fly within the differential operating appropriate information guiding you
speed range. The differential is for use in through the proper activation process.
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition Activating the Electronic Locking
where you need maximum traction. It is Differential
not for use on dry pavement.
The following conditions will affect the Note: Do not use electronic locking
electronic locking differential: differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Doing so will produce excessive noise,
• The electronic locking differential will vibration and increase tire wear.
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2, 4x4 Note: If the electronic locking differential
Auto, or 4x4 High modes. has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
• The electronic locking differential will wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4 For 4WD vehicles
Low.
• The electronic locking differential may
not engage if you press your
accelerator pedal during an
engagement attempt. A message may
display in the instrument display
guiding you to release the accelerator
pedal.
• In 4x2, 4x4 Auto, and 4x4 High modes,
the electronic locking differential will
automatically disengage at speeds
above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will
automatically reengage at speeds E191852
below 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.
188

Rear Axle
For 2WD vehicles
E183740
Turn the control to ON.

Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
E163170 display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the

indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by CHECK LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL in the information
display. See your authorized Ford
dealer for assistance.
189

Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
control during emergency stops by keeping
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
the brakes from locking.
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the This lamp momentarily
system checked by an authorized dealer. If illuminates when you turn the
your vehicle has continuous vibration or ignition on. If the light does not
shudder in the steering wheel while braking, illuminate during start up, remains on or
have it checked by an authorized dealer. flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
wheels, even under normal driving
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to If the brake warning lamp
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy illuminates when you release the
Wheels (page 326). E144522
parking brake, have the system
See Warning Lamps and checked by an authorized dealer.
Indicators (page 98).
E144522
Wet brakes result in reduced braking HINTS ON DRIVING WITH

efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes. Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
Brake Over Accelerator further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
In the event the accelerator pedal system. This is normal.
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to The anti-lock braking system will not
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. eliminate the risks when:
If you experience this condition, apply the • You drive too closely to the vehicle in
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe front of you.
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for • You take corners too fast.
any interference. If none are found and the • The road surface is poor.
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
PARKING BRAKE
Brake Assist
WARNING
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you Always set the parking brake fully
press the brake pedal. It provides and make sure the transmission is
maximum braking efficiency as long as you locked in park (P). Failure to set the
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping parking brake and engage park could result
distances in critical situations. in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
190

Brakes
To set the parking brake, press the parking Note: You may notice various noises when
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The you apply and release the electric parking
brake warning lamp in the instrument brake. This is normal and no cause for
cluster will illuminate and remains concern.
illuminated until the parking brake is
released. Applying the Electric Parking
Brake
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again. WARNING
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade The brake system warning lamp will
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake flash during an electric parking brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake. apply. If the brake system warning
There may be a little vehicle movement as lamp continues to flash there could be a
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's problem with your electric parking brake.
weight. This is normal and should be no Have the system checked by an authorized
reason for concern. If needed, press and dealer as soon as possible.
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (If

Equipped)
The electric parking brake replaces the

conventional foot brake. The operating
switch is located on the instrument panel E169085
left of the steering wheel.
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
WARNING parking brake.
Always set the parking brake fully The brake system warning lamp will flash
and make sure the transmission is for approximately two seconds and then
locked in park (P). Failure to set the illuminate to confirm that the electric
parking brake and engage park could result parking brake has been applied. See
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or Information Displays (page 103).
bodily injury.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
remain illuminated for about ten seconds if
Note: When you apply the electric parking you switch the ignition off with the parking
brake in certain conditions, for example, on brake applied, or apply the parking brake
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may while the ignition is off.
reapply the brakes within ten minutes.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
191

Brakes
Applying the Electric Parking You can release the electric parking brake
Brake When the Vehicle is Moving either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake Manual Release
while moving will result in use of the
WARNING
anti-lock braking system. Do not use
the electric parking brake system when the If the brake system warning light
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake remains illuminated or flashes after
system is unable to stop the vehicle. you have released the parking brake,
there could be a problem with your braking
With the exception of emergency
system. Have the system checked by an
conditions (for example, the brake
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
pedal does not work or is blocked),
do not apply the electric parking brake
while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or You can manually release the electric
poor road surfaces or weather conditions, parking brake by:
emergency braking can cause the vehicle • Switching the ignition on.
to skid out of control or off the road.
• Pressing the brake pedal.
If you apply the electric parking brake when • Pressing the electric parking brake
your vehicle is moving, the brake system switch.
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning When the electric parking brake is released,
tone will sound. See Information the brake system warning lamp will turn
Displays (page 103). off.
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph Driving With a Trailer
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as
long as the switch is pulled. Release or Depending on the grade and the weight of
press the switch or press the accelerator the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
pedal to stop the braking force. backwards slightly when you start on a
slope.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this
position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
E169086
192

Brakes
Automatic Release - Drive Away WARNINGS

Release You must remain in your vehicle
Your vehicle will automatically release the when the system turns on. At all
parking brake if: times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
• The driver door is closed. system and intervening, if required. Failure
• The transmission is in a forward or to take care may result in the loss of
reverse gear. control of your vehicle, serious personal
• The vehicle is accelerated. injury or death.
• There are no faults detected in the The system will turn off if a
parking brake system. malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to
The brake system warning lamp will go off
take care may result in the loss of control
to confirm that you have released the
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
electric parking brake.
death.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking The system makes it easier to pull away
brake will not automatically release. You when your vehicle is on a slope without the
must release the electric parking brake using need to use the parking brake.
the electric parking brake switch.
When the system is active, your vehicle
Note: The electric parking brake drive away remains stationary on the slope for two to
release makes starting on a hill easier. This three seconds after you release the brake
feature will release the parking brake pedal. This allows time to move your foot
automatically when the vehicle has from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
sufficient drive force to move up the hill. The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
Battery With No Charge
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
WARNING vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
You will not be able to apply or slope, for example from a car park ramp,
release the electric parking brake if traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
the battery is low or has no charge. a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
If the battery is low or has no charge, use bring your vehicle to a complete standstill
jumper cables and a booster battery. in an uphill gear (for example, drive (D)
when facing uphill or reverse (R) when
HILL START ASSIST facing downhill).
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
WARNINGS the system is either on or off.
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your Using Hill Start Assist
vehicle, always apply the parking 1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securely vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
parked may lead to a crash or injury. See the brake pedal pressed.
Parking Brake (page 190).
193

Brakes
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle

is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off

Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission

You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
194

Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION System Indicator Lights and

Messages
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction. WARNING
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system If a failure has been detected within
applies the brakes to individual wheels the traction control system, the
and, when needed, reduces engine power stability control light will illuminate
at the same time. If the wheels spin when steadily. Verify that the traction control
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, system was not manually disabled using
the system reduces engine power in order the stability control button. If the stability
to increase traction. control light still illuminates steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
USING TRACTION CONTROL with traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
In certain situations (for example, stuck in control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
snow or mud), you can turn the traction death.
control off. This may be beneficial as this
allows the wheels to spin with full engine The stability control light
power. temporarily illuminates on
E138639 engine start-up or if a problem
occurs in the stability system, and flashes
when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when you turn the traction control system
E166706
off.
Turn the traction control system off by
pressing the stability control button
located on the center of the instrument
panel.
195

Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a driving condition activates either the

stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
WARNINGS
conditions:
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof • The stability and traction control light
racks, suspension, steering system, flashes.
tire construction and wheel and tire size • Your vehicle slows down.
may change the handling characteristics • Reduced engine power.
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability • A vibration in the brake pedal.
control system. In addition, installing any • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with • If the driving condition is severe and
and adversely affect the electronic stability your foot is not on the brake, the brake
control system. Install any aftermarket pedal may move as the systems
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from applies higher brake forces.
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk The stability control system has several
of interfering with the electronic stability features built into it to help you maintain
control sensors. Reducing the control of your vehicle:
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased Electronic Stability Control
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
rollover, personal injury and death. to prevent skids or lateral slides by
Remember that even advanced applying brakes to one or more of the
technology cannot defy the laws of wheels individually and, if necessary,
physics. It’s always possible to lose reducing engine power.
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive Roll Stability Control
driving on any road condition can cause The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
you to lose control of your vehicle to prevent rollovers by detecting your
increasing the risk of personal injury or vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
property damage. Activation of the it changes by applying the brakes to one
electronic stability control system is an or more wheels individually.
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road; Traction Control
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, to maintain traction of the wheels by
personal injury and death. If your electronic detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
stability control system activates, SLOW Using Traction Control (page 195).
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each

time you switch the ignition on.
196

Stability Control
skidding off its intended route.

B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
B surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL

B AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC™)
B The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
A
You can switch the electronic stability
A B A control systems off.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), the systems are disabled.
E72903
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently. See Using
A Vehicle without stability control Traction Control (page 195).
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Button func- Stability Roll stability Electronic Traction

tions control OFF control stability control system
light control
Default at start- Illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
up during bulb
check
Button pressed Illuminated Enabled Enabled Disabled
momentarily
Button pressed Illuminated Enabled Disabled Disabled
and held for
more than 5
seconds
197

Stability Control
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Double press Illuminated Enabled Enabled with Enabled with

higher threshold higher threshold
target target
Button pressed Not illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
again after
deactivation
Transfer case Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled
switched to
4WD Low
198

Terrain Response (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION USING HILL DESCENT

CONTROL
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control Press and release the hill
descent in all surface conditions and descent button located on the
circumstances, such as ice or instrument panel. A light in the
E163957
extremely steep grades. Hill descent cluster will illuminate and a chime will
control is a driver assist system and cannot sound when this feature is activated.
substitute for good judgment by the driver. To increase descent speed, press the
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle accelerator pedal until you reach the
control, crash or serious injury. desired speed. To decrease descent
Hill descent control does not provide speed, press the brake pedal until you
hill hold at zero miles per hour (0 reach the desired speed.
kilometers per hour). When stopped,
the parking brake must be applied or the When accelerating or decelerating, once
vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it you reach the desired descent speed,
may roll away. remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen
vehicle speed.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may
descending steep grades in various surface be observed during hill descent control
conditions. operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
concern.
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20 Hill descent modes
mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set • At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h)
or maintained. and 20 mph (32 km/h): When the Hill
Hill descent control requires a cooling Descent Control switch is pressed and
down interval after a period of sustained Hill Descent Control is active, the Hill
use. The amount of time that the feature Descent Control indicator light flashes.
can remain active before cooling varies Your vehicle maintains your desired
with conditions. The system will provide a speed.
warning in the message center and a chime • At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h)
will sound when the system is about to and 40 mph (64 km/h): When the Hill
disengage for cooling. At this time, Descent Control switch is pressed, the
manually apply the brakes as needed to Hill Descent Control system is enabled,
maintain descent speed. the Hill Descent Control indicator light
is solid and a message displays in the
information display. Your vehicle does
not maintain your desired speed and
you cannot set your descent speed.
199

Terrain Response (If Equipped)
• At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h):

When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed, the Hill Descent Control
system is disabled, the indicator light
in the cluster does not illuminate and
a message does not display in the
information display. The system is
turned off and you need to switch the
system back on to use.
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 118).
200

Parking Aids
PARKING AID (If Equipped) Note: If your vehicle is equipped with

MyKey™, it is possible to prevent turning
the sensing system off. See MyKey™ (page
WARNINGS 57).
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
of the system as contained in this trailer tow package and a trailer is
section. Sensing is only an aid for some connected to your vehicle, the rear sensing
(generally large and fixed) objects when system will be disabled and will not allow
moving in reverse on a flat surface at you to switch the system on through the
parking speeds. Certain objects with information display. When you shift your
surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves, vehicle into reverse (R), a message appears
traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps, in the information display stating that a
inclement weather, air brakes, and external trailer is connected and the rear sensing
motors and fans may also affect the system is disabled. If equipped, the center
function of the sensing system; this may stack rear sensing system display will not
include reduced performance or a false be present.
activation. The sensing system warns the driver of
To help avoid personal injury, always obstacles within a certain range of the
use caution when in reverse (R) and bumper area. The system turns on
when using the sensing system. automatically when you switch on the
ignition.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving When receiving a detection warning, the
objects. The system is designed to radio volume reduces to a predetermined
provide a warning to assist the driver in level. After the warning goes away, the
detecting large stationary objects to avoid radio volume returns to the previous level.
damaging your vehicle. The system may You can switch the system off through the
not detect smaller objects, particularly information display menu or from the
those close to the ground. pop-up message that appears once the
Certain add-on devices such as large transmission is shifted into reverse (R).
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks If a fault is present in the system, a warning
and any device that may block the message appears in the information
normal detection zone of the system, may display and will not allow you to switch the
create false beeps. faulted system on.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the Rear Sensing System

bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and The rear sensors are only active when the
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors transmission is in reverse (R). As your
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
affected. Do not clean the sensors with rate of the audible warning increases.
sharp objects. When the obstacle is less than 12 in
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to (30 cm) away, the warning sounds
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
201

Parking Aids
continuously. If a stationary or receding The system provides obstacle distance

object is detected farther than 12 in indication through the center stack display
(30 cm) from the side your vehicle, the (if equipped). The distance indication will
tone sounds for only three seconds. Once be present when the transmission is in
the system detects an object approaching, reverse (R).
the warning sounds again. • As the distance to the obstacle
decreases (obstacle becomes closer),
the indicator blocks will illuminate and
move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks will be grayed
out.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Designed to be a supplementary park
aid, this system may not work in all
conditions. This system cannot
E130178 replace the driver’s attention and
judgment. The driver is responsible for
A The coverage area is up to 6 feet avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe
(1.8 meters) from the rear distance and speed, even when the system
bumper. There is decreased is in use.
coverage area at the outer Active Park Assist does not apply the
corners of the bumper. brakes under any circumstances.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R): Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
• and moving toward a stationary object
system and intervening if required.
at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is Active Park Assist is an electronic parking
approaching the rear of your vehicle at aid that uses ultrasonic sensors. The
a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
• and moving at a speed of less than your vehicle into the space (hands-free)
3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object while you control the accelerator, gearshift
is approaching the rear of your vehicle and brakes. The system visually and
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). audibly instructs you to park your vehicle.
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is fewer than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
202

Parking Aids
The system may not function correctly if • A foreign object damages or obstructs
something passes between the front the sensors.
bumper and the parking space (a • The correct tire size is not in use on your
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
neighboring parked vehicle is high off the
ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or Using Active Park Assist
flatbed truck).
Press the button located on the
Note: The sensors may not detect objects center console near the gearshift
in heavy rain, snow or other conditions that E146186
lever.
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the The touchscreen displays a message and
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and a corresponding graphic to indicate it is
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors searching for a parking space. Use the
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not direction indicator to indicate which side
clean the sensors with sharp objects. of your vehicle you want the system to
search.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves. Note: The system automatically searches
on the passenger side. You can use the
Do not use the system if: direction indicator to toggle between the
• You have attached a foreign object driver and passenger side.
(bike rack or trailer) to the front or rear
of your vehicle or close to the sensors. Note: You can also activate the Active Park
Assist system after you have already driven
• You have attached an overhanging partially or completely past a parking space.
object (surfboard) to the roof. To do so, press the Active Park button and
the system will inform you if you have
recently passed a suitable parking space.
E130107
Note: You must observe that the selected

When the system finds a suitable space,
space remains clear of obstructions at all
the touchscreen displays a message and
times in the maneuver.
a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and
follow the instructions on the touchscreen.
If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you
may need to pull forward a short distance
before the system is ready to park.
203

Parking Aids
Note: Active park assist may not detect Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a (35 km/h), the touchscreen shows a
truck), street furniture such as benches and message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
fire hydrants and other items. You must speed.
make sure the selected space is suitable for
parking. Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
vehicles as possible while passing a parking (9 km/h), the system turns off and you need
space. to take full control of your vehicle.
Note: The system always offers the last When you shift the transmission into
detected parking space (for example, if the reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you (and nothing obstructing its movement),
are driving, it offers the last one). your vehicle steers itself into the space.
Indicated by tones, instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space
appear on the display screen.
E130108
When you think your vehicle is properly Deactivating the Park Assist
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the Feature
parking aid (accompanied by a
touchscreen display message and a Manually deactivate the system by:
chime), bring your vehicle to a complete • Pressing the active park assist button.
stop. • Grabbing the steering wheel during
When automatic steering is finished, the automatic steering.
touch screen displays a message and a • Driving above approximately 22 mph
tone sounds, indicating that the active park (35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
assist process is done. The driver is active park search.
responsible for checking the parking job
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
and making any necessary corrections
automatic steering.
before putting the transmission in park (P).
• Turning off the traction control system.
204

Parking Aids
Certain vehicle conditions can also If a problem occurs with the system, a
deactivate the system, such as: warning message displays, followed by a
• Traction control has activated on a tone. Occasional system messages may
slippery or loose surface. occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an
• There is an anti-lock brake system authorized dealer to have your vehicle
activation or failure. serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.

The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect, you must
drive your vehicle for a short period of time before Active Park Assist becomes functional.
The system does not offer a particular space
Something may be contacting the sensors.

There is not enough room in the parking space for the vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
Your vehicle is farther than 4.9 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space.
Your vehicle is closer than 16 in (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles.
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with
reverse (R) selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
205

Parking Aids
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
You didn't wait for the steering wheel to complete its rotation after a gear change. The
system performs best when the steering wheel is allowed to finish rotating before
accelerating.
WARNINGS
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped) Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in reverse
WARNINGS (R). Make sure your vehicle is not
The rear view camera system is a moving.
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in The rear view camera system provides a
conjunction with the interior and exterior video image of the area behind your
mirrors for maximum coverage. vehicle.
Objects that are close to either During operation, lines appear in the
corner of the bumper or under the display which represent your vehicle’s path
bumper, might not be seen on the and proximity to objects behind your
screen due to the limited coverage of the vehicle.
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera when the tailgate is
ajar. If the tailgate is ajar, the camera
will be out of position and the video image
may be incorrect. All guidelines have been
removed when the tailgate is ajar.
E184050
206

Parking Aids
The camera is located on the tailgate The camera may not operate correctly
handle. under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
Using the Rear View Camera lamps are not operating.
System
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
The rear view camera system displays camera's view. Clean the lens with a
what is behind your vehicle when you place soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
the transmission in reverse (R). cleaner.
Note: The reverse sensing system is not • The rear of your vehicle is hit or
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) damaged, causing the camera to
and may not detect certain angular or become misaligned.
moving objects.
Guidelines and the Centerline
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle: Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
• Active guidelines: Show the intended are only available when the transmission is
path of your vehicle while reversing. in reverse (R).
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path Note: The centerline is only available if
your vehicle is moving in while reversing active or fixed guidelines are on.
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once you engage the trailer tow connector.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Pro
Trailer Backup Assist you can set-up the
trailer to work with the Rear View Camera
system.
207

Parking Aids
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and

out depending on the steering wheel
A B C D E position. The active guidelines do not show
when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle is not
shown. Be aware of your
surroundings when using the manual zoom
feature.
F
E142436 Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
A Active guidelines Note: Only the centerline shows when you
B Centerline enable manual zoom.
C Fixed guideline: Green zone Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone symbol on the camera screen to change
E Fixed guideline: Red zone the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
F Rear bumper This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
Active guidelines only show with fixed image keeps the bumper in the image to
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn provide a reference. The zoom is only
the steering wheel to point the guidelines active while the transmission is in reverse
toward an intended path. If the steering (R).
wheel position changes while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original Camera System Settings
intended path.
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the multifunctional display
when the transmission is not in reverse (R):
• Menu > Vehicle > Camera Settings
208

Parking Aids
Enhanced Park Aids When shifting the transmission out of

reverse (R) and into any gear other than
Selectable settings for this feature are ON park (P), the camera image remains in the
and OFF. display until your vehicle speed reaches
The system uses red, yellow and green 6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when the
highlights that appear on top of the video rear camera delay feature is on, or until a
image when any of the sensing systems radio button is pressed.
detect an object.
Vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch™ 360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped)
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones WARNINGS
will highlight green, yellow and red when The 360 degree camera system is a
the parking aid sensors detect an object in supplement system that still requires
the coverage area. the driver to use it in conjunction with
looking out the windows, and checking the
interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
You may not see objects that are
close to either corner of the bumper
or under the bumper due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Use caution when turning camera
features ON or OFF while out of park
(P). Make sure your vehicle is not
moving.
The 360 degree camera system consists

of front, side and rear cameras. The
system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
E190459 • Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
For additional information of the zone
coverage and the rear sensing system. See • Allows you to see a top-down view of
Parking Aid (page 201). the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots.
Rear Camera Delay • Provides visibility around your vehicle
Selectable settings for this feature are ON to you in parking maneuvers such as:
and OFF. • Centering in a parking space.
The default setting for the rear camera • Obstacles near vehicle.
delay is OFF. • Parallel parking.
209

Parking Aids
The 360 degree camera system • Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
button is located on the normal rear camera view next to a 360
E183663
instrument panel and allows you degree camera view. This view can be
to toggle through different camera views. accessed by putting your vehicle in
The front and rear cameras have multiple reverse (R), or by pressing the camera
screens which consist of: Normal view with button from the Rear Split View screen.
360, Normal view, and split view. When in • Rear Normal View: Provides an image
park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the of what is directly behind your vehicle.
front images will be displayed when the Access this view by pressing the
button is pressed. When in reverse (R), only camera button from the Rear 360 +
the rear images will be displayed when the Normal screen.
button is pressed.
• Rear Split View: Provides an
Note: The 360 degree camera system will extended view of what is behind your
turn OFF when your vehicle is in motion at vehicle. Access this view by pressing
low speed, except when in reverse (R). the camera button from the Rear
Normal View screen.
Camera Views
Keep Out Zone
The small vehicle icon displayed on the
top left corner of the image illustrates the
camera view being displayed. Camera
views are laid out in the order the screens
will appear once the button is pressed.
Note: The front video image will be
disabled when your vehicle is in motion at
low speed, except when in reverse (R).
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view. This view will
appear on the screen when the button
is pressed in any gear other than E184448
reverse (R).
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
• Front Normal View: Provides an yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
image of what is directly in front of your vehicle. It is designed to give you the
vehicle. Access this view by pressing indication on the ground of the fully
the camera button from the Front 360 extended outside mirror position.
+ Normal View screen.
• Front Split View: Provides an Front Camera
extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle. Access this view by WARNING
pressing the camera button from the The front camera system is an aid
Front Normal View screen. supplement device that still requires
the driver to use it in conjunction with
looking out your vehicle.
210

Parking Aids
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view

while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
E184044
The front video camera, located in the

grille, provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds. To use the front video camera
system, place the transmission in any gear
except reverse (R). An image will display
once the camera enable button is pressed.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation
and/or road condition.
Side Camera
E206263
The side view camera, located in the

outside mirror, provide a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle as part
of the front 360 + normal view and rear
360 + normal view. It aids you while
parking your vehicle either forward or
backwards.
211

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or, when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes. Change down a gear to
assist the system in maintaining the set E191819
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death. The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the Switching Cruise Control On and
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph Off
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill. Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
E71340
Setting the Cruise Speed

1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator color changes.
212

Changing the Set Speed WARNINGS

Note: If you accelerate by pressing the Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not warning or avoidance system.
change. When you release the accelerator Adaptive cruise control does not
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that detect stationary or slow moving
you previously set. vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal Adaptive cruise control does not
until you reach the desired speed. Press detect pedestrians or objects in the
and release SET+. roadway.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired Adaptive cruise control does not
speed. detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately Do not use the adaptive cruise
1 mph (2 km/h) increments. control when entering or leaving a
highway, in heavy traffic or on roads
Canceling the Set Speed that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal, this Do not use in poor visibility,
action does not erase the set speed. specifically fog, rain, spray or snow.
Resuming the Set Speed Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,

Press and release RES. drive safely and control the vehicle at all
times.
Switching Cruise Control Off The system adjusts your speed to maintain
Press and release OFF or switch the a proper distance between you and the
ignition off. vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select from one of four gap settings.
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions, especially
when using adaptive cruise control.
Adaptive cruise control cannot replace
attentive driving. Failing to follow any of E183737
the warnings below or failing to pay The controls for using your cruise control
attention to the road may result in a crash, are located on the steering wheel.
serious injury or death.
213

Switching the System On 5. A lead vehicle graphic illuminates if the

system detects a vehicle in front of you.
Press and release ON.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
The information display shows active, the speedometer may vary slightly
the grey indicator light. from the set speed displayed in the
E144529
information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of
you, your vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
E183738 crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
The current gap setting and SET also
of vehicles detected by the radar
shows.
sensor. In some cases there may be
Setting a Speed no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
1. Accelerate to the desired speed. necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
2. Press and release SET+. The memory crash, serious injury or death.
stores the vehicle speed.
3. The information display shows a green Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
indicator light, current gap setting and the adaptive cruise control system is active.
the desired set speed. When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
4. Take your foot off the accelerator same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
pedal. the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. The
distance setting is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.
The vehicle maintains a constant distance
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 12.4 mph
E183738
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
214

The system applies the brakes to slow the

vehicle to maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. The system applies
only limited maximum braking. Press the
brake pedal to override the system.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level is insufficient, an audible
warning sounds while the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
appears on the windshield heads-up
display. Take immediate action to slow or
stop the vehicle. E183739
The system may provide slight temporary
acceleration when you use your driver side A Gap decrease.
directional indicator while following a lead B Gap increase.
vehicle, to aid in passing the vehicle.
Press the gap control to decrease or
Setting the Gap Distance increase the distance between your vehicle
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap and the vehicle in front of you.
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E183738
Bars in the graphic show the selected gap

distance. You can select between four gap
settings.
215

Adaptive cruise control distance-between-vehicle settings

Set speed Graphic display, Time gap, Distance gap Dynamic beha-
bars indicated seconds vior
mph ( km/h) between yd (m)
vehicles
62 (100) 1 1 31 (28) Sport.

62 (100) 2 1.4 43 (39) Normal.
62 (100) 3 1.8 55 (50) Normal.
62 (100) 4 2.2 67 (61) Comfort.
Each time you start the vehicle, the system Changing the Set Speed
selects the last chosen gap for the current
driver. • Accelerate or brake to the desired
speed, then press and release SET+.
Disengaging the System
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The desired set speed shows on the
last set speed displays in grey but does not information display. The vehicle speed
erase. gradually changes to the selected
speed.
Overriding the System • Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed changes in approximately
WARNING 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
Whenever you press the accelerator The system may apply the brakes to slow
pedal and override the system, the the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
system no longer automatically speed displays continuously in the
applies the brakes to maintain separation information display while the system is
from any vehicle ahead. active.
While you press the accelerator pedal, you Resuming the Set Speed
override the set speed and gap distance.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
When you override the system, the set speed and intend to return to it.
the green indicator light
E144529
illuminates and the lead vehicle Press and release RES. The vehicle returns
graphic does not show in the information to the previously set speed. The set speed
display. shows continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or to a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
216

Low Speed Automatic The radar sensor has a limited field of

Cancellation vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
The system does not function at vehicle some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
speeds below 12.4 mph (20 km/h). An does not illuminate if the system does not
audible alarm sounds and the automatic detect a vehicle in front of you.
braking releases if the vehicle drops below
this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage

Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have
cooled.
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.
Switching the System Off

Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or switch off the
ignition.
E71621
Detection Issues Detection issues can occur:

WARNING A When driving on a different line
On rare occasions, detection issues than the vehicle in front.
can occur due to the road B With vehicles that edge into your
infrastructures, for example bridges, lane. The system can only detect
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, these vehicles once they move
the system may brake late or fully into your lane.
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle, C There may be issues with the
supervising the system and intervening, if detection of vehicles in front
required. when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
217

In these cases the system may brake late WARNINGS

or unexpectedly. Stay alert and take action Do not use adaptive cruise control
when necessary. while you have a snow plow blade
If something hits the front end of your installed.
vehicle or damage occurs, the Do not use tire sizes other than those
radar-sensing zone may change. This could recommended because this can
cause missed or false vehicle detections. affect the normal operation of the
Contact an authorized dealer to have them system. Failing to do so may result in a loss
check for proper coverage and operation. of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Note: If you disable electronic stability
control, adaptive cruise control is not
available. See Using Stability Control
(page 197).
E183741
Blocked Sensor A message displays if something obstructs

the radar signals from the sensor. The
WARNINGS sensor is behind a cover near the driver side
Do not use the system when towing of the lower grille. The system cannot
a trailer with aftermarked trailer detect a vehicle ahead and does not
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer function when something obstructs the
brakes will not function properly when you radar signals. The following table lists
switch the system on because the brakes possible causes and actions for this
are electronically controlled. Failing to do message displaying.
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
218

Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or obstructed in some way. or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the Do not use the system in these conditions
radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface Do not use the system in these conditions
of the road may interfere with the radar because it may not detect any vehicles
signals. ahead.
You are in a desert or remote area with no Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
other vehicles and no roadside objects. control.
The cruise control indicator light

Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
replaces the adaptive cruise
possible to get a blockage warning and not E71340 control indicator light if you
have a blockage. This can happen, for
select normal cruise control. The gap
example, when driving in sparse rural or
setting does not display, the system does
desert environments. A false blocked
not automatically respond to lead vehicles
condition either self clears or clears after
and automatic braking is not active. The
a key cycle.
system recalls its last setting when you
Switching to Normal Cruise start your vehicle.
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have
selected and apply the brakes when
necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive

cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display. See
Information Messages (page 118).
219

Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped) System Warnings

Note: Note: The system will not issue
WARNING warnings below approximately 40 mph
The driver alert system is designed (64 km/h).
to aid you. It is not intended to The warning system is in two stages. At
replace your attention and judgment. first the system issues a temporary warning
You are still responsible to drive with due that you need to take a rest. This message
care and attention. will only appear for a short time. If the
system detects further reduction in driving
Note: The system will store the on or off alertness, another warning may be issued
setting in the information display menu which will remain in the information display
through ignition cycles. for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system active the system will run automatically in
will be active at speeds above 40 mph the background and only issue a warning
(64 km/h). if required.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera. Resetting the System
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the You can reset the system by either:
windshield is damaged, the system may not • Switching the ignition off and on.
function.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
Note: The system may not be available in and closing the driver’s door.
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs Equipped)
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving WARNING
alertness is reduced below a certain The system is designed to aid the
threshold, the system will alert you using driver. It is not intended to replace
a chime and a message in the information your attention and judgment. You are
display. still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by Note: The system works as long as the
selecting Settings then Driver Assist then camera can detect one lane marking.
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated, Note: The system may not function if the
the system will monitor your alertness level camera is blocked or there is damage to the
based upon your driving behavior in relation windshield.
to the lane markings, and other factors.
220

Driving Aids
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system

detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road E165515
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror. Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane
Switching the System On and Off departure is detected.
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a
MyKey® is detected. If the system detects
a MyKey®, it defaults to on and the mode
is set to alert.
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the mode
and intensity settings.
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the E165516
E173233 system on or off.
Aid only – Provides a steering wheel
System Settings vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
The system has one standard feature
setting and one optional setting menu
available. To view or adjust the settings,
See General Information (page 103). The
system stores the last known selection for
each of these settings. You do not need to
readjust your settings each time you turn
on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
221

Driving Aids
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may

still be displayed if adaptive cruise control
is enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
E165517
speed.
A Alert • Your turn indicator is active.
B Aid • Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance in the camera field-of-view.
steering torque input toward the lane
• The camera is obscured or unable to
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out
detect the lane markings due to
of the lane, the system provides a steering
environmental conditions (significant
wheel vibration.
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain,
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate fog), traffic conditions (following a
general zone coverage. They do not provide large vehicle that is blocking or
exact zone parameters. shadowing the lane), or vehicle
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity conditions (poor headlamp
of the steering wheel vibration used for the illumination).
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting See Troubleshooting for additional
does not affect the aid mode. information.
• Low Green: Indicates that the system is
• Medium available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
• High
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
System Display providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
When you switch on the system,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle Red: Indicates that the system is providing
E144813
with lane markings will display or has just provided a lane keeping alert
in the information display. warning.
If you select aid mode when you You can temporarily disable the system at
switch on the system, arrows will any time by doing the following
E173234
be displayed with lane markings. • Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display. • Using your direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
222

Driving Aids
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds

Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
223

Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure

If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows or trailers
The Blind Spot Information System is

designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION that may have entered the blind spot zone
SYSTEM (A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
WARNING exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the designed to alert you if certain vehicles
Blind Spot Information System as a enter the blind spot zone while driving.
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your Note: The Blind Spot Information System
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind does not prevent contact with other vehicles
Spot Information System is not a or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
replacement for careful driving. people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
A through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System

The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
A (8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
E124788
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
224

Driving Aids
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot

Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System

illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
When the Blind Spot Information System E205199
is alerting on a vehicle and the The system uses radar sensors that are
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind located behind the bumper fascia on each
Spot Information System alert indicator side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
flashes as an increased warning level. snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
The alert indicator dims when the system in heavy rain can cause system
detects nighttime darkness. degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
cause system degradation. This is referred
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
at the same time.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
System Sensor Blockage repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
225

Driving Aids
If the system detects a degraded Switching the System Off and On

performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
information display. Also the BLIS alert Information System off in the information
indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no display. See General Information (page
longer provide any vehicle warnings. You 103). When the Blind Spot Information
can clear the information display warning System switches off, you will not receive
but the alert indicators will remain alerts and the information display shows
illuminated. a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in the Blind Spot Information System on or
two ways: off, the alert indicators flash twice.
• After the blockage in front of the Note: The Blind Spot Information System
sensors is removed or the remembers the last selected on or off
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or setting.
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing You can also have the Blind Spot
vehicles. Information System switched off
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
and then back ON. switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a dealer.
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
Information System off. If your vehicle has
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer WARNING
tow module, it is recommended to turn the To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
Blind Spot Information System off use the Cross Traffic Alert system as
manually. Operating the Blind Spot a replacement for using the interior
Information System with a trailer attached and exterior mirrors and looking over your
will cause poor system performance. shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
System Errors replacement for careful driving.
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
illuminate and a message will appear in of vehicles approaching from the sides
the information display. See Information when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Messages (page 118).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).
226

Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helps
vehicles that approach with a speed up to increase the coverage area and
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases effectiveness.
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only

partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142441
227

Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when

parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and

Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an

amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a E205199
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from The system uses radar sensors that are
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works located behind the bumper fascia on each
with the reverse sensing system that side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
sounds its own series of tones. See snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
Parking Aid (page 201). areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 224). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
228

Driving Aids
The following are other situations that may Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance: whenever the ignition is switched on and
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects ready to provide appropriate alerts when
obstructing the sensors. the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
• Approaching vehicles passing at selected on or off setting.
speeds greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h). You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
(12 km/h).
the system can only be switched back on
• Backing out of an angled parking spot. at an authorized dealer.
False Alerts
STEERING
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it Electric Power Steering
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert WARNINGS
off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no The electric power steering system
factory equipped trailer tow module, it is has diagnostic checks that
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert continuously monitor the system. If
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert a fault is detected, a message displays in
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross the information display. Stop your vehicle
Traffic Alert performance. as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
There may be certain instances when there ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert switch the ignition on and watch the
system that illuminates the alert indicator information display for a steering system
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some warning message. If a steering system
amount of false alerts are normal; they are warning message returns, have the system
temporary and self-correct. checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you
System Errors
may not feel a difference in the
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with steering, however a serious condition
the left or right sensor a message will may exist. Obtain immediate service from
appear in the information display. See an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
Information Messages (page 118). result in loss of steering control.
Switching the System Off and On Your vehicle has an electric power steering
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
Alert off in the information display. See maintenance is required.
General Information (page 103). When If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will you are driving, electric power steering
not receive alerts and the information assistance is lost. The steering system still
display will display a system off message. operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
229

Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM

the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents (If Equipped)
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the Principle Of Operation (If Equipped)
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers WARNINGS
allow the system to cool and return to This system is an extra driving aid. It
normal operation. does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the
Steering Tips brakes. This system does NOT
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
• Correct tire pressures. you may collide with another vehicle.
• Uneven tire wear.
The collision warning system with
• Loose or worn suspension brake support cannot help prevent
components. all collisions. Do not rely on this
• Loose or worn steering components. system to replace your judgment and the
• Improper vehicle alignment. need to maintain correct distance and
speed.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
seem to wander or pull.
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
Adaptive Learning to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
The electronic power steering system
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
adaptive learning helps correct road
(8 km/h).
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with Note: The collision warning system will be
the brake system to help operate unavailable if you disable the electronic
advanced stability control and accident stability control. See Using Stability
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever Control (page 197).
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all E156130
systems. The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
230

Driving Aids
Note: It is recommended that you turn the

collision warning system off if a snow plow
or similar object is installed in such a way
that it may block the radar sensor. Your
vehicle will remember the selected setting
across key cycles.
Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
E156131 reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
When your vehicle rapidly approaches warnings. See General Information (page
another vehicle, a red warning light flashes 103).
and a tone sounds.
The brake support system assists you in Blocked Sensors
reducing any collision speed by
pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
collision continues to increases after the
audio-visual warning, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if
the brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
brakes apply full stopping power.
Using the Collision Warning System

WARNING
E183741
The collision warning system’s brake
support reduces collision speed only If a blocked sensor message appears in the
if you brake your vehicle before any information display, dirt, water, or an object
collision. As in any typical braking situation, is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
you must press your brake pedal. located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
You can use your information display the sensor, and the collision warning
control to adjust the collision warning system will not work. Possible causes for
system's sensitivity or to turn the system the blocked sensor message and corrective
On or Off. Your vehicle will remember actions are listed below.
these settings across key cycles. You may
change the collision warning system
sensitivity to any one of three possible
settings. See General Information (page
103).
231

Driving Aids
Cause Action
The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
or obstructed obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is Wait a short time. The radar may take
clean but the message remains in the several minutes to reset after you remove
display the obstruction
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air The collision warning system is temporarily
interferes with the radar signals disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road The collision warning system is temporarily
surface interferes with the radar signals disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Damage to the front end of your vehicle

System Limitations may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
WARNING warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
The collision warning system’s brake your radar sensor for proper coverage and
support only reduces collision speed operation.
if you first apply your brakes. You
must brake as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,

there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
232

Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT the following terms for

determining your vehicle’s weight
Vehicle Loading - with and ratings, with or without a trailer,
without a Trailer from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
This section will guide you in the Label:
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded Base Curb Weight - is the weight
vehicle weight within its design of the vehicle including a full tank
rating capability, with or without of fuel and all standard
a trailer. Properly loading your equipment. It does not include
vehicle will provide maximum passengers, cargo, or optional
return of vehicle design equipment.
performance. Before loading your Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
vehicle, familiarize yourself with weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
E143816
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum

Payload - is the combined weight payload. The payload listed on the
of cargo and passengers that the Tire Label is the maximum
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for the vehicle as built by
payload for your vehicle can be the assembly plant. If you install
found on the Tire Label on the any aftermarket or
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver authorized-dealer installed
door (vehicles exported outside equipment on the vehicle, you
the US and Canada may not have must subtract the weight of the
a Tire Label). Look for “THE equipment from the payload listed
COMBINED WEIGHT OF on the Tire Label in order to
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO determine the new payload.
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
233

Load Carrying
WARNING Example only:
The appropriate loading

capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space E210944
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
E210945
CARGO
E143817
234

Load Carrying
Cargo Weight - includes all Certification Label. The label shall

weight added to the Base Curb be affixed to either the door hinge
Weight, including cargo and pillar, door-latch post, or the door
optional equipment. When towing, edge that meets the door-latch
trailer tongue load or king pin post, next to the driver seating
weight is also part of cargo weight. position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is Gross Axle Weight Rating.
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including Note: For trailer towing
vehicle curb weight and all information refer to the RV and
payload. Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
GVW
E143818

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - Label. The label shall be affixed
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus to either the door hinge pillar,
cargo, plus passengers. door-latch post, or the door edge
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight that meets the door-latch post,
Rating) - is the maximum next to the driver seating position.
allowable weight of the fully The Gross Vehicle Weight must
loaded vehicle (including all never exceed the Gross Vehicle
options, equipment, passengers Weight Rating.
and cargo). It is shown on the
235

Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
GCW GVW
E143819
236

Load Carrying
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel

- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus King Pin Weight - refers to the
the weight of the fully loaded amount of the weight that a trailer
trailer. pushes down on a trailer hitch.
GCWR (Gross Combined Examples: For a 5000 pound
Weight Rating) - is the maximum (2268 kilogram) conventional
allowable weight of the vehicle trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
and the loaded trailer, including 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
all cargo and passengers, that the load range of 500 to 750 pounds
vehicle can handle without risking (227 to 340 kilograms). For an
damage. (Important: The towing 11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
vehicle’s braking system is rated wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
for operation at Gross Vehicle 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
Weight Rating, not at Gross load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
Combined Weight Rating.) (782 to 1304 kilograms).
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed WARNINGS
vehicles and for trailers where the Do not exceed the GVWR or
Gross Combined Weight of the the GAWR specified on the
towing vehicle plus the trailer Safety Compliance Certification
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Label.
Rating of the towing vehicle. The Do not use replacement tires
Gross Combined Weight must with lower load carrying
never exceed the Gross capacities than the original tires
Combined Weight Rating. because they may lower the
Maximum Loaded Trailer vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
Weight - is the highest possible limitations. Replacement tires
weight of a fully loaded trailer the with a higher limit than the original
vehicle can tow. It assumes a tires do not increase the GVWR
vehicle with mandatory options, and GAWR limitations.
driver and front passenger weight Exceeding any vehicle weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms] rating limitation could result
each), no cargo weight (internal in serious damage to the vehicle
or external) and a tongue load of and/or personal injury.
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Steps for determining the
Trailer Towing Guide available at correct load limit:
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
237

Load Carrying
1. Locate the statement "The *Suppose your vehicle has a

combined weight of occupants 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and cargo should never exceed and luggage capacity. You decide
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your to go golfing. Is there enough load
vehicle’s placard. capacity to carry you, four of your
2. Determine the combined friends and all the golf bags? You
weight of the driver and and four friends average 220
passengers that will be riding pounds (99 kilograms) each and
in your vehicle. the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
3. Subtract the combined weight The calculation would be: 1400 -
of the driver and passengers (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
from XXX kg or XXX lb. - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
4. The resulting figure equals the enough load capacity in your
available amount of cargo and vehicle to transport four friends
luggage load capacity. For and your golf bags. In metric units,
example, if the “XXX” amount the calculation would be: 635
equals 1,400 lb. and there will kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
be five 150 lb. passengers in (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
your vehicle, the amount of 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
available cargo and luggage *Suppose your vehicle has a
load capacity is 650 lb. 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). and luggage capacity. You and
5. Determine the combined one of your friends decide to pick
weight of luggage and cargo up cement from the local home
being loaded on the vehicle. improvement store to finish that
That weight may not safely patio you have been planning for
exceed the available cargo and the past two years. Measuring the
luggage load capacity inside of the vehicle with the rear
calculated in Step 4. seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
6. If your vehicle will be towing a (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
trailer, load from your trailer you have enough load capacity to
will be transferred to your transport the cement to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to home? If you and your friend each
determine how this reduces the weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
available cargo and luggage the calculation would be: 1400 -
load capacity of your vehicle. (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
The following gives you a few - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
examples on how to calculate the not have enough cargo capacity
available amount of cargo and to carry that much weight. In
luggage load capacity: metric units, the calculation would
238

Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 Special Loading Instructions

kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. and Utility-type Vehicles
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds WARNING
(104 kilograms). If you remove Loaded vehicles may handle
three 100-pound (45-kilogram) differently than unloaded
cement bags, then the load vehicles. Extra precautions, such
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x as slower speeds and increased
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - stopping distance, should be
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have taken when driving a heavily
the load capacity to transport the loaded vehicle.
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 Your vehicle can haul more cargo
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = and people than most passenger
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
The above calculations also hauling cargo and people may
assume that the loads are raise the center of gravity of the
positioned in your vehicle in a vehicle.
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle TAILGATE
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance Tailgate Lock (If Equipped)
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge The tailgate lock can help prevent tailgate
pillar, door-latch post, or the door theft.
edge that meets the door-latch Manual Tailgate Lock
post, next to the driver seating
position.
E163087
239

Load Carrying
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock. The electronic tailgate release will not
Turn it clockwise to lock the tailgate. Turn operate when:
it counterclockwise to unlock the tailgate. • The battery voltage is below the
Remote Control Tailgate Lock (If minimum operating voltage.
Equipped) • The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Use the lock and unlock buttons on your
remote control to lock and unlock the With the Remote Control
tailgate.
Press the remote control button
Manual Tailgate Opening twice within three seconds.
E191530
Manual Tailgate Release
With the Outside Control Button
1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the
tailgate will unlock when you press the
tailgate release button.
E187692
1. Unlock the tailgate.

2. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle
to release the tailgate.
Electronic Tailgate Opening (If

Equipped)
E187693
WARNING
2. Press the button in the top of the
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a tailgate handle.
cargo area, inside or outside of a 3. Push the tailgate up to close the
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in tailgate.
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride Note: The electronic tailgate is not a
in any area of your vehicle that is not powered tailgate. The use of a tonneau
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make cover or other aftermarket accessories,
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat freezing conditions or being parked downhill
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to may stop your tailgate from opening
follow this warning could result in serious automatically after it is unlatched. You may
personal injury or death. need to pull the handle to open the tailgate
if the tailgate does not automatically lower
after being unlatched.
240

Load Carrying
Tailgate Removal
WARNING
Always properly secure cargo to
prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling
from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious
personal injury to vehicle occupants or
others.
You can remove the tailgate for more

loading room. E163092
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does 5. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
not have a rearview camera. spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift the tailgate to 45° from horizontal.
8. Lift the right side off its hinge.
9. Lift the tailgate to 80° from horizontal.
10. Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
E189556 Tailgate Step (If Equipped)
1. Locate and disconnect the rearview Use the step to make entering the truck
camera in-line connector. It is under bed easier.
the pickup box on the right-hand side
of the vehicle near the spare tire. To reduce the risk of falling:
2. There is a protective cap in the glove • Only operate the step when your
box. Install it on the in-line connector vehicle is on a level surface.
that remains under the pickup box. • Only operate the step in areas with
3. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully sufficient lighting.
feed the tailgate harness up through • Always open the step panel to widen
the gap between the pickup box and the step.
the bumper and place it out of the way • Always use the grab handle when
under the pickup box. climbing on the step.
4. Lower the tailgate. • Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load, you plus the load,
below 350 lb (159 kg).
241

Load Carrying
Opening the Step Replace the slip resistance tape or grab

handle molding if it appears worn or
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the damaged.
step before moving your vehicle. Never drive
with the step or grab handle open. Closing the Step
1. Lower the tailgate. 1. Press handle button 1 to lower the
2. Push the button in the center of the telescoping handle extension, and then
step molding. The step will pop out press button 2 to release the handle.
slightly. Rotate the handle down from vertical
to horizontal.
2. Push the handle back into the tailgate.
3. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate, until
the step is secure.
Box Side Step (If Equipped)

Use the step for easier access to the truck
bed.
Note: Close the step before driving.
E187718 Note: Do not exceed 500 lb (227 kg) on the
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step step. This includes you plus cargo.
to its lowest position. Note: Do not use the step to lift the vehicle.
Only use proper jacking points.
Note: The step may operate more slowly
in cool temperatures.
Note: The step mechanism may trap debris
such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. This
may prevent the step from deploying
automatically when you press the button.
If this happens, make sure that you press
the button down and carefully pull out the
step manually. Wash off the debris with a
high-pressure car wash wand and stow the
E189557 step.
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate.
5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal
to vertical until you hear a click. You
have locked the handle in place.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab the
handle.
242

Load Carrying
Deploying the Step Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
Tailgate Mode
E167268
Push down on the button with your foot.

The step will automatically extend from
the stowed position.
Stowing the Step E163095
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center

of your vehicle.
E167269
Push the step under the truck with your

foot until it fully latches. Do not push on E163096
the button while stowing the step.
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
Bed Extender (If Equipped)
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the
tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
243

Load Carrying
5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into

the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.
Grocery Mode
E163097
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.

Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E163100
Follow Steps 1-4 of the tailgate mode

instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
BoxLink™ Cleats (If Equipped)
E163098
These cleats attach to the inner box walls
to help you to tie down cargo. The cleats
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both can be locked to prevent removal or
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to unlocked for removal.
secure the panels.
BoxLink Cleats
Note: Leave the key in the lock when
removing or installing the cleats. The key
cannot be removed from the lock unless it
is in the locked position.
E163099
244

Load Carrying
Installing Locking BoxLink Cleats
E184885
A. 275 lb (1,223 N) maximum force E189558

between directly opposed cleats.
1. Insert the key into lock and turn
B. 600 lb (2,669 N) maximum force clockwise to unlock.
between diagonally opposed cleats.
2. Insert the cleat into the mounting slot
Secure cargo with up to 275 lb (1,223 N) and push upward. Make sure the cleat
force applied between opposing box link is fully engaged.
cleats, or up to 600 lb (2,669 N) force 3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock.
applied between diagonal box link cleats.
4. Remove the key.
Removing Locking BoxLink Cleats
Bed Ramp (If Equipped)
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn
clockwise to unlock. WARNINGS
2. Pull bottom of the cleat outward while The slide action of the ramp is a
pushing top of cleat down. pinch point. Do not place fingers or
3. Hold on to the cleat as it clears the hands in the pinch point.
mounting slot. Extend and retract the ramp only
when connected to the tailgate
plate.
245

Load Carrying
WARNINGS
Be sure the ramp is installed
correctly when loading and
unloading equipment on and off the
ramp.
Do not step or sit on the ramp when
it is in the stowed position.
Install the ramp only within the
prescribed ramp angles.
E211150
Note: The ramp maximum capacity is
800 lb (363 kg). Note: A smooth surface tool can be used
Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground to rotate the stops.
before usage. 4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
Note: For loading and unloading the ramp to the open position.
equipment, your ramp should be set
between 10° upward and 26° downward to
avoid damage to the ramp claw and tailgate
plate.
Using the Bed Ramp

1. Remove the front and rear cables.
E194382
5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate

plate.
E194380
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew

the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.
246

Load Carrying
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.

6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Installing the Ramp Holder
E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and

extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.
Stowing the Bed Ramp

E194387
1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward. 1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over
the mounting plate and rotate the
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position ramp holder into position.
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.
247

Load Carrying
E194388
2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards

into the installed position.
3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
248

Towing
TOWING A TRAILER Load Placement

To help minimize how trailer
WARNINGS movement affects your vehicle
Do not exceed the GVWR or when driving:
the GAWR specified on the
certification label. • Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
Towing trailers beyond the • Load the heaviest items
maximum recommended centered between the left and
gross trailer weight exceeds the right side trailer tires.
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, • Load the heaviest items above
transmission damage, structural the trailer axles or just slightly
damage, loss of vehicle control, forward toward the trailer
vehicle rollover and personal tongue. Do not allow the final
injury. trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
Your vehicle may have electrical • Select a ball mount with the
items, such as fuses or relays, correct rise or drop. When both
related to towing. See Fuses the loaded vehicle and trailer
(page 289). are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
Your vehicle's load capacity angled down toward your
designation is by weight, not by vehicle, when viewed from the
volume, so you cannot necessarily side.
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer. When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
Towing a trailer places an extra or shudder may be present due to
load on your vehicle's engine, the increased payload weight.
transmission, axle, brakes, tires Additional information regarding
and suspension. Inspect these proper trailer loading and setting
components periodically during, your vehicle up for towing is
and after, any towing operation. located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
233).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
249

Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If RECOMMENDED TOWING

WEIGHTS
Equipped)
Note: Do not exceed a trailer

WARNING weight of 5,100 lb (2,313 kg) when
Turning off trailer sway control towing with, or by, bumper only.
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford Note: Do not exceed a trailer
does not recommend disabling this feature weight of 5,100 lb (2,313 kg) if your
except in situations where speed reduction vehicle is not equipped with a
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), Heavy Duty Trailer Towing
the driver has significant trailer towing Package.
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation. Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer Vehicles not equipped with the
sway, but reduces it once it begins. Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers Duty Payload Package
2
should2 not
from swaying. exceed 36.6 feet (3.4 meters )
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too trailer frontal area. Vehicles
high, the system may activate multiple equipped with the Trailer Tow
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed. Package or the Heavy Duty Payload
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at Package
2
should not
2
exceed 60
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces feet (5.6 meters ) trailer frontal
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, area.
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE Note: Exceeding this limitation
SPEED appears in the information display. may significantly reduce the
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle performance of your towing
down, then pull safely to the side of the vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
road and check for proper tongue load and low aerodynamic drag and rounded
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 233).
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
250

Towing
Note: For high altitude operation, Your vehicle may tow a trailer
reduce the gross combined weight provided the maximum trailer
by 2% per 1,000 ft (305 m) starting weight is less than or equal to the
at the 1,000 ft (305 m) elevation maximum trailer weight listed for
point. your vehicle configuration on the
following charts.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
1
Driveline – 4x2
Cab – wheel- Engine Axle ratio Maximum
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.55 9500 lb (4309

4
kg)
3.5L TiVCT
3.73 12000 lb (5443
kg)
3.31 12200 lb (5533
Regular cab – kg)
122 2.7L GTDI
3.73 13100 lb (5942
kg)
3.31 13000 lb (5897
kg)
5.0L TiVCT
3.55 13800 lb (6260
kg)
Regular cab – 3.55 9600 lb (4354
3.5L TiVCT
141 kg)
4
251

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x2
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.73 12100 lb (5488

kg)
3.31 12300 lb (5579
kg)
3.73 13100 lb (5942
2.7L GTDI kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
5
kg)
3.31 13900 lb (6305
kg)
3.55 14900 lb (6758
5.0L TiVCT kg)
3.73 16000 lb (7257
6
kg)
3.15 15500 lb (7030
kg)
3.55 17000 lb (7711
3.5L GTDI 7
kg)
3.73 17100 lb (7756
6, 7
kg)
3.55 9900 lb (4491
4
kg)
3.5L TiVCT
Super Cab – 145 3.73 12200 lb (5534
kg)
3.31 12500 lb (5670
2.7L GTDI kg)
252

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x2
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.73 13100 lb (5942

kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
5
kg)
3.31 14200 lb (6441
kg)
5.0L TiVCT
3.55 15200 lb (6895
kg)
3.15 15800 lb (7167
kg)
3.5L GTDI
3.55 17100 lb (7756
7
kg)
3.31 12600 lb (5715
kg)
3.73 13100 lb (5942
2.7L GTDI kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
5
kg)
Super Cab – 163 3.31 14300 lb (6486
kg)
3.55 15300 lb (6940
5.0L TiVCT kg)
3.73 16200 lb (7348
kg)
3.15 15900 lb (7212
3.5L GTDI kg)
253

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x2
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.55 17100 lb (7756

7
kg)
3.73 17100 lb (7756
6, 7
kg)
3.5L TiVCT 3.73 12200 lb (5534
kg)
3.31 12600 lb (5715
kg)
3.73 13100 lb (5942
2.7L GTDI kg)
3.73 13100 lb (5942
5
kg)
Crew cab – 145
3.31 14200 lb (6441
kg)
5.0L TiVCT
3.55 15200 lb (6895
kg)
3.15 15800 lb (7167
kg)
3.5L GTDI
3.55 17000 lb (7711
7
kg)
3.31 12600 lb (5715
kg)
3.73 13100 lb (5942
Crew cab – 157 2.7L GTDI kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
5
kg)
254

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x2
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.31 14200 lb (6441

kg)
3.55 15200 lb (6895
5.0L TiVCT kg)
3.73 16200 lb (7348
6
kg)
3.15 15900 lb (7212
kg)
3.55 17100 lb (7756
3.5L GTDI 7
kg)
3.73 17100 lb (7756
6, 7
kg)
1
Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5100 pounds (2313 kilograms) unless
the vehicle is equipped with the Heavy Duty Trailer Tow package or the
MAX Trailer Tow package.
2
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
3
Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).
4
Medium Duty Trailer Tow package – 5100 pound (2313 kilogram)
maximum trailer weight.
5
2.7L EcoBoost Payload Package.
6
Heavy Duty Payload Package.
7
MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.
255

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x4
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.73 12200 lb (5534

3.5L TiVCT kg)
3.55 12500 lb (5670
kg)
2.7L GTDI
Regular cab – 3.73 13300 lb (6032
122 kg)
3.31, 3.55 13200 lb (5987
kg)
5.0L TiVCT
3.73 14600 lb (6622
kg)
3.73 12200 lb (5534
3.5L TiVCT kg)
3.55 12500 lb (5670
kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
2.7L GTDI kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
4
Regular cab – kg)
141 3.31, 3.55 14100 lb (6396
kg)
3.73 16200 lb (7348
5.0L TiVCT kg)
3.73 16200 lb (7348
5
kg)
3.31 15800 lb (7167
3.5L GTDI kg)
256

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x4
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.55 15800 lb (7167

kg)
3.55 17100 lb (7756
6
kg)
3.73 17000 lb (7711
5, 6
kg)
3.73 12200 lb (5534
3.5L TiVCT kg)
3.55 12700 lb (5761
kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
2.7L GTDI kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6032
4
kg)
3.31 14300 lb (6486
kg)
Super Cab – 145
3.55 14400 lb (6532
5.0L TiVCT kg)
3.73 16200 lb (7348
kg)
3.31 16000 lb (7167
kg)
3.55 16000 lb (7167
3.5L GTDI kg)
3.55 16900 lb (7665
6
kg)
257

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x4
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.31 14300 lb (6486

kg)
3.55 14500 lb (6577
kg)
5.0L TiVCT
3.73 16200 lb (7348
kg)
3.73 16200 lb (7348
5
kg)
Super Cab – 163
3.31 16200 lb (7348
kg)
3.55 16200 lb (7348
kg)
3.5L GTDI 3.55 17100 lb (7756
6
kg)
3.73 17100 lb (7756
5, 6
kg)
3.5L TiVCT 3.73 12200 lb (5534
kg)
3.55 12800 lb (5806
kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6033
Crew cab – 145 2.7L GTDI kg)
3.73 13300 lb (6033
4
kg)
3.31 14300 lb (6486
5.0L TiVCT kg)
258

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x4
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.55 14400 lb (6532

kg)
3.73 16200 lb (7348
kg)
3.31 16100 lb (7303
kg)
3.55 16100 lb (7303
3.5L GTDI kg)
3.55 16900 lb (7666
kg)
3.31 14300 lb (6486
kg)
3.55 14500 lb (6577
kg)
5.0L TiVCT
3.73 16200 lb (7348
kg)
Crew cab – 157
3.73 16200 lb (7348
5
kg)
3.31 16100 lb (7303
kg)
3.5L GTDI
3.55 16100 lb (7303
kg)
259

Towing
1
Driveline – 4x4
base (inches) GCWR
2, 3
3.55 17100 lb (7756

6
kg)
3.73 17000 lb (7711
5, 6
kg)
1
Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5100 pounds (2313 kilograms) unless
the vehicle is equipped with the Heavy Duty Trailer Tow package or the
MAX Trailer Tow package.
2
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
3
Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).
4
2.7L EcoBoost Payload Package.
5
Heavy Duty Payload Package.
6
MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.
Calculating the Maximum • Passenger(s) weight.

Loaded Trailer Weight for Your • Payload, cargo and luggage
Vehicle weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle This equals the maximum loaded
model and axle ratio. See the trailer weight for this combination.
previous charts. Note: The trailer tongue load is
2. Subtract all of the following considered part of the payload for
that apply to your vehicle: your vehicle. Reduce the total
• Vehicle curb weight. payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, such as
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight Note: Consult an authorized dealer
distributing hardware. to determine the maximum trailer
• Driver weight. weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
260

Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Trailer Towing Connector
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:

• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
See Load limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your E193232
vehicle's load.
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
Remember to account for the trailer to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load connector that works with the vehicle and
when calculating the total vehicle weight. trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
Color Function
Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp

White Ground (-)
Blue Electric brakes
Green Right turn signal and stop
lamp
261

Towing
Color Function 5. Install and adjust the tension in the

weight-distributing bars so that the
Orange Battery (+) height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
Brown Running lights a quarter the way down from H2,
toward H1.
Grey Reverse lights
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
Hitches
adjust the ball height accordingly and
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto repeat Steps 2-6.
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
must distribute the load in your trailer so down toward the vehicle:
that 10-15% of the total weight of the
trailer is on the tongue. • Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
Weight-distributing Hitches attaches and locks onto the hitch.
WARNING • Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
Do not adjust a weight-distributing trailer manufacturer.
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than Safety Chains
it was before attaching the trailer. Doing
so will defeat the function of the Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause bumper.
unpredictable handling, and could result Always connect the safety chains to the
in serious personal injury. frame or hook retainers of your vehicle
hitch.
When hooking-up a trailer using a To connect the safety chains, cross the
weight-distributing hitch, always use the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
following procedure: enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
trailer, on a level surface.
Trailer Brakes
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the WARNING
fender. This is H1.
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle brake system directly to your
without the weight-distributing bars vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
connected. may not have enough braking power and
4. Measure the height to the top of your your chances of having a collision greatly
vehicle's front wheel opening on the increase.
fender a second time. This is H2.
262

Towing
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or When used properly, the trailer brake
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you controller assists in smooth and effective
install them properly and adjust them to trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
the manufacturer's specifications. The electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
trailer brakes must meet local and federal with a proportional output based on the
regulations. towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking You can adjust the level of initial trailer
system operation is at the gross vehicle brake output by selecting one of three
weight rating, not the gross combined settings using the information display.
weight rating. Choose Low, Medium or High for the initial
trailer brake output you require. See
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more The controller user interface consists of
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms) the following:
when loaded. A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Pressing these buttons adjusts the
Equipped) controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
WARNING the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
The Ford trailer brake controller has braking). The gain setting displays in the
been verified to be compatible with message center.
trailers having electric-actuated
drum brakes (one to four axles) and The controller shows gain setting, output
electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not bar graph, and trailer connectivity status
activate hydraulic surge-style trailer in the information display. They appear in
brakes. It is the responsibility of the the information display as follows:
customer to ensure that the trailer brakes • Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
are adjusted appropriately, functioning trailer connected): Shows the current
normally and all electric connections are gain setting during a given ignition cycle
properly made. Failure to do so may result and when adjusting the gain. This also
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious displays if you use the manual control
injury. lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
E183395
263

Towing
• Trailer Connected: Displays when the Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
system senses a correct trailer wiring Controller Mode
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle. Select the correct option using the
information display. Choose electric for
• Trailer Disconnected: Displays, trailers with electromagentic drum brakes
accompanied by a single audible time, or EOH for trailers with electric over
when the system senses a trailer hydraulic brake systems. See Information
connection and then a disconnection, Displays (page 103).
either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle. It also Trailer Brake Effort Setting
displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear The trailer brake controller allows the user
disconnected. This message can also to customize how aggressively the trailer
display if you use the manual control brakes engage. The default value is "Low"
lever without a trailer connected. After and is the recommended setting for most
disconnecting the trailer connector, trailers. If your trailer's brakes require more
press the brake pedal for initial voltage, or if you prefer more
approximately five seconds to allow aggressive trailer braking, then select either
the system to detect and update the the "Medium" or the "High" setting.
trailer status.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to turn on the trailer's Note: Only perform this procedure in a
electric brakes independent of the tow traffic-free environment at speeds of
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).
adjusting gain section for instructions on The gain setting sets the trailer brake
proper use of this feature. If you use the controller for the specific towing condition.
manual control while the brake is also You should change the setting as towing
applied, the greater of the two inputs conditions change. Changes to towing
determines the power sent to the trailer conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
brakes. road conditions and weather.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control The gain should be set to provide the
lever illuminates both the trailer brake maximum trailer braking assistance while
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
except the center high-mount stop when using the brakes. Locked trailer
lamp, if you make the proper electrical wheels may lead to trailer instability.
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
both trailer and vehicle brake lamps. working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
264

Towing
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a may display when there is a short circuit
message confirming connection on the electric brake output wire. If this
appears in the information display. message displays, accompanied by a
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) single tone, with no trailer connected, the
buttons to increase or decrease the problem is with your vehicle wiring
gain setting to the desired starting between the trailer brake controller and
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the
starting point for heavier loads. message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed assistance. This can be a short to ground
of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
squeeze the manual control lever (such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
completely. breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated may be drawing too much current.
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, Points to Remember
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a brake controller without consulting the
point just below trailer wheel lock-up. Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel result.
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10. • Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
Explanation of Information Display • Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
Warning Messages above, whenever road, weather and
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose trailer or vehicle loading conditions
the trailer brake controller to determine change from when the gain was initially
exactly which trailer fault has occurred. set.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover • Only use the manual control lever for
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer. proper adjustment of the gain during
A message indicating a trailer brake trailer setup. Misuse, such as
module fault may display in response to application during trailer sway, could
faults sensed by the trailer brake controller, cause instability of trailer or tow
accompanied by a single tone. If this vehicle.
message appears, contact an authorized • Avoid towing in adverse weather
dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis conditions. The trailer brake controller
and repair. The controller may still does not provide anti-lock control of
function, but performance may be the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
degraded. lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
265

Towing
• The trailer brake controller is equipped Trailer lamps are required on most towed
with a feature that reduces output at vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky working.
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped)
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller. The rear bumper is equipped with an
integral hitch and only requires a ball with
• The controller interacts with the brake a one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shank
control system and powertrain control diameter. The bumper has a 5000-pound
system of your vehicle to provide the (2268 kilogram) trailer weight and a
best performance on different road 500-pound (227 kilogram) tongue weight
conditions. capacity.
• Your vehicle's brake system and the
If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ball
trailer brake system work
position, you must install a frame-mounted
independently of each other. Changing
trailer hitch.
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your Before Towing a Trailer
vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not. Practice turning, stopping and backing up
• When you switch the engine off, the to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
controller output is disabled and the combination before starting on a trip.
display and module shut down. The When turning, make wider turns so the
controller module and display turn on trailer wheels clear curbs and other
when you switch the ignition on. obstacles.
• The trailer brake controller is only a When Towing a Trailer
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for • Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
warranty or performance of the km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
controller due to misuse or customer kilometers).
installation. • Do not make full-throttle starts.
Trailer Lamps • Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
WARNING after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this • When stopped in congested or heavy
may damage the electrical system traffic during hot weather, place the
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized gearshift in position P to aid engine and
dealer as soon as possible for assistance transmission cooling and to help A/C
in proper trailer tow wiring installation. performance.
Additional electrical equipment may be • Turn off the speed control with heavy
required. loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
266

Towing
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down Your vehicle may be equipped with a
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the temporary or conventional spare tire. A
brakes continuously, as they may "temporary" spare tire is different in size
overheat and become less effective. (diameter or width), tread-type
• If your transmission is equipped with a (All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use different manufacturer than the road tires
this feature when towing. This provides on your vehicle. Consult information on the
engine braking and helps eliminate tire label or Safety Compliance label for
excessive transmission shifting for limitations when using.
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
may turn on during typical cornering before backing the trailer into the water.
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer. Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
This is normal. Turning the corner at a after removing the trailer from the water.
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency. When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the • Do not allow the static water level to
gross combined weight rating (or any rise above the bottom edge of the rear
combination of these factors), consider bumper.
refilling your rear axle with synthetic • Do not allow waves to break higher
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
filled with it). See Capacities and the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Specifications (page 361).
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
• Allow more distance for stopping with enter vehicle components:
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually. • Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade: • Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow. Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake. Water may have contaminated the rear
3. Place the automatic transmission in axle lubricant, which is not normally
position P. checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
267

Towing
TOWING POINTS • Use a damper device such as a tarp,

heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
WARNINGS
absorb the energy in the event the
Using recovery hooks is dangerous strap breaks.
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery • Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
safety practices. Improper use of recovery loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
hooks may cause hook failure or separation weight rating specified on the
from the vehicle and could result in serious certification label.
injury or death. • Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
Always slowly remove the slack from
degrees).
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce • Keep bystanders to the sides of the
significantly higher loads which can cause vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the recovery hooks to break off, or the the length of the recovery strap. This
recovery strap to fail which can cause helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
serious injury or death. recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
Never link two straps together with
a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with

frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
268

Towing
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE It is acceptable to have your two-wheel

drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON

FOUR WHEELS
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
E143886 and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, • Your vehicle is facing forward for
if you are a member of a roadside towing in a forward direction.
assistance program, your roadside • Place the transmission in position N. If
assistance service provider. you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
Transmission (page 174).
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
Motor Company has not approved a • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or Recreational Towing
by any other means.
Note: Put your climate control system in
Ford Motor Company produces a towing recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
manual for all authorized tow truck fumes from entering your vehicle. See
operators. Have your tow truck operator Climate Control (page 131).
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
269

Towing
Follow these guidelines if you have a need Note: If completed successfully, the
for recreational towing, such as towing information display shows NEUTRAL TOW
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We LEAVE IN N or NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED
designed these guidelines to prevent LEAVE TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL.
damage to your transmission. This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
tow with all wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
Note: If you do not see the message in the
You cannot tow a two-wheel drive vehicle display, you must perform the procedure
with any wheels on the ground as vehicle again from the beginning.
or transmission damage may occur. You Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
must tow your vehicle with all four wheels transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
off the ground, such as when using a This is normal.
car-hauling trailer.
6. Leave the transmission in position N
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles and turn the ignition as far as it will go
toward the off position (it will not turn
You can only tow a four-wheel drive fully off when the transmission is in
vehicle with all wheels on the ground by position N). If your vehicle has an
placing the transfer case in its neutral ignition key, you must leave the key in
position and engaging the the ignition while towing. To lock and
four-wheel-down towing feature. Perform unlock your vehicle, use the keyless
the steps outlined in the following section entry keypad or extra set of keys. If your
after positioning your vehicle behind the vehicle has intelligent access, press the
tow vehicle and properly securing them engine START/STOP button once
together. without pressing the brake pedal. You
Note: Make sure you properly secure your do not need to leave your keys in the
vehicle to the tow vehicle. vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
vehicle as you normally do.
Four-wheel-down Towing
7. Release the brake pedal.
1. Put the ignition in the on position, but
WARNINGS
do not start the engine. If your vehicle
has an ignition key, turn the key to on. Do not disconnect the battery during
If your vehicle has intelligent access, recreational towing. Doing so will
press the engine START/STOP button prevent the transfer case from
once without pressing the brake pedal. shifting properly and may cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is in P
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. (Park).
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to
Shifting the transfer case to its
2H.
neutral position for recreational
4. Shift the transmission to position N. towing may cause the vehicle to be
5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch able to roll even if the transmission is in P
from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five (Park). The driver or others could be
times within seven seconds. injured. Make sure the foot brake is
depressed and the vehicle is in a secure
and safe position while the transfer case
is being shifted to its neutral position.
270

Towing
WARNINGS 6. Release the parking brake, start the

Failing to put the transfer case in its engine, and shift the transmission to
neutral position will damage vehicle position D to make sure the transfer
components. case is out of position N.
7. If the transfer case does not
Note: You can check four-wheel-down successfully shift out of position N, set
towing status at any time by opening the the parking brake until you can have
driver's door or turning the ignition to the your vehicle serviced.
accessory or on position and verifying the Resolving the SHIFT DELAY PULL
NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED message FORWARD Message
displays in the cluster.
If the instrument cluster displays SHIFT
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return DELAY PULL FORWARD perform the
the transfer case to its 2H position: following:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in
the on position, but do not start the 2. Put the transmission into position N,
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition and then start the engine.
key, turn the key to on. If your vehicle 3. With the engine running, shift the
has intelligent access, press the engine transmission to position D and let the
START/STOP button once without vehicle roll forward, up to 3 feet (1
pressing the brake pedal. meter). You may hear an audible noise
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. as the transfer case shifts out of its
neutral position. This is normal.
3. Shift the transmission out of N and into
any gear. 4. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 4X2, and
NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
Note: If SHIFT DELAY PULL FORWARD
displays in the instrument cluster, transfer
case gear tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake, and then
disconnect the vehicle from the tow
vehicle.
271

Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel

economy:
You need to break in new tires for • Sudden accelerations or hard
approximately 300 miles (480 accelerations.
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle • Revving the engine before turning it off.
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics. • Idle for periods longer than one minute.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 • Warm up your vehicle on cold
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed mornings.
frequently and change up through the • Use the air conditioner or front
gears early. Do not labor the engine. defroster.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles • Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
(1600 kilometers). • Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING • Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
Your fuel economy is affected by several • Carry unnecessary weight
things, such as how you drive, the (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
conditions you drive under, and how you lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
maintain your vehicle. weight carried).
You may improve your fuel economy by • Driving with the wheels out of
keeping these things in mind: alignment.
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, Conditions
moderate fashion. • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
• Drive at steady speeds without trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
stopping. speed.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may • Adding certain accessories to your
eliminate the need to stop. vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
• Combine errands and minimize rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
stop-and-go driving. racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling equipped).
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 • Using fuel blended with alcohol may
km/h]). lower fuel economy.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use • Fuel economy may decrease with lower
only the recommended size. temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
• Perform all regularly scheduled fuel economy as compared to driving
maintenance. on hilly terrain.
272

Driving Hints
• Transmissions give their best fuel • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
economy when operated in the top brakes and to check that they work.
cruise gear and with steady pressure • Check that the horn works.
on the gas pedal.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than • Turn the steering wheel to check that
two-wheel-drive operation. the steering power assist works.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving. FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Always use floor mats that are
WARNING designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
Do not drive through flowing or deep leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
water as you may lose control of your use floor mats that are firmly secured to
vehicle. retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
Note: Driving through standing water can or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
cause vehicle damage. other ways.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water Pedals that cannot move freely can
enters the air filter. cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
Before driving through standing water, injury.
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel Always make sure that the floor
hubs. mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
E176913
covering on top of already installed
When driving through standing water, drive floor mats. Floor mats should always
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
Your brake performance and traction may not another floor mat or other covering.
be limited. After driving through water and Additional floor mats or any other covering
as soon as it is safe to do so: will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
273

Driving Hints
WARNINGS Do not use F-150 vehicles equipped with

Check attachment of floor mats on the 2.7L or 3.5L engines for snowplowing.
a regular basis. Always properly Installing the Snowplow
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
replacement. and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Always make sure that objects Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
cannot fall into the driver foot well snowplow section, found at
while the vehicle is moving. Objects www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas.
that are loose can become trapped under A typical installation affects the following:
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Certification to government safety laws
Failure to properly follow floor mat such as occupant protection and airbag
installation or attachment deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
instructions can potentially cause for an Alterer’s Label on your vehicle
interference with pedal operation causing from the snowplow installer certifying
a loss of vehicle control. that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
• The Front Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) is on the upper left side of the
vehicle’s Safety Compliance
Certification Label. This is the total
weight that front axle supports, which
includes the vehicle weight plus any
auxiliary equipment such as snowplow
frame-mounted hardware that can be
added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford
compliance certification to FMVSS. Do
not exceed FGAWR or Gross Vehicle
E142666 Weight Rating (GVWR).
To install floor mats, position the floor mat • Rear ballast weight behind the rear
so that the eyelet is over the retention post axle may be required to prevent
and press down to lock in. exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
front-to-rear weight balance for proper
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
braking and steering.
installation procedure.
• Front wheel toe may require
re-adjustment to prevent premature
SNOWPLOWING uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
the Ford Workshop Manual.
We recommend the four-wheel drive F-150
in XL, XLT or Lariat trim levels with the 5.0L • Headlight aim may require adjustment.
engine and snowplow option for residential
snowplowing only. We do not recommend
the F-150 with the automatic four-wheel
drive system for snowplowing.
274

Driving Hints
• The tire air pressures recommended Note: The electrical system is designed to
for general driving are on the vehicle’s support the addition of a residential
Safety Certification Label. The snowplow (up to 60 Amps continuous) and
maximum cold inflation pressure for snowplow lights (up to 20 Amps
the tire and associated load rating are continuous) using snowplow mode. The
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure system is not designed to support snowplow
may require re-adjustment within these usage with additional electrical aftermarket
pressure limits to accommodate the accessories.
additional weight of the snowplow
installation. Operating the Vehicle with the
• Federal and some local regulations Snowplow Attached
require additional exterior lamps for Note: Drive the vehicle at least 500 miles
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Contact (800 kilometers) before using your vehicle
an authorized dealer for additional for snow removal.
information.
We recommend vehicle speed does not
Snowplow Mode (If Equipped) exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when
snowplowing.
Press the snowplow button on the
The attached snowplow blade restricts
instrument panel to switch on snowplow
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the
mode. The button illuminates when in
engine to run at a higher temperature.
snowplow mode. A message appears in
Attention to engine temperature is
the information display indicating that
especially important when outside
features are turned off when in snowplow
temperatures are above freezing. Angle
mode.
the blade to maximize airflow to the
The following features are disabled when radiator and monitor engine temperature
in snowplow mode: to determine whether a left or right angle
• 110V inverter. provides the best performance.
• Fog lamps. Follow the severe duty schedule in your
Scheduled Maintenance information for
engine oil and transmission fluid change
• Heated front and rear seats. intervals.
• Massaging seats.
Snowplowing with your Airbag
The body module also activates the Equipped Vehicle
snowplow relay that provides power to
aftermarket snowplow controls. WARNINGS
Switch off snowplow mode by pressing Do not attempt to service, repair, or
the snowplow button or switching off the modify the airbag supplemental
ignition. The snowplow button is no longer restraint system (SRS) or its fuses.
illuminated and features are turned on. Contact a Ford or Lincoln dealer.
275

Driving Hints
WARNINGS • If you are driving more than 15 mi

Additional equipment such as (24 km) at temperatures above
snowplow equipment may affect the freezing, angle the plow blade either
performance of the airbag sensors full left or full right to provide
increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to maximum airflow to the radiator.
the Body Builders Layout Book for • If you are driving less than 15 mi
instructions about the appropriate (24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
installation of additional equipment. (72 km/h) in cold weather, you do not
need to worry about blade position to
All occupants of the vehicle,
provide maximum airflow.
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even Transmission Operation while
when provided with an airbag Plowing
supplemental restraint system (SRS).
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and Do not spin the wheels at over 35
passenger airbag supplemental restraint mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
system. The supplemental restraint system and injure a passenger or bystander.
activates in certain frontal and offset
frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration. • Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)
when plowing in small areas at speeds
Careless or high speed driving while below 5.0 mph (8 km/h).
snowplowing, which results in significant
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)
vehicle decelerations, can deploy the
when plowing larger areas or light snow
airbag. Such driving also increases the risk
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
of accidents.
(24 km/h).
Never remove or defeat the tripping • Do not shift the transmission from a
mechanisms designed into the snow forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
removal equipment by its manufacturer. engine is at idle and the wheels have
Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle stopped.
and the snow removal equipment as well
as possible airbag deployment. Outside Air Temperature While
Plowing
Engine Temperature while Plowing
While plowing with your vehicle, the plow
Your engine may run at a higher blade can block the sensor airflow and
temperature than normal because the cause the outside air temperature reading
attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to be inaccurate.
to the radiator:
A Ford wiring kit is available to relocate the
Outside Air Temperature sensor to the
plow blade frame to provide more
accurate outside air temperature readings.
Contact an authorized dealer for more
information.
276

Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE authorized dealer. If a member

requests a tow to an authorized dealer
Vehicles Sold in the United States: that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
Getting Roadside Assistance the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
To fully assist you should you have a costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
offers a complimentary roadside for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
assistance program. This program is vehicle requires service at the nearest
separate from the New Vehicle Limited authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
Warranty. The service is available: operational but the trailer is not, then the
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week. trailer does not qualify for any roadside
• For the coverage period listed on the services.
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance covers:
Complete the roadside assistance
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if identification card and place it in your
provided with the vehicle (except wallet for quick reference. This card is in
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation the owner's information portfolio in the
kit). glove compartment.
• Battery jump start.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement require Roadside Assistance, call
cost is the customer's responsibility). 1-800-241-3673.
• Fuel delivery — independent service If you need to arrange roadside assistance
contractors, if not prohibited by state, for yourself, Ford Motor Company
local or municipal law, shall deliver up reimburses a reasonable amount for
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal towing to the nearest dealership within
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel information, United States Ford vehicle
delivery service to two no-charge customers call 1-800-241-3673.
occurrences within a 12-month period. Customers need to submit their original
• Winch out — available within 100 ft receipts.
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
• Towing — independent service Roadside Assistance
contractors, if not prohibited by state, Canadian customers who require roadside
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
disablement location or to the nearest Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete
the roadside assistance identification card
found in the centerfold of your warranty
guide and retain for future reference.
277

Canadian roadside coverage and benefits HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you
require more information, please refer to Note: The hazard warning flashers will
the coverage section of your warranty operate when the ignition is in any position
guide, call us in Canada at or if the key is not in the ignition. If used
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at when the engine is not running, the battery
www.ford.ca. will lose charge. As a result, there may be
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation insufficient power to restart your engine.
administers the Roadside Assistance The hazard flasher control is
program. You must receive covered located on the instrument panel
services in Canada or the continental E142663
by the radio. Use it when your
United States. Coverage extends to vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety
vehicles that use public, non-seasonal, hazard for other motorists.
annually traveled roadways. Roadside
Assistance coverage does not extend to • Press the flasher control and all front
vehicles involved in cross-country driving, and rear direction indicators flash.
logging, autocross and any other form of • Press the flasher control again to turn
off-road use. Well maintained roads and them off.
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
supplier, and allow their representatives
to perform service as per the standard FUEL SHUTOFF
operating procedures.
WARNING
In Remote Locations
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by repair fuel leaks after a collision may
road to the nearest authorized dealership, increase the risk of fire and serious
transportation by rail or water may be injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
necessary. The program covers a tow to that the fuel system be inspected by an
the dock or rail terminal and also to the authorized dealer after any collision.
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however, In the event of a moderate to severe
contact your authorized dealer to confirm collision, this vehicle is equipped with a
if you are eligible for additional coverage fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the
before you authorize or pay for the service. flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact
Call Ford Roadside Assistance at will cause a shut-off.
1-800-665-2006 for additional Should your vehicle shut off after a
information. collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
278

For vehicles equipped with a push button WARNINGS

start system: Keep batteries out of reach of
1. Press the START/STOP button to children. Batteries contain sulfuric
switch off the ignition. acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
2. Press the brake pedal and press the clothing. Shield your eyes when working
START/STOP button to switch on the near the battery to protect against possible
ignition. splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal immediately with water for a minimum of
and press the START/STOP button 15 minutes and get prompt medical
to switch off the ignition. attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
4. You can either attempt to start the physician immediately.
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch Use only adequately sized cables
on the ignition only by pressing the with insulated clamps.
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways Preparing Your Vehicle
re-enable the fuel system.
Do not attempt to push-start your
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle automatic transmission vehicle.
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart. Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
Once your vehicle determines that the with an automatic transmission may cause
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow transmission damage.
you to restart. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
Note: In the event that your vehicle does vehicle.
not restart after your third attempt, contact Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
an authorized dealer. disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
WARNINGS two vehicles do not touch.
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal Connecting the Jumper Cables
injury. Therefore, do not allow
WARNINGS
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
the battery, always shield your face and engine rocker covers, the intake
protect your eyes. Always provide correct manifold or electrical components
ventilation. as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
279

WARNINGS 2. Connect the other end of the positive

Do not attach the end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet of the booster vehicle battery.
located above the positive (+) 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High negative (-) terminal of the booster
current may flow through and cause vehicle battery.
damage to the fuses. 4. Make the final connection of the
Do not connect the end of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
second cable to the negative (-) part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
terminal of the battery to be jumped. away from the battery and the fuel
A spark may cause an explosion of the injection system, or connect the
gases that surround the battery. negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle Jump Starting
represents the booster vehicle.
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
1 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables

3 4 Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
2
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable

to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
280

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicators
4 and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
1 • Your vehicle runs out of power.
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable

from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
281

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU

NEED Website
www.owner.ford.com
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle These are some of the items that can be
line will provide warranty service, we found online:
recommend you return to your selling • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
authorized dealer who wants to ensure City/State or Zip Code.
your continued satisfaction. • Owner Manuals.
Please note that certain warranty repairs • Maintenance Schedules.
require special training and equipment, so
• Recalls.
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means • Ford Extended Service Plans.
that, depending on the warranty repair • Ford Genuine Accessories.
needed, you may have to take your vehicle • Service specials and promotions.
to another authorized dealer.
In Canada:
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle Mailing address
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be Customer Relationship Centre
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
remanufactured or other parts that are P.O. Box 2000
authorized by Ford. Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Away From Home Telephone
If you are away from home when your 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the Website
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer. www.ford.ca
In the United States:
Twitter
Mailing address
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
Ford Motor Company @FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248 Additional Assistance
Dearborn, MI 48126
If you have questions or concerns, or are
Telephone unsatisfied with the service you are
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) receiving, follow these steps:
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or
1-800-232-5952) Service Advisor at your selling or
Additional information and resources are servicing authorized dealer.
available online:
282

Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
Manager. requires that, if a manufacturer or its
3. If you require assistance or clarification representative is unable to repair a motor
on Ford Motor Company policies, vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
please contact the Ford Customer applicable express warranty after a
Relationship Center. reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
In order to help us serve you better, please
replace the vehicle with one substantially
have the following information available
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
when contacting a Customer Relationship
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
Center:
the actual price paid or payable by the
• Vehicle Identification Number. consumer (less a reasonable allowance
• Your telephone number (home and for consumer use). The consumer has the
business). right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading. presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
In some states within the United States, conform the vehicle to its applicable
you must directly notify Ford in writing express warranties if, within the first 18
before pursuing remedies under your months of ownership of a new vehicle or
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
allowed a final repair attempt. whichever occurs first:
Additionally, in some states within the 1. Two or more repair attempts are made
United States, a consumer has the option on the same non-conformity likely to
of submitting a warranty dispute to the cause death or serious bodily injury OR
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
on the same nonconformity (a defect
the extent allowed by state law, before
or condition that substantially impairs
pursuing replacement or repurchase
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
remedies provided by certain state laws.
OR
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
rights or other rights which are independent of nonconformities for a total of more
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
state replacement or repurchase laws. all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
283

Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting program are usually decided within forty
in court any rights or remedies conferred days after you file your claim with the BBB.
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are not bound by the decision, and
You are also required to use BBB AUTO may reject the decision and proceed to
LINE before exercising rights or seeking court where all findings of the BBB Auto
remedies created by the Federal Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. in the court action. Should you choose to
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
redress by pursuing rights and remedies is then bound by the decision, and must
not created by California Civil Code Section comply with the decision within 30 days
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss of receipt of your acceptance letter.
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
not required by those statutes.
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
THE BETTER BUSINESS You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE new vehicle, information about your
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a will need to be completed, signed and
warranty concern has not been resolved returned to the BBB along with proof of
using the three-step procedure outlined ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the review the claim for eligibility under the
Services you need section, you may be Program Summary Guidelines.
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program. You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the BBB AUTO LINE
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Company to explore options for settlement Arlington, Virginia 22201
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
during mediation or you do not want to requested by calling the Ford Motor
participate in mediation, and if your claim Company Customer Relationship Center
is eligible, you may participate in the at 1-800-392-3673.
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
will be scheduled so that you can present
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
your case in an informal setting before an
procedures, or to discontinue this process
impartial person. The arbitrator will
at any time without notice and without
consider the testimony provided and make
obligation.
a decision after the hearing.
284

Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE GETTING ASSISTANCE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
Canadian dealers. In those cases where country, contact the appropriate foreign
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford embassy or consulate. These officials can
of Canada and the authorized dealer to inform you of local vehicle registration
resolve a factory-related vehicle service regulations and where to find unleaded
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of fuel.
Canada participates in an impartial third
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
party mediation/arbitration program
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
administered by the Canadian Motor
than is recommended for your vehicle,
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
without proper conversion may damage
a disagreement when all other efforts to
the effectiveness of your emission control
produce a settlement have failed. This
system and may cause engine knocking or
procedure is without cost to you and is
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
Company or Ford of Canada is not
and expensive legal proceedings.
responsible for any damage caused by use
In the CAMVAP program, impartial of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at also result in difficulty importing your
mutually convenient times and places in vehicle back into the United States.
an informal environment. These impartial
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
arbitrators review the positions of the
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
parties, make decisions and, when
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
appropriate, render awards to resolve
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
contact:
CAMVAP services are available in all
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
1555 Fairlane Drive
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Fairlane Business Park #3
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
or visit www.camvap.ca.
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
285

Customer Assistance
For customers in Guam, the If you buy your vehicle in North America
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana and then relocate to any of the above
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the locations, register your vehicle
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call identification number (VIN) and new
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD address with Ford Motor Company Export
(3673). Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing [email protected].
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the authorized dealer cannot help you, the event your inquiry is unresolved,
contact: communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
1555 Fairlane Drive
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
previously listed.
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673) Customers in the U.S. should call
FAX: (313) 390-0804 1-800-392-3673.
www.ford.com.pr
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
OWNER'S LITERATURE
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
To order the publications in this portfolio,
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
contact:
HELM, INCORPORATED
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
1555 Fairlane Drive
Attention: Customer Service
Allen Park, Michigan 48101 Or to order a free publication catalog, call
U.S.A. toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Ford: 80004443673 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Lincoln: 80004441067
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
by their website:
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673 www.helminc.com
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384 (Items in this catalog may be purchased
FAX: +971 4 3327266 by credit card, check or money order.)
www.me.ford.com
286

Customer Assistance
Obtaining a French Owner’s To contact NHTSA, you may call

Manual the Vehicle Safety Hotline
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
from your authorized dealer or by 1-800-424-9153); go to
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the http://www.safercar.gov; or write
contact information listed previously in this to:
section.
Administrator
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
(U.S. ONLY) Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
E142557 safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
death, you should immediately (CANADA ONLY)
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration If you believe that your vehicle has
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying a defect which could cause a
Ford Motor Company. crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an inform Transport Canada and
investigation, and if it finds that a Ford of Canada.
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
287

Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-
index-76.htm (English)
Website www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-
index-76.htm (French)
Phone 1–800–333–0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1–800–565-3673
288

Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART The power distribution box is located in

the engine compartment. It has
Power Distribution Box high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
WARNINGS overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before If you disconnect and reconnect the
servicing high current fuses. battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
To reduce risk of electrical shock, (page 309).
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
E176315
Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components
1 — Not used.
2 — Not used.
3 — Not used.
289

Fuses
4 — Telescoping side-view mirror.

5 40A* Rear window defroster.
6 — Not used.
7 — Not used.
8 — Telescoping side-view mirror.
9 — Not used.
10 — Not used.
11 60A* Automatic brake system motor.
12 50A* Body control module 1.
13 60A* Body control module 2.
14 20A** Amplifier.
15 25A** 4x4.
16 10A** Spot light module.
17 15A** Heated seat.
18 10A** Steering-column lock.
19 10A** Power seats.
20 15A** Snow plow.
Rear heated seats.
21A — Not used.
21B — Not used.
22 30A* Windshield wiper motor.
23 15A* Rain sensor.
24 25A* Series fan feed.
25 — Not used.
26 30A* Driver seat motors.
27 30A* Passenger power seat.
28 30A* Climate controlled seat.
290

Fuses
29 — Not used.
30 — Air conditioner clutch relay.
31 — Not used.
32 — Not used.
33 50A* Electric fan 3.
34 25A* Trailer tow park lamps.
35 20A* Trailer tow stop-turn relay fuse.
36 25A* Trailer tow lamps module.
37 50A* Electric fan 1.
38 10A** Alt A sensor.
39 10A** Integrated wheel end solenoid.
40 15A** E-locker.
41 10A** Telescoping mirror.
42 30A** Transmission fluid pump.
43 25A** Horn.
44 10A** Air conditioner clutch.
45 10A** Powertrain control module relay coil.
46 10A** Wiper relay coil.
47 — Not used.
48 — Not used.
49 30A* Trailer brake control module.
50 30A* Power running boards.
51 — Fuel pump relay.
52 — Not used.
53 — Not used.
54 30A* Voltage quality module.
Body-control-module voltage-quality-
module feed.
291

Fuses
55 40A* Body control module RP2 feed.

56 20A* Fuel pump.
57 30A* Right-hand EPB actuator.
58 30A* Left-hand EPB actuator.
59 30A* Starter.
60 40A* Blower motor.
61 30A* Brake control module.
Automatic brake system valves.
62 — Power seat relay.
63 15A** Heated mirrors.
64 — Not used.
65 — Starter relay.
66 — Powertrain control module relay.
67 — Windshield wiper relay.
68 — Blower motor relay.
69 — Power sliding back window relay.
70 — Electric fan 1 relay.
71 — Not used.
72 25A* 4x4.
73 — Not used.
74 30A* PDRG motor.
75 — Horn relay.
76 — Not used.
77 — Steering column lock relay.
78 — Not used.
79 — Trailer tow parking lamp relay.
80 — Rear window defroster relay.
292

Fuses
81 — Not used.
82 — PDRG close relay.
83 — Not used.
84 — Not used.
85 — Not used.
86 — Not used.
87 10A* Trailer tow backup lamps.
88 — Not used.
89 20A** Cigar lighter power point 1.
90 20A** Power point 2.
93 25A** GTDI vehicle power 1.
10A** PFI vehicle power 1.
94 — Not used.
95 25A** Vehicle power 2.
96 — Not used.
97 10A** Vehicle power 3.
98 — Not used.
99 20A** Vehicle power 4 (PFI).
15A** Vehicle power 4 (GTDI).
100 — Not used.
101 — Not used.
102 — Snow plow relay.
103 — Not used.
104 — Electic fan 3 relay.
105 10A** Power steering.
293

Fuses
106 — Not used.

107 10A** Anti-lock brakes.
108 — Not used.
109 10A** Powertrain control module.
110 10A** 4x4 run/start.
Adaptive cruise control.
111 10A** Transmission pump run-start.
112 — Not used.
113 7.5A** Blind spot information system.
Rear view camera.
Front view camera.
Voltage quality module.
114 — Electric fan 2 relay.
115 — Not used.
116 — Not used.
*Cartridge fuses
**Mini fuses
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in

Passenger Compartment Fuse the tabs on both sides of the cover, and
Panel then pull it off.
The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the
the passenger footwell behind a trim panel. top part of the cover on the fuse panel and
push the bottom part until it latches.
To remove the trim panel, pull it toward Gently pull on the cover to make sure it has
you and swing it away from the side. To latched properly.
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves
on the panel, and then push it shut.
294

Fuses
E145984
1 10A Demand lamp relay.

Power seats relay.
Glove box.
Vanity lamps.
Overhead console.
Dome.
Courtesy.
Map lamps.
2 7.5A Memory module logic.
Memory seat switches.
Lumbar motor.
3 20A Driver door lock motor.
4 5A Trailer brake control.
5 20A Not used.
6 10A Not used.
7 10A Not used.
8 10A Not used.
9 10A Not used.
295

Fuses
10 5A Not used (spare).

11 5A Combined sensor module.
12 7.5A Climate head module.
Smart datalink converter.
13 7.5A Cluster.
SCCM.
14 10A Brake.
15 10A Smart datalink converter.
16 15A Tailgate release.
17 5A HUD.
18 5A Ignition switch and passive-entry passive-
start start stop switch.
Key inhibit solenoid.
19 7.5A Tow haul (O/D) cancel for floor or column
shifter.
20 7.5A Not used.
21 5A HUD.
In car temperature with humidity sensor.
22 5A EPB.
Power seat.
23 10A PDRG switch.
Inverter.
Driver side window.
Moonroof.
24 20A Central lock/unlock.
25 30A Driver door control module.
26 30A Passenger door control module.
27 30A Vista roof.
Moonroof.
28 20A Not used.
29 30A Not used.
296

Fuses
30 30A Not used.

31 15A Adjustable pedal switch and motor.
32 10A Multi-function display.
Global position system.
Sync 1.
Sync 2.
Radio frequency receiver.
33 20A Radio.
34 30A Run-start relay.
35 5A Restraints module.
36 15A 360 camera module.
Heated steering wheel module.
Rear-view mirror.
Rear heated seats.
37 15A Power distribution box run-start relay.
38 30A Circuit breaker. Rear window switches and motors.
A fuse may fail if electrical components in

the vehicle are not properly working. A
CHANGING A FUSE broken wire inside the fuse indicates a
failed fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
Fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with
one that has the specified amperage
rating. If you use a fuse with a higher
amperage rating, you may cause severe
wire damage and may start a fire.
E142430
297

Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Working with the Engine On
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help WARNING

maintain its roadworthiness and resale To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
value. There is a large network of and/or personal burn injuries, do not
authorized dealers that are there to help start your engine with the air cleaner
you with their professional servicing removed and do not remove it while the
expertise. We believe that their specially engine is running.
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
They are supported by a wide range of
(P).
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle. 2. Block the wheels.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the OPENING AND CLOSING THE
necessary parts and service. Check your HOOD
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered. 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, handle located under the left hand side
fluids and service parts conforming to of the instrument panel.
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation. E166491
• Keep all open flames and other burning 2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
material (such as cigarettes) away locate the secondary release lever
from the battery and all fuel related under the front of the hood near the
parts. center of your vehicle.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
298

Maintenance
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders

hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.
E190266
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™

2.7L EcoBoost
E176046
299

Maintenance
A. Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 289).

B. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 309).
C. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 303).
D. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 303).
E. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 309).
F. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 320).
G. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 304).
H. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 309).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
A B C D E F
H G
A
E166496
A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 309).
300

Maintenance

F. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 304).
G. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 320).
H. Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 289).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L
E176214
A. Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 289).

F. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 320).
301

Maintenance
G. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 304).

H. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 309).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L
A B
A C
A D
A E A
A F
E166494 H
A G
A
A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 309).
F. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 304).
G. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 320).
H. Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 289).
302

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK 6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the

dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the lower
and upper holes, the oil level is
A B acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower
hole, add enough oil to raise the
level within the lower and upper
holes.
• Oil levels above the upper hole may
cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine
by an authorized dealer.
E161560
7. Put the oil level dipstick back into the
oil dipstick tube and ensure it is fully
A MIN seated.
B MAX
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
ENGINE OIL CHECK the engine is running.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level Note: Do not remove the engine oil level
ground. dipstick when the engine is running.
2. Switch the engine off and wait 15 Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
pan. cause engine damage.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the
gearshift is in park (P).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from
engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine
oil level dipstick. See Under Hood
Overview (page 301).
E142732
303

Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines WARNINGS

by the American Petroleum Institute (API). To reduce the risk of personal injury,
An oil with this trademark symbol make sure the engine is cool before
conforms to the current engine and unscrewing the coolant pressure
emission system protection standards and relief cap. The cooling system is under
fuel economy requirements of the pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
International Lubricants Specification out forcefully when you loosen the cap
Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of slightly.
U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers. Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that Checking the Engine Coolant
meets Ford specifications. See When the engine is cold, check the
Capacities and Specifications (page concentration and level of the engine
361). coolant at the intervals listed in the
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and scheduled maintenance information. See
use a funnel to pour the engine oil into Scheduled Maintenance (page 501).
the opening.
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
4. Wipe off any spilled oil. between the MIN and MAX marks on the
5. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure coolant reservoir.
the oil level is not above the normal Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
operating range on the engine oil level level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
dipstick.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
6. Install the engine oil level dipstick and
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
ensure it is fully seated.
immediately.
7. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by
turning the filler cap clockwise until Maintain coolant concentration within
three clicks are heard or until the cap 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
is fully seated. point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant
WARNINGS and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do
Do not add engine coolant when the not recommend the use of hydrometers or
engine is hot. Steam and scalding coolant test strips for measuring coolant
liquids released from a hot cooling concentrations.
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling Note: Automotive fluids are not
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
Do not put engine coolant in the antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
windshield washer fluid container. If of its specified function and vehicle location.
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
304

Maintenance
Adding Engine Coolant • Brine.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling • Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
system sealants or additives as they can or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
cause damage to the engine cooling or Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
heating systems. Your warranty may not damage from overheating or freezing.
cover these damages.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the the coolant. These can be harmful and
coolant may change color from orange to compromise the corrosion protection of
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is the engine coolant.
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
When adding coolant:
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained, 1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to will escape as you unscrew the cap.
be replaced. 2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
Do not mix different colors or types of the correct specification. See
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine Capacities and Specifications (page
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling 361).
system. Use prediluted engine coolant 3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
meeting the correct specification. See reservoir the next few times you drive
Capacities and Specifications (page your vehicle.
361). The use of an incorrect coolant may
harm the engine or cooling system 4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
components and may not be covered by engine coolant to bring the coolant
the vehicle Warranty. level to the proper level.
In case of emergency, you can add a large Recycled Engine Coolant

amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location. We do not recommend the use of recycled
In this instance, qualified personnel: engine coolant as an approved recycling
process is not yet available.
1. Must drain the cooling system.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
2. Chemically clean the cooling system of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
with Motorcraft Premium Cooling community’s regulations and standards
System Flush. for recycling and disposing of automotive
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as fluids.
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
305

Maintenance
Severe Climates the service engine soon indicator

will illuminate.
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
If the engine reaches a preset
• It may be necessary to have an over-temperature condition, the engine
authorized dealer increase the coolant automatically switches to alternating
concentration above 50%. cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
• A coolant concentration of 60% acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
provides improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant When this occurs, your vehicle will still
concentrations above 60% decrease operate. However:
the overheat protection characteristics • The engine power will be limited.
of the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage. • This will disable the air conditioning
system.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
Continued operation increases the engine
• It may be necessary to have an temperature, causing the engine to
authorized dealer decrease the coolant completely shut down. Your steering and
concentration to 40%. braking effort increases in this situation.
• A coolant concentration of 40% When the engine temperature cools, you
provides improved overheat protection. can re-start your engine. Take your vehicle
Engine coolant concentrations below to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
40% decrease the freeze and corrosion to minimize engine damage.
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme WARNINGS
climates should use prediluted engine Fail-safe mode is for use during
coolant for optimum cooling system and emergencies only. Operate your
engine protection. vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
What You Should Know About Fail- in a safe location and seek immediate
Safe Cooling repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
If you deplete the engine coolant supply, able to maintain high-speed operation, and
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily may completely shut down without
drive your vehicle before you incur warning, potentially losing engine power,
incremental component damage. The power steering assist, and power brake
fail-safe distance depends on ambient assist, which may increase the possibility
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. of a crash resulting in serious injury.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red (hot) area and:
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
306

Maintenance
You have limited engine power when in the At this time, you may notice your engine
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with coolant temperature gauge needle move
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
high-speed operation and the engine will TO LOWER TEMP message may appear
operate poorly. in the information display.
Remember that the engine is capable of You may notice a reduction in vehicle
automatically shutting down to prevent speed caused by reduced engine power.
engine damage. In this situation: In order to manage the engine fluid
temperatures, your vehicle may enter this
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
mode if certain high-temperature and
possible and switch off the engine.
high-load conditions take place. The
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized amount of speed reduction depends on
dealer. many factors such as vehicle loading,
3. If this is not possible, wait a short towing, grade and ambient temperature.
period for the engine to cool. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off
the road. You can continue to drive your
4. Check the coolant level and add if low. vehicle while this message is active.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
off during severe operating conditions to
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair protect overheating of the engine. When
increases the chance of engine damage. the engine coolant temperature decreases
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as to a normal operating temperature, the air
possible. conditioning will turn on once again.
Engine Fluid Temperature If the engine coolant temperature gauge
Management (If Equipped) moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
WARNINGS engine soon messages appear in your
To reduce the risk of crash and injury, information display:
be prepared that the vehicle speed 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
may reduce and the vehicle may not possible and shift the transmission into
be able to accelerate with full power until P.
the fluid temperatures reduce.
2. Leave the engine running until the
Never remove the coolant reservoir coolant temperature gauge needle
cap while the engine is running or hot. moves away from the red (hot) area.
After several minutes, if the
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because temperature does not drop, follow the
of the added load, your vehicle’s engine remaining steps.
may temporarily reach higher 3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
temperatures during severe operating cool before checking the coolant level.
conditions such as ascending a long or 4. If the coolant level is normal, restart
steep grade while pulling a trailer in high your engine and continue.
temperatures.
307

Maintenance
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and TRANSFER CASE FLUID

restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling CHECK
Works in this chapter for more
information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 501).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission E170444
components.
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.12 in (3 mm) from
the bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler hole.
Use only fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 361).
308

Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK FUEL FILTER

Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
lines are within the normal operating range; fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
levels are outside of the normal operating is not needed.
range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
POWER STEERING FLUID Batteries normally produce explosive
CHECK gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric flames, sparks or lighted substances to
power steering (EPS) system. There is no come near the battery. When working near
fluid reservoir to check or fill. the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
WARNING excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
If you operate your vehicle in vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
washer fluid with antifreeze battery with a battery carrier or with your
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with hands on opposite corners.
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and Keep batteries out of reach of
increase the risk of injury or accident. children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is near the battery to protect against possible
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
Ford specifications. See Capacities and contact with skin or eyes, flush
Specifications (page 361). immediately with water for a minimum of
State or local regulations on volatile 15 minutes and get prompt medical
organic compounds may restrict the use attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
of methanol, a common windshield washer physician immediately.
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids Battery posts, terminals and related
containing non-methanol antifreeze accessories contain lead and lead
agents should be used only if they provide compounds. Wash hands after
cold weather protection without damaging handling.
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
309

Maintenance
WARNINGS Because your vehicle’s engine is

This vehicle may be fitted with more electronically controlled by a computer,
than one battery. Removing the some control conditions are maintained
battery cables from only one battery by power from the battery. When the
does not disconnect your vehicle electrical battery is disconnected or a new battery
system. Make sure you disconnect the is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
battery cables from all batteries when and fuel trim strategy for optimum
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
cause serious personal injury or property vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
damage. ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft To restore the settings, do the following:
maintenance-free battery which normally 1. Apply the parking brake.
does not require additional water.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
When a battery replacement is required, 3. Switch off all accessories.
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the 4. Press the brake pedal and start your
electrical requirements of the vehicle. vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the 5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery operating temperature. While the
cover or shield. engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
Note: If you add electrical accessories or System (page 383). Reset the power
components to the vehicle, it may adversely windows bounce-back feature. See
affect the low voltage battery performance Audio System (page 383). Reset the
and durability. This may also affect the radio station presets. See Audio
performance of other electrical systems in System (page 383).
the vehicle.
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the minute.
top of the battery clean and dry.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
If you see any corrosion on the battery or to completely relearn the idle trim and
terminals, remove the cables from the fuel trim strategy.
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You Note: If you do not allow the engine to
can neutralize the acid with a solution of relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
baking soda and water. idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
310

Maintenance
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries Electrical Accessory Installation
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about To make sure the battery management
recycling old batteries. system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 directly to the battery negative post. This
days without recharging the battery, we can cause inaccurate measurements of
recommend that you disconnect the the battery condition and potential
battery cables to maintain battery charge incorrect system operation.
for quick starting.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
Battery Management System (If components to the vehicle, it may adversely
Equipped)
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
The battery management system monitors other electrical systems in the vehicle.
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery CHECKING THE WIPER
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to BLADES
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Audio unit.
E142463
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
displays to alert you that battery the blade to check for roughness.
protection actions are active. These Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
messages are only for notification that an or water applied with a soft sponge or
action is taking place, and not intended to cloth.
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
CHANGING THE WIPER
cases after charging the battery with an BLADES
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
time to relearn the battery state of charge. lifting the wiper arm.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
311

Maintenance
5. Install in the reverse order.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
E165804 contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass. Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
4 A 8 feet (2.4 meters).

B Center height of lamp to ground.
C 25 feet (7.6 meters).
D Horizontal reference line.
3
Vertical Aim Adjustment
E205141
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip. wall or screen on a level surface,
3. Press the wiper blade secondary approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
locking clip. away.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
312

Maintenance
2. Measure the height from the center of

your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
E163806
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
so no light hits the wall.
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment

Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On CHANGING A BULB

the wall or screen you will observe a
light pattern with a distinct horizontal WARNING
edge toward the right. If this edge is not Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
at the horizontal reference line, you will carefully and keep out of children’s
need to adjust the beam so the edge reach. Grasp the bulb only by its
is at the same height as the horizontal plastic base and do not touch the glass.
reference line. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps
are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,

clean it with rubbing alcohol before
installing it.
313

Maintenance
Lamp Assembly Condensation

Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a thin film of
mist can form on the interior of the lens.
The thin mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or E183762
streaks present on the interior of the
lens. 3. Pull the wheel liner back towards the
tire to gain access to the bulbs.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Accessing the Halogen High Beam,

Low Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs
1. Rotate the steering wheel to the
opposite side of the bulb needing
replacement.
2. Remove two screws and one push pin
from the front of the wheel liner.
314

Maintenance
Replacing the Halogen High Beam,

Low Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs
E183763
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.

2. For the high beam and low beam bulbs,
E183500 remove the rubber cap to access the
bulbs.
A. Low beam headlamp bulb.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
B. Direction indicator bulb. assembly by turning it
C. High beam headlamp bulb. counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector.
5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
315

Maintenance
Replacing Side Marker Bulb Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs (If

Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an

authorized dealer.
Replacing LED Direction Indicator

and Side Marker Bulbs (If Equipped)
authorized dealer.
Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction

Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs
E183764
2. Open the tailgate to access the rear
2. With the hood open, locate the side lamp assemblies
marker on the top of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E187288
3. Remove the two bolts from the tail

lamp assembly. Then, carefully pull the
lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar
by releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
E163826
1. Make sure the fog lamps are off.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it from the fog lamp.
316

Maintenance
E187289 E187290
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it

A. Brake, rear and direction
counterclockwise and pulling it out of
indicator bulb.
the lamp assembly.
B. Reverse lamp bulb. 4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
1. Rotate the bulb socket 5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly. Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot
Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs (If Equipped)
Replacing LED Brake, Rear, These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
Direction Indicator and Reverse authorized dealer.
Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
authorized dealer.
Bulb
Note: The license plate bulbs are located
Replacing Cargo Lamp and High- behind the rear bumper.
mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the lamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and move the
lamp assembly away from the vehicle
to expose the bulb sockets.
E187794
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to

locate the bulb.
317

Maintenance
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

and carefully pull to remove it from the
lamp assembly. Replacement bulbs are specified in the
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror the proper lamp performance, light
Direction Indicator Lamp Bulbs brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
authorized dealer. warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Front direction indicator and parking lamps. 7444NA 21/5W

Daytime running lamps. LED LED
Headlamp high beam. 9005 65W
Headlamp low beam. H11 55W
Front fog lamps. 9140 55W
Front side marker lamps. W5W 5W
Side direction indicator. LED LED
Puddle lamp. LED LED
Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator 3157 27/8W
*
and rear side marker lamps.
Central high mounted brake lamp.

* 921 16W
Central high mounted brake lamp. Vehicles with LED LED

cargo box.
Reversing lamps. 3156K 27W
License plate lamp. 168 5W
*
May have optional LED lamps.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
318

Maintenance
Interior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Glove compartment lamp. LED LED

Map lamp. LED LED
Rear dome and courtesy lamps. LED LED
Rear cargo box lamps. LED LED
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
319

Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter

element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not
allow foreign material to enter the air
induction system. The engine is susceptible
to damage from even small particles.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page x2
361). E191820
Change the air filter element at the proper

1. Release the clamps that secure the air
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
filter cover to the housing.
(page 501).
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Install in the reverse order.
320

Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has For best results, use the following products
many quality products available to clean or products of equivalent quality:
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover -
ZC-42
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner -
ZC-15
Motorcraft® Detail Wash ESR-M14P4-A
ZC-3-A
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.) -
ZC-20 (U.S.)
Engine Shampoo -
Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner -
ZC-56
Multi-Purpose Cleaner -
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner -
ZC-54
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.) -
ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner -
ZC-37-A
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH • Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft to the touch, or during strong or direct
Detail Wash. sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
321

Vehicle Care
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird • Do not use water pressure higher than
droppings, insect deposits and road tar. 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
These may cause damage to your • Do not use water hotter than 179°F
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. (82°C).
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover. • Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a • Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
car wash. distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
substances come in contact with your at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as damage graphics and cause the edges to
possible. peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product Flush the complete underside of your

to bumpers and other chrome parts. vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. drain holes free of debris or foreign
We recommend Motorcraft Custom material.
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to WAXING
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
than the time recommended. car's paint from the elements. We
• Using other non-recommended recommend that you wash and wax the
cleaners can result in severe and painted surface once or twice a year.
permanent cosmetic damage. When washing and waxing, park your
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
example steel wool or plastic pads as they sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
can scratch the chrome surface. applying wax.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal • Use a quality wax that does not contain
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
Exterior Plastic Parts to apply and remove the wax.
For routine cleaning we recommend • Apply a small amount of wax in a
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)

Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
322

Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
with any non-body (low-gloss black) spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
colored trim. The wax will discolor or the area in and around these locations.
stain the parts over time. • Cover the battery, power distribution
• Roof racks. box, and air filter assembly to prevent
• Bumpers. water damage when cleaning the
engine.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
• Mirror housings.
WIPER BLADES
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas. Car wash chemicals and environmental
• After waxing, your car's paint should fallout can result in windshield and wiper
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
smudges. wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
CLEANING THE ENGINE performance.
Engines are more efficient when they are To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep • Clean the windshield with a
the engine warmer than normal. non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
When washing: avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
• Take care when using a power washer instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
to clean the engine. The high-pressure any glass cleaner off these surfaces
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts immediately.
and cause damage. • For windshields contaminated with
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
water to avoid cracking the engine the entire windshield using steel wool
block or other engine components. (no greater than 0000 grade) in a
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and circular motion and rinse with water.
Degreaser on all parts that require • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine concentrate.
Shampoo.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it sharp objects to clean or remove decals
is hot or running; water in the running from the inside of the heated rear window.
engine may cause internal damage. The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
323

Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT

PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
WARNINGS
CLUSTER LENS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
WARNING
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing. Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
On vehicles equipped with
steering wheel or instrument panel
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
to avoid contamination of the airbag
chemical solvents or strong
system.
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a Clean the instrument panel and cluster
collision. lens with a clean, damp, white cotton
cloth, then use a clean and dry white
cotton cloth to dry these areas.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags: • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a the gloss of the upper portion of the
vacuum cleaner. instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
• Remove light stains and soil with undesirable windshield reflection.
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. • Be certain to wash or wipe your hands
clean if you have been in contact with
• If grease or tar is present on the certain products such as insect
material, spot-clean the area first with repellent and suntan lotion in order to
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In avoid possible damage to the interior
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose painted surfaces.
Cleaner.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot as these may damage the finish of the
cleaning, clean the entire area instrument panel, interior trim and
immediately (but do not oversaturate) cluster lens.
or the ring will set.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
• Do not use household cleaning sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
products or glass cleaners, which can If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
stain and discolor the fabric and affect Damage may not be covered by your
the flame retardant abilities of the seat warranty.
materials.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
white, cotton cloth.
324

Vehicle Care
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
white cotton cloth. For more thorough vacuum cleaner.
cleaning, use a mild soap and water • Clean and treat spills and stains as
solution. If the spot cannot be soon as possible.
completely cleaned by this method,
the area may be cleaned using a Do not use the following products as these
commercially available cleaning may damage the leather:
product designed for automotive • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
interiors. leather conditioners.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and • Household cleaners.
water solution or cleaning product to
• Alcohol solutions.
a clean, white, cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow • Solvents or cleaners intended
this to set at room temperature for 30 specifically for rubber, vinyl and
minutes. plastics.
4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not With King Ranch Edition
soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the
area by using a rubbing motion for 60 Your vehicle has seating covered in
seconds. premium, top-grain leather that is
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a extremely durable, but still requires special
clean, white, cotton cloth. care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If maintains the appearance of the leather.
Equipped)
Cleaning
Without King Ranch Edition For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
Note: Follow the same procedure as clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
instrument panels and leather interior trim a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
surfaces. cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with and water solution.
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and • Clean spills as quickly as possible.
water solution. Dry the area with a clean, • Test any cleaner or stain remover on
soft cloth. an inconspicuous part of the leather as
For cleaning and removing spots and stains cleaners may darken the leather.
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft • Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a orange juice or oil-based products on
commercially available leather cleaning the leather as they may permanently
product for automotive interiors. stain the leather.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on • Do not use household cleaning
an inconspicuous area. products, alcohol solutions, solvents
You should: or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.
325

Vehicle Care
Scratches Before repairing minor paint damage, use

a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Because the leather in the seat comes Remover to remove particles such as bird
from genuine steer hides, there may be droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
evidence of naturally occurring markings, spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are Always read the instructions before using
considered to be proof of a genuine leather cleaning products.
product.
In order to lessen the appearance of CLEANING THE ALLOY
certain scratches and other wear marks, WHEELS (If Equipped)
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
Conditioning section.
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Conditioning Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
rims and covers.
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Shop. Visit the website at Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call cleaners in combination with brush agitation
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
States. If you are unable to obtain King away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
premium leather conditioner. or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
• Clean the surfaces using the steps wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
outlined in the Cleaning section. Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
• Make sure the leather is dry then apply an extended period after cleaning the
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
to a clean, dry cloth. vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
• Rub the conditioner into the leather This will reduce the risk of increased
until it disappears. Allow the corrosion of the brake discs.
conditioner to dry, then repeat the Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
process for the entire interior. If a film with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean their condition we recommend that you:
cloth.
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT Apply using manufacturer's
DAMAGE instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to deposits of dirt and brake dust
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle accumulation.
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
326

Vehicle Care
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream • Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
of water when you have completed the compartment hinges and latches with
cleaning process. a light grade oil.
• To remove tar and grease, use • Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. • Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
VEHICLE STORAGE
Engine
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 • Change the engine oil and filter prior to
days or more, read the following storage because used engine oil
maintenance recommendations to make contains contaminates which may
sure your vehicle stays in good operating cause engine damage.
condition.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
We engineer and test all motor vehicles minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
and their components for reliable, regular with the climate controls set to defrost
driving. Under various conditions, until the engine reaches normal
long-term storage may lead to degraded operating temperature.
engine performance or failure unless you • With your foot on the brake, shift
use specific precautions to preserve engine through all the gears while the engine
components. is running.
General • We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated again.
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible. Fuel system
• If vehicles are stored outside, they • Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
require regular maintenance to protect until the first automatic shutoff of the
against rust and damage. fuel pump nozzle.
Body Cooling system
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to • Protect against freezing temperatures.
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from • When removing your vehicle from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing storage, check coolant fluid level.
and the underside of front fenders. Confirm that there are no cooling
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is system leaks and that fluid is at the
stored in exposed locations. recommended level.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
327

Vehicle Care
Battery • Check tire pressures and set tire

inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean. • Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 forth to remove rust build-up.
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
the battery cables to maintain battery oil and gas) to make sure there are no
charge for quick starting. leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory • If you remove the battery, clean the
features if battery cables are disconnected. battery cable ends and check for
Brakes damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake any concerns or issues.
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
328

Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION Utility vehicles and trucks handle

differently than passenger cars in the
Notice to utility vehicle and truck various driving conditions that are
owners encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
WARNINGS designed for cornering at speeds as high
Utility vehicles have a significantly as passenger cars any more than low-slung
higher rollover rate than other types sports cars are designed to perform
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
serious injury or death from a rollover or Study your owner's manual and any
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and supplements for specific information about
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for equipment features, instructions for safe
the conditions, keep tires properly inflated, driving and additional precautions to
never overload or improperly load your reduce the risk of an accident or serious
vehicle, and make sure every passenger is injury.
properly restrained.
Four-wheel drive system (if
In a rollover crash, an unbelted equipped)
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt. A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
All occupants must wear seat belts, and (when selected) has the ability to use all
children and infants must use appropriate four wheels to power itself. This increases
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or traction which may enable you to safely
ejection. drive over terrain and road conditions that
Do not become overconfident in the a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. cannot.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle On some four-wheel drive models, the
may accelerate better than a two-wheel initial shift from two-wheel drive to
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it four-wheel drive while the vehicle is
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive moving can cause a momentary clunk and
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal
as the front drivetrain comes up to speed
and are not cause for concern.
How your vehicle differs from

other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145298
329

Wheels and Tires
E145299 E168583
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying As a result of the above dimensional

capacity and to allow it to travel over differences, Sport utility vehicles and
rough terrain without getting hung up trucks often will have a higher center of
or damaging underbody components. gravity and a greater difference in center
• Shorter - to give it the capability to of gravity between the loaded and
approach inclines and drive over the unloaded condition. These differences that
crest of a hill without getting hung up make your vehicle so versatile also make
or damaging underbody components. it handle differently than an ordinary
All other things held equal, a shorter passenger car.
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
330

Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE U.S. Department of

Transportation Tire quality
Information About Uniform grades: The U.S. Department of
Tire Quality Grading Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
E142542
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
Tire Quality Grades apply to new would wear one and one-half (1
pneumatic passenger car tires. ½) times as well on the
The Quality grades can be found government course as a tire
where applicable on the tire graded 100. The relative
sidewall between tread shoulder performance of tires depends
and maximum section width. For upon the actual conditions of their
example: Treadwear 200 use, however, and may depart
Traction AA Temperature A. significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
These Tire Quality Grades are practices, and differences in road
determined by standards that the characteristics and climate.
United States Department of
Transportation has set. Traction AA A B C
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. WARNING
They do not apply to deep tread, The traction grade assigned
winter-type snow tires, to this tire is based on
space-saver or temporary use straight-ahead braking traction
spare tires, light truck or LT type tests, and does not include
tires, tires with nominal rim acceleration, cornering,
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or hydroplaning or peak traction
limited production tires as defined characteristics.
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
331

Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
grades represent the tire’s ability represent higher levels of
to stop on wet pavement as performance on the laboratory
measured under controlled test wheel than the minimum
conditions on specified required by law.
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire Glossary of Tire Terminology
marked C may have poor traction *Tire label: A label showing the
performance. original equipment tire sizes,
Temperature A B C recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
WARNING vehicle can carry.
The temperature grade for *Tire Identification Number
this tire is established for a (TIN): A number on the sidewall
tire that is properly inflated and of each tire providing information
not overloaded. Excessive speed, about the tire brand and
underinflation, or excessive manufacturing plant, tire size and
loading, either separately or in date of manufacture. Also referred
combination, can cause heat to as DOT code.
buildup and possible tire failure. *Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C, *Standard load: A class of
representing the tire’s resistance P-metric or Metric tires designed
to the generation of heat and its to carry a maximum load at set
ability to dissipate heat when pressure. For example: For
tested under controlled conditions P-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
on a specified indoor laboratory 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tire
test wheel. Sustained high size and for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
temperature can cause the Increasing the inflation pressure
material of the tire to degenerate beyond this pressure will not
and reduce tire life, and excessive increase the tire’s load carrying
temperature can lead to sudden capability.
tire failure. The grade C *Extra load: A class of P-metric
corresponds to a level of or Metric tires designed to carry a
performance which all passenger heavier maximum load at 42 psi
car tires must meet under the (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
332

Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of Information Contained on the

air pressure. Tire Sidewall
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a Both United States and Canada
standard unit of air pressure. Federal regulations require tire
*Cold tire pressure: The tire manufacturers to place
pressure when the vehicle has standardized information on the
been stationary and out of direct sidewall of all tires. This
sunlight for an hour or more and information identifies and
prior to the vehicle being driven for describes the fundamental
1 mile (1.6 kilometers). characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
*Recommended inflation Identification Number for safety
pressure: The cold inflation standard certification and in case
pressure found on the Safety of a recall.
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge Information on P Type Tires
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch E
post, next to the driver's seating C D F
position), or Tire Label located on G
the B-pillar or the edge of the
B
H
driver's door.
A
B-pillar: The structural member I
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim. J
M
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
L
K
the perimeter of the tire that E142543
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle. P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) rating. The definitions of these
for a tire or a tire and tube items are listed below. (Note that
assembly upon which the tire the tire size, load index and speed
beads are seated. rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
333

Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated G. H: Indicates the tire's speed

by the Tire and Rim Association, rating. The speed rating denotes
that may be used for service on the speed at which a tire is
cars, sport utility vehicles, designed to be driven for extended
minivans and light trucks. Note: If periods of time under a standard
your tire size does not begin with condition of load and inflation
a letter this may mean it is pressure. The tires on your vehicle
designated by either the European may operate at different
Tire and Rim Technical conditions for load and inflation
Organization or the Japan Tire pressure. These speed ratings may
Manufacturing Association. need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
B. 215: Indicates the nominal ratings range from 81 mph
width of the tire in millimeters (130 km/h) to 186 mph
from sidewall edge to sidewall (299 km/h). These ratings are
edge. In general, the larger the listed in the following chart.
number, the wider the tire.
Note: You may not find this
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio information on all tires because it
which gives the tire's ratio of is not required by federal law.
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. Letter mph ( km/h)
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim rating
diameter in inches. If you change M 81 (130)
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the N 87 (140)
new wheel diameter.
Q 99 (159)
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to R 106 (171)
how much weight a tire can carry. S 112 (180)
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not, T 118 (190)
contact a local tire dealer.
U 124 (200)
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it H 130 (210)
is not required by federal law. V 149 (240)
334

Wheels and Tires
Letter mph ( km/h) J. Tire Ply Composition and

rating Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
W 168 (270) layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
Y 186 (299) manufacturers also must indicate
Note: For tires with a maximum the ply materials in the tire and the
speed capability over 149 mph sidewall, which include steel,
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers nylon, polyester, and others.
sometimes use the letters ZR. For K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and
capability over 186 mph pounds that can be carried by the
(299 km/h), tire manufacturers tire (affixed to either the door
always use the letters ZR. hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification door-latch post, next to the
Number: This begins with the driver's seating position), or Tire
letters DOT and indicates that the Label located on the B-pillar or
tire meets all federal standards. the edge of the driver's door.
The next two numbers or letters L. Treadwear, Traction and
are the plant code designating Temperature Grades:
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and *Treadwear: The treadwear
the last four numbers represent grade is a comparative rating
the week and year the tire was based on the wear rate of the tire
built. For example, the numbers when tested under controlled
317 mean the 31st week of 1997. conditions on a specified
After 2000 the numbers go to four government test course. For
digits. For example, 2501 means example, a tire graded 150 would
the 25th week of 2001. The wear 1½ times as well on the
numbers in between are government course as a tire
identification codes used for graded 100.
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
335

Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades, The tire suppliers may have

from highest to lowest are AA, A, additional markings, notes or
B, and C. The grades represent the warnings such as standard load
tire's ability to stop on wet or radial tubeless.
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified Additional Information
government test surfaces of Contained on the Tire Sidewall
asphalt and concrete. A tire for LT Type Tires
marked C may have poor traction Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
performance. apply to this type of tire.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and B
C, representing the tire's C
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate A
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation D
B
pressure which can be found on E142544
the Safety Compliance LT type tires have some additional

Certification Label (affixed to information beyond those of P
either the door hinge pillar, type tires. These differences are
door-latch post, or the door edge described below.
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
position), or Tire Label located on by the Tire and Rim Association,
the B-pillar or the edge of the that is intended for service on light
driver's door. The cold inflation trucks.
pressure should never be set lower B. Load Range and Load
than the recommended pressure Inflation Limits: Indicates the
on the vehicle label. tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
336

Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)

at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; B C D
defined as four tires on the rear E
axle (a total of six or more tires on A
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
E142545
T type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
337

Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio You are strongly urged to buy a
which gives the tire's ratio of reliable tire pressure gauge, as
height to width. Numbers of 70 or automatic service station gauges
lower indicate a short sidewall. may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. or dial-type tire pressure gauge
R: Indicates a radial type tire. rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change Use the recommended cold
your wheel size, you will have to inflation pressure for optimum tire
purchase new tires to match the performance and wear.
new wheel diameter. Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
Location of the Tire Label patterns.
You will find a Tire Label WARNING
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important Under-inflation is the most
information located on the B-Pillar common cause of tire failures
or the edge of the driver's door. and may result in severe tire
See Load Carrying (page 233). cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
Inflating Your Tires vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
Safe operation of your vehicle sidewall flexing and rolling
requires that your tires are resistance, resulting in heat
properly inflated. Remember that buildup and internal damage to
a tire can lose up to half of its air the tire. It also may result in
pressure without appearing flat. unnecessary tire stress, irregular
Every day before you drive, check wear, loss of vehicle control and
your tires. If one looks lower than accidents. A tire can lose up to
the others, use a tire gauge to half of its air pressure and not
check pressure of all tires and appear to be flat!
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before Always inflate your tires to the
long trips, inspect each tire and Ford recommended inflation
check the tire pressure with a tire pressure even if it is less than the
gauge (including spare, if maximum inflation pressure
equipped). Inflate all tires to the information found on the tire. The
inflation pressure recommended Ford recommended tire inflation
by Ford Motor Company. pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
338

Wheels and Tires
Tire Label (affixed to either the the manufacturer’s recommended

door hinge pillar, door-latch post, cold inflation pressure which can
or the door edge that meets the be found on the Safety
door-latch post, next to the Compliance Certification Label
driver's seating position), or Tire (affixed to either the door hinge
Label located on the B-pillar or pillar, door-latch post, or the door
the edge of the driver's door. edge that meets the door-latch
Failure to follow the tire pressure post, next to the driver's seating
recommendations can cause position), or Tire Label located on
uneven treadwear patterns and the B-pillar or the edge of the
adversely affect the way your driver's door. The cold inflation
vehicle handles. pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure on the Safety Compliance
to change the ride characteristics Certification Label or Tire Label.
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at When weather temperature
the levels specified by Ford, your changes occur, tire inflation
vehicle may experience a condition pressures also change. A 10°F
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a (6°C) temperature drop can
severe vibration and oscillation in cause a corresponding drop of 1
the steering wheel after the vehicle psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
travels over a bump or dip in the Check your tire pressures
road that does not dampen out by frequently and adjust them to the
itself. Shimmy may result from proper pressure which can be
significant under-inflation of the found on the Safety Compliance
tires, improper tires (load range, Certification Label or Tire Label.
size, or type), or vehicle To check the pressure in your
modifications such as lift-kits. In tire(s):
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should 1. Make sure the tires are cool,
slowly reduce speed by either lifting meaning they are not hot from
off the accelerator pedal or lightly driving even a mile.
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
339

Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire Note: Some spare tires operate at
pressure when the tire is hot, (for a higher inflation pressure than the
example, driven more than 1 mile other tires. For T type mini-spare
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
reduce air pressure. The tires are and tire assembly information for
hot from driving and it is normal for a description. Store and maintain
pressures to increase above at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size
recommended cold pressures. A and dissimilar spare tires, see the
hot tire at or below recommended Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
cold inflation pressure could be assembly information for a
significantly under-inflated. description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
Note: If you have to drive a inflation pressure as shown on the
distance to get air for your tire(s), Safety Compliance Certification
check and record the tire pressure Label or Tire Label.
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the 6. Visually inspect the tires to
pump. It is normal for tires to heat make sure there are no nails or
up and the air pressure inside to go other objects embedded that
up as you drive. could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the 7. Check the sidewalls to make
tire gauge onto the valve and sure there are no gouges, cuts or
measure the pressure. bulges.
3. Add enough air to reach the Inspecting Your Tires and
recommended air pressure. Wheel Valve Stems
Note: If you overfill the tire, release Periodically inspect the tire treads
air by pressing on the metal stem for uneven or excessive wear and
in the center of the valve. Then remove objects such as stones,
recheck the pressure with your tire nails or glass that may be wedged
gauge. in the tread grooves. Check the tire
4. Replace the valve cap. and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
5. Repeat this procedure for each leakage and repair or replace the
tire, including the spare. tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
340

Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced. When the tire tread wears down

For your safety, tires that are to the same height as these wear
damaged or show signs of bars, the tire is worn out and must
excessive wear should not be used be replaced.
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail. Damage
Improper or inadequate vehicle Periodically inspect the tire treads
maintenance can cause tires to and sidewalls for damage (such
wear abnormally. Inspect all your as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
tires, including the spare, cracks in the tread groove and
frequently, and replace them if separation in the tread or
one or more of the following sidewall). If damage is observed
conditions exist: or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tire Wear Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
E142546
When the tread is worn down to

one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
341

Wheels and Tires
Age This begins with the letters DOT

and indicates that the tire meets
WARNING all federal standards. The next
Tires degrade over time two numbers or letters are the
depending on many factors plant code designating where it
such as weather, storage was manufactured, the next two
conditions, and conditions of use are the tire size code and the last
(load, speed, inflation pressure) four numbers represent the week
the tires experience throughout and year the tire was built. For
their lives. example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
In general, tires should be the numbers go to four digits. For
replaced after six years regardless example, 2501 means the 25th
of tread wear. However, heat week of 2001. The numbers in
caused by hot climates or between are identification codes
frequent high loading conditions used for traceability. This
can accelerate the aging process information is used to contact
and may require tires to be customers if a tire defect requires
replaced more frequently. a recall.
Tire Replacement
You should replace your spare tire Requirements
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if Your vehicle is equipped with tires
it has not been used. designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
Both United States and Canada and wheels that are the same
Federal regulations require tire size, load index, speed rating and
manufacturers to place type (such as P-metric versus
standardized information on the LT-metric or all-season versus
sidewall of all tires. This all-terrain) as those originally
information identifies and provided by Ford. The
describes the fundamental recommended tire and wheel size
characteristics of the tire and also may be found on either the Safety
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Compliance Certification Label or
Identification Number for safety the Tire Label. If this information
standard certification and in case is not found on these labels then
of a recall. you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
342

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS WARNINGS
not recommended by Ford can 3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
affect the safety and performance (3.6 m) away from the wheel and
of your vehicle, which could result tire assembly.
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, 4. Use both eye and ear
personal injury and death. protection.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and For a mounting pressure more
wheels could cause steering, than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
suspension, axle, transfer case or the maximum pressure, a Ford
power transfer unit failure. If you dealer or other tire service
have questions regarding tire professional should do the
replacement, contact your mounting.
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
To reduce the risk of serious person inflating standing at a
injury, when mounting minimum of 12 ft (3.6 m) away
replacement tires and wheels, you from the wheel and tire assembly.
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed Important: Remember to replace
below. If the beads do not seat at the wheel valve stems when the
the maximum pressure indicated, road tires are replaced on your
re-lubricate and try again. vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
When inflating the tire for should generally be replaced as a
mounting pressures up to 20 psi pair.
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire The tire pressure sensors mounted
sidewall, the following in the wheels are not designed to
precautions must be taken to be used in aftermarket wheels.
protect the person mounting the The use of wheels or tires not
tire: recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
1. Make sure that you have the operation of your tire pressure
correct tire and wheel size. monitoring system.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
343

Wheels and Tires
If the tire pressure monitoring Highway Hazards

system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your No matter how carefully you drive
replacement tire might be there’s always the possibility that
incompatible with your tire you may eventually have a flat tire
pressure monitoring system, or on the highway. Drive slowly to the
some component of the system closest safe area out of traffic.
may be damaged. This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
Safety Practices important.
WARNINGS If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
If your vehicle is stuck in you suspect your tire or vehicle
snow, mud, or sand, do not has been damaged, immediately
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the reduce your speed. Drive with
tires can tear the tire and cause caution until you can safely pull
an explosion. A tire can explode in off the road. Stop and inspect the
as little as three to five seconds. tires for damage. If a tire is
Do not spin the wheels at under-inflated or damaged,
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The deflate it, remove wheel and
tires may fail and injure a replace it with your spare tire and
passenger or bystander. wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
Driving habits have a great deal dealer to have the vehicle
to do with your tire mileage and inspected.
safety. Tire and Wheel Alignment
*Observe posted speed limits A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
*Avoid potholes and objects on misaligned or cause damage to
the road your tires. If your vehicle seems to
*Do not run over curbs or hit the pull to one side when you’re
tire against a curb when parking driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
344

Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front Note: Your vehicle may be

or the rear can cause uneven and equipped with a dissimilar spare
rapid treadwear of your tires and wheel and tire assembly. A
should be corrected by an dissimilar spare wheel and tire
authorized dealer. Front-wheel assembly is defined as a spare
drive vehicles and those with an wheel and tire assembly that is
independent rear suspension may different in brand, size or
require alignment of all four appearance from the road tires and
wheels. wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
The tires should also be balanced intended for temporary use only
periodically. An unbalanced tire and should not be used in a tire
and wheel assembly may result in rotation.
irregular tire wear.
Note: After having your tires
Tire Rotation rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
WARNING vehicle requirements.
If the tire label shows Rotating your tires at the
different tire pressures for the recommended interval (as
front and rear tires and the vehicle indicated in the Scheduled
is equipped with a tire pressure Maintenance chapter) will help
monitoring system, then the your tires wear more evenly,
settings for the system sensors providing better tire performance
need to be updated. Always and longer tire life.
perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If the Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
system is not reset, it may not four-wheel drive vehicles (front
provide a low tire pressure tires at left of diagram)
warning when necessary. See the
tire pressure monitoring system
reset procedure in this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven

wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
E142548
345

Wheels and Tires
Sometimes irregular tire wear can • Only certain snow cables or chains
be corrected by rotating the tires. have been approved by Ford/Lincoln
as safe for use on your vehicle with the
following tires: 245/70R17,
USING SNOW CHAINS LT245/70R17, 265/70R17 and
265/60R18.
WARNING • You should install snow cables or
Snow tires must be the same size, chains that have been rated as SAE
load index, speed rating as those Class S.
originally provided by Ford. Use of • Install chains securely, verifying that
any tire or wheel not recommended by the chains do not touch any wiring,
Ford can affect the safety and brake lines, or fuel lines.
performance of your vehicle, which could • Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle less if recommended by the chain
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and manufacturer while using snow chains.
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could • Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
case or power transfer unit failure. and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. • Remove the tire chains when they are
Do not remove these components from your no longer needed. Do not use tire
vehicle when using snow tires and chains. chains on dry roads.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather • Purchase chains or cables from a
treads to provide traction in rain and snow. manufacturer that clearly labels body
However, in some climates, you may need to tire dimension restrictions. The snow
to use snow tires and cables. If you need chains or cables must be mounted in
to use cables, it is recommended that steel pairs on the rear tires only.
wheels (of the same size and If you have any questions regarding snow
specifications) be used, as cables may chip chains or cables, please contact your
aluminum wheels. Ford/Lincoln authorized dealer.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an
accessory or equivalent. Other
conventional link type chains may
contact and cause damage to the
vehicle's wheel house and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front tires
as this may interfere with suspension
components.
346

Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
SYSTEM it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
WARNING has not reached the level to trigger
The tire pressure monitoring system illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
is not a substitute for manually telltale.
checking the tire pressure. The tire Your vehicle has also been equipped with
pressure should be checked periodically a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
(at least monthly) using a tire pressure when the system is not operating properly.
gauge. Failure to properly maintain your The TPMS malfunction indicator is
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire combined with the low tire pressure
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and telltale. When the system detects a
personal injury. malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
Each tire, including the spare (if continuously illuminated. This sequence
provided), should be checked will continue upon subsequent vehicle
monthly when cold and inflated start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
to the inflation pressure recommended by When the malfunction indicator is
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle illuminated, the system may not be able
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If to detect or signal low tire pressure as
your vehicle has tires of a different size intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
than the size indicated on the vehicle for a variety of reasons, including the
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you installation of replacement or alternate
should determine the proper tire inflation tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
pressure for those tires.) the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
As an added safety feature, your vehicle telltale after replacing one or more tires or
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
Monitoring System (TPMS) that replacement or alternate tires and wheels
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale allow the TPMS to continue to function
when one or more of your tires is properly.
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale The tire pressure monitoring system
illuminates, you should stop and check complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a Operation is subject to the following two
significantly under-inflated tire causes the conditions: (1) This device may not cause
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. harmful interference, and (2) This device
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency must accept any interference received,
and tire tread life, and may affect the including interference that may cause
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. undesired operation.
347

Wheels and Tires
This device complies with part 15 of the Understanding Your Tire Pressure
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS Monitoring System
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
• This device may not cause harmful and sends the tire pressure readings to
interference. your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
• This device must accept any light will turn on if the tire pressure is
interference received, including significantly low. Once the light is
interference that may cause undesired illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
operation. and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
Changing Tires With a Tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
Pressure Monitoring System short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is

Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
E142549 pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure When You Believe Your System is Not
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The Operating Properly
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take The main function of the tire pressure
care when changing the tire to avoid monitoring system is to warn you when
damaging the sensor. your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
You should always have your tires serviced of functioning as intended. See the
by an authorized dealer. following chart for information concerning
Check the tire pressure periodically (at your tire pressure monitoring system:
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
348

Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required

warning light
Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
Tire rotation without On vehicles with different front and rear
sensor training tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 331).
Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
light assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
349

Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset

Procedure
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire WARNING
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to To determine the required
your tires. pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
It may take up to two minutes of driving Label (affixed to either the door hinge
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
off after you have filled your tires to the that meets the door-latch post, next to the
recommended inflation pressure. driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
How Temperature Affects Your Tire driver's door.
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic monitoring system reset procedure after
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a each tire rotation on vehicles that require
typical passenger tire inflation pressure different recommended tire pressures in the
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 front tires as compared to the rear tires.
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the Overview
outside temperature significantly lower To provide the vehicle's load carrying
than the daytime temperature, the tire capability, some vehicles require different
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 recommended tire pressures in the front
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
temperature. This lower pressure value pressure monitoring system equipped on
may be detected by the tire pressure these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
monitoring system as being significantly low tire pressure warning light at two
lower than the recommended inflation different pressures; one for the front tires
pressure and activate the system warning and one for the rear tires.
light for low tire pressure.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
If the low tire pressure warning light is on, consistent performance and maximum tire
visually check each tire to verify that no tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as needs to know when the tires are rotated
necessary. Check the air pressure in the to determine which set of tires are on the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, front and which are on the rear. With this
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest information, the system can detect and
location where air can be added to the properly warn of low tire pressures.
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure. System reset tips:
350

Wheels and Tires
• To reduce the chances of interference 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring

from another vehicle, perform the system sensors in the tires using the
system reset procedure at least three following system reset sequence
feet (one meter) away from another starting with the left front tire in the
Ford Motor Company vehicle following clockwise order: Left front
undergoing the system reset procedure (driver's side front tire), Right front
at the same time. (passenger's side front tire), Right rear
• Do not wait more than two minutes (passenger's side rear tire), Left rear
between resetting each tire sensor or (driver's side rear tire).
the system will time-out and the entire 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
procedure will have to be repeated on stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
all four wheels. air pressure until the horn sounds.
• A double horn will sound indicating the Note: The single horn chirp confirms
need to repeat the procedure. that the sensor identification code has
been learned by the module for this
Performing the System Reset Procedure position. If a double horn is heard, the
reset procedure was unsuccessful, and
Read the entire procedure before you must repeat it.
attempting.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 stem on the right front tire. Decrease
km/h) for at least two minutes, then the air pressure until the horn sounds.
park in a safe location where you can
easily get to all four tires and have 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
access to an air pump. stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition. 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position air pressure until the horn sounds.
with the engine off. Training is complete after the horn
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
three times. You must accomplish this side rear tire), the system indicator
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode stops flashing, and a message is shown
has been entered successfully, the horn in the information display.
will sound once, the system indicator 10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
will flash and a message is shown in beeps are heard, the reset procedure
the information display. If this does not was unsuccessful and you must
occur, please try again starting at Step repeat it. If after repeating the
2. If after repeated attempts to enter procedure and two short beeps are
the reset mode, the horn does not heard when the ignition is turned to
sound, the system indicator does not off, seek assistance from your
flash and no message is shown in the authorized dealer.
information display, seek service from
your authorized dealer.
351

Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended Have a flat serviced by an authorized
air pressure as indicated on the dealer in order to prevent damage to the
Safety Compliance Certification system sensors See Tire Pressure
Label (affixed to either the door hinge Monitoring System (page 347). Replace
pillar, door-latch post, or the door the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
edge that meets the door-latch post, possible. During repairing or replacing of
next to the driver's seating position) the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar inspect the system sensor for damage.
or the edge of the driver's door.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING
WARNINGS Failure to follow these guidelines
The use of tire sealant may damage could result in an increased risk of
your tire pressure monitoring system loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
only. This means that if you need to use it,
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
you should replace it as soon as possible
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
use of the sealant.
is the same size and type as the road tires
If the tire pressure monitor sensor and wheels that were originally provided
becomes damaged, it will no longer by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
function. See Tire Pressure is damaged, it should be replaced rather
Monitoring System (page 347). than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system is defined as a spare wheel and tire
indicator light will illuminate when the spare assembly that is different in brand, size or
tire is in use. To restore the full function of appearance from the road tires and wheels
the monitoring system, all road wheels and can be one of three types:
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle. 1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not may have Temporary Use Only molded in
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually the sidewall.
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe 2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
place on the side of the road. on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY
352

Wheels and Tires
When driving with one of the dissimilar • Use commercial car washing
spare tires listed above, do not: equipment.
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). • Use snow chains on the end of the
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety and tire assembly.
Compliance Label. The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
• Tow a trailer. wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire. • Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time. • Comfort and noise.
• Use commercial car washing • Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
equipment. • Winter weather driving capability.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire. • Wet weather driving capability.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires • All-wheel driving capability.
listed above at any one wheel location can When driving with the full-size dissimilar
lead to impairment of the following: spare wheel and tire assembly additional
• Handling, stability and braking caution should be given to:
performance. • Towing a trailer.
• Comfort and noise. • Driving vehicles equipped with a
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. camper body.
• Winter weather driving capability. • Driving vehicles with a load on the
• Wet weather driving capability. cargo rack.
• All-wheel driving capability. Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
and seek service as soon as possible.
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar Location of the Spare Tire and
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: Tools
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
• Use more than one dissimilar spare just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
wheel and tire assembly at a time. jack handle and lug wrench are located in
the following locations:
Body style Location
Regular Cab Attached to the floor behind the passenger

seat (for easier access, move the passenger
seat forward)
Super Cab and Crew Cab Attached behind the rear seat on the
passenger side
353

Wheels and Tires
Tire Change Procedure WARNINGS

Disable the power running boards
WARNINGS
before jacking, lifting, or placing any
When one of the front wheels is off object under the vehicle. Never place
the ground, the transmission alone your hand between the power running
will not prevent the vehicle from board and the vehicle as extended power
moving or slipping off the jack. running boards will retract when the doors
To help prevent the vehicle from are closed. Failure to follow these
moving when you change a tire, be instructions may result in personal injury.
sure to place the transmission in park Failure to follow these instructions
(P), set the parking brake and block (in when using the spare tire carrier
both directions) the wheel that is could cause loss of the wheel and
diagonally opposite (other side and end of tire and lead to personal injury: Only use
the vehicle) to the tire being changed. the spare tire carrier to stow the tire and
Never get underneath a vehicle that wheel combination specified on the Tire
is supported only by a jack. If the Label or Safety Compliance Certification
vehicle slips off the jack, you or Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
someone else could be seriously injured. driver door. Other tire and wheel
combinations could cause the carrier to
Do not attempt to change a tire on fail if it does not fit securely or is too heavy.
the side of the vehicle close to Do not use impact tools or power tools
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the operating over 200 RPM, which may cause
road to avoid the danger of being hit when winch malfunction and prevent a secure
operating the jack or changing the wheel. fit. Override the winch at least three times
Always use the jack provided as (there will be an audible click each time)
original equipment with your vehicle. to ensure a tight secure fit of the wheel and
If using a jack other than the one tire.
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is Note: Passengers should not remain in the
adequate for the vehicle weight, including vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.
354

Wheels and Tires
Removing the Jack and Tools
E206264
1. From the passenger side of the vehicle, Removing the Spare Tire
unstrap the large center strap securing
the jacking kit to the floor posts.
2. Remove the fuel funnel.
3. With slight downward pressure, slide
the jacking kit outward, toward the
passenger side of the vehicle.
4. Lift the jacking kit off the floor posts.
E188735
355

Wheels and Tires
1. Use your key to remove the lock 6. Obtain the spare tire and jack from
cylinder from the access hole of the their storage locations.
bumper to allow access to the guide 7. Loosen each wheel lug nut on the
tube. Assemble the jack handle as affected flat tire one-half turn
shown in the illustration. counterclockwise, but do not remove
them.
Jacking the Vehicle

Front Jacking Points
E184020
2. Fully insert the jack handle through the

bumper hole and into the guide tube
through the access hole in the rear
bumper.
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until
the tire is lowered to the ground, the
tire can be slid rearward and the cable
is slightly slack.
4. Remove the retainer from the center
of the wheel.
E183709
Note: Use the frame rail as the jacking

location point, not the control arm. The
frame rail is marked with an arrow.
E175447
5. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.
For example, if the left front tire is flat,
block the right rear wheel.
356

Wheels and Tires
Rear Jacking Points 5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 360).
6. Stow the flat tire. See the Stowing the
Flat or Spare Tire.
7. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make
sure the jack is fastened securely
before you drive. See Stowing the Jack
and Tools.
8. Unblock the wheels.
1 4
3 6
5 2
E166719
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire

E183403
Note: Failure to follow the spare tire
Note: Jack at the specified locations to stowage instructions may result in failure of
avoid damage to the vehicle. the cable or loss of the spare tire.
1. Place the jack at the jacking point next 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
to the tire you are changing. Turn the valve stem facing up.
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
is completely off the ground.
vehicle and install the retainer through
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug the wheel center. Pull on the cable to
wrench. align the components at the end of the
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, cable.
making sure the valve stem is facing 3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the the tire is raised to its stowed position
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not underneath the vehicle. The effort to
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel turn the jack handle increases
has been lowered. significantly and the spare tire carrier
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack ratchets or slips when the tire is raised
handle counterclockwise. to the maximum tightness. Tighten to
357

Wheels and Tires
the best of your ability, to the point

where the ratchet or slip occurs, if
possible. The spare tire carrier will not
allow you to overtighten. If the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips with little
effort, contact your authorized dealer.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the
frame and is properly tightened. Try to
push or pull, then turn the tire to be
sure it will not move. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to
properly stow the spare tire may result E184021
in failure of the winch cable and loss
of the tire. 2. Adjust the jack up or down by rotating
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure the lead screw located on the end of
when servicing the spare tire pressure the jack. The stowage markings should
(every six months, as per your line up with the bottom channel.
scheduled maintenance information), 3. Place the jack in the vehicle so that the
or at any time that the spare tire is lead screw adjustment is facing the
disturbed through service of other driver side of the vehicle.
components. 4. Place the tool bag on top of the jack.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock The jack base fits within the opening
into the bumper drive tube with the of the jack tool bag.
spare tire lock key and jack handle. 5. Attach the flap around the lead screw
and secure the flap to the velcro.
Stowing the Jack and Tools
6. Secure the two D-ring straps tightly.
1. Place the jacking tools in the tool bag
and secure the velcro flaps. 7. Secure the velcro straps through the
hole of the lead screw tightly.
8. Place the jack so the lug wrench faces
the rear of the vehicle. Position the jack
base so the key hole slots align with
the jacking posts.
358

Wheels and Tires
E184022
9. With slight downward pressure, slide 10. Secure the large strap.
the jack and tool assembly toward the 11. Clip the fuel funnel back in place.
driver side of the vehicle until it stops.
359

Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size lb.ft (Nm)
M14 x 1.5 150 lb.ft (204 Nm)

*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
360

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 2.7L EcoBoost 3.5L V6 Ecoboost 3.5L V6 TiVCT 5.0L V8
Cubic inches 164 214 214 302

Required Minimum 87 Minimum 87 Minimum 87 Minimum 87
fuel octane octane octane or E85 octane or E85
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Ignition Coil on plug Coil on plug Coil on plug Coil on plug
system
Spark plug .028-.031 (0.7 - .030-.033 in. .049-.053 in. .049-.053 in.
gap 0.8 mm) (0.75 - 0.85 mm) (1.25 - 1.35 mm) (1.25 - 1.35 mm)
Compres- 10.0:1 10.0:1 10.8:1 10.5:1
sion ratio
3.5L V6 Engines with A/C

Drivebelt Routing
2.7L Ecoboost Engines with A/C
E167467
5.0L V8 Engines with A/C

E176088
E167465
361

MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Component 2.7L Ecoboost 3.5L V6 3.5L V6 TiVCT 5.0L V8

Ecoboost
Air filter FA-1883 FA-1883 FA-1883 FA-1883

element
Oil filter FL-2062 FL-500-S FL-500-S FL-500-S
Battery BAGM-48H6- BXT-48H6-610 BXT-48H6-610 BXT-48H6-610
760
BAGM-94RH7- BXT-94RH7-730 BXT-94RH7- BXT-94RH7-
800 (King Ranch, 730 730
(King Ranch, Lariat and (King Ranch, (King Ranch,
Lariat and Premium) Lariat and Lariat and
Premium) Premium) Premium)
Spark plugs SP-542 SP-534 SP-520 SP-519
Windshield WW-2242
wiper blade
Cabin air filter FP-79
We recommend Motorcraft replacement

parts available at your Ford dealer or at VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. NUMBER
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are The vehicle identification number is
engineered for your vehicle. Use of other located on the left-hand side of the
parts may impact vehicle performance, instrument panel.
emissions and durability. Your warranty
may be void for any damage related to use
of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use
an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 501).
362

F Model year
G Assembly plant
H Production sequence number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is

representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
E142477
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
A World manufacturer identifier
B Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D Engine type
E Check digit
363

TRANSMISSION CODE The transmission code is on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label. The
DESIGNATION following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
E167814
Description Code
Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80E 6
364

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™

Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
Item Capacity
Engine oil 6.0 qt (5.7 L)

Engine coolant 16.4 qt (15.5 L)
Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive) 3.5 pt (1.7 L)
Rear axle fluid 5.5 pt (2.6 L)
Automatic transmission fluid* 13.1 qt (12.4 L)
Transfer case fluid 1.5 qt (1.4 L)
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Fuel tank 23.0 gal (87.1 L)
(Optional)
A/C Refrigerant 1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil 3.4 fl oz (100.5 ml)
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
365

Specifications
Materials
Name Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A

Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended Motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
Recommended motor oil (Mexico): WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
Optional Motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C946-A
CXO-5W30-LFS12
Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Canada): WSS-M97B44-D2
CVC-3DIL-B
Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Front axle fluid (U.S.): WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Front axle fluid (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A
CXY-80W90-1L
Front axle fluid (Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A
MXY-80W90-QL
366

Name Specification
Rear axle fluid: WSS-M2C942-A

Motorcraft SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A
CXT-10-LV12
Transfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly) (U.S. ESP-M2C166-H
and Mexico):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
Transfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly) ESP-M2C166-H
(Canada):
CXL-12
Transfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (U.S. and WSS-M2C938-A
Mexico): MERCON LV
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
Transfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
Windshield washer fluid (Canada): WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
A/C refrigerant (U.S.): WSH-M17B19-A
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
A/C refrigerant (Canada): WSH-M17B19-A
CYN-16-R
367

Name Specification
A/C refrigerant (Mexico): WSH-M17B19-A

MYN-19
A/C refrigerant compressor oil: WSH-M1C231-B
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
Multi-purpose grease: ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
Lock cylinders (U.S.): --
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): --
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
Lock cylinders (Mexico): --
MXL-1
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
the defined specification and viscosity
available, use motor oils of the
grade, this may lead to:
recommended viscosity grade that meet
• Component damage which is not API SN requirements and display the API
covered by the vehicle warranty. Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
• Longer engine cranking periods. not use oil labeled with API SN service
• Increased emission levels. category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
368

Do not use supplemental engine oil

additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
E142732 clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
An oil that displays this symbol conforms materials may result in brake system
to current engine, emission system and damage and possible failure.
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification Note: Automatic transmissions that require
Advisory Council (ILSAC). MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

Capacities
WARNING
Item Capacity

Fly)
369

Item Capacity

demand)
(Optional)
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification

Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended Motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C946-A
CXO-5W30-LSP12
MXO-5W30-QSP
XO-5W30-QFS
Optional Motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C946-A
CXO-5W30-LFS12
VC-3DIL-B
370

Name Specification

CVC-3DIL-B
PM-20
XY-80W90-QL
CXY-80W90-1L
MXY-80W90-QL
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
and Mexico):
XL-12
(Canada):
CXL-12
Mexico): MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
371

Name Specification

CXT-10-LV12
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
YN-19
CYN-16-R
MYN-19
YN-12-D
pedal shift grease:
XG-1-E1
XL-5
XL-1
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
MXL-1
372

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet An oil that displays this symbol conforms
the defined specification and viscosity to current engine, emission system and
grade, this may lead to: fuel economy performance standards of
• Component damage which is not the International Lubricants Specification
covered by the vehicle warranty. Advisory Council (ILSAC).
• Longer engine cranking periods. Do not use supplemental engine oil
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Reduced fuel economy. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
• Degraded brake performance. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
API SN requirements and display the API
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
materials may result in brake system
category unless the label also displays the
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
E142732
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L

Capacities
WARNING
373

Item Capacity
Engine oil 6.3 qt (6 L)

Fly)
demand)
(Optional)
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification

Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A
CXO-5W20-LSP12
374

Name Specification
MXO-5W20-QSP
XO-5W20-QFS
Optional motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A
CXO-5W20-LFS12
VC-3DIL-B
CVC-3DIL-B
PM-20
XY-80W90-QL
CXY-80W90-1L
MXY-80W90-QL
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
375

Name Specification

and Mexico):
XL-12
(Canada):
CXL-12
Mexico): MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
YN-19
CYN-16-R
MYN-19
YN-12-D
pedal shift grease:
XG-1-E1
376

Name Specification

XL-5
Lock cylinders (U.S. and Mexico): --
XL-1
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet

the defined specification and viscosity
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance. E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
the International Lubricants Specification
API SN requirements and display the API
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
not use oil labeled with API SN service Do not use supplemental engine oil
category unless the label also displays the additives because they are unnecessary
API certification mark. and could lead to engine damage that may
377

Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Note: Automatic transmissions that require
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
of any fluid other than the recommended use of any other fluid may cause
fluid may cause degraded brake transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L

Capacities
WARNING
Item Capacity

Engine coolant 15.9 qt (15 L)
Fly)
demand)
(Optional)
378

Item Capacity

Specifications
Materials
Name Specification

Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A
CXO-5W20-LSP12
MXO-5W20-QSP
XO-5W20-QFS
Optional motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A
CXO-5W20-LFS12
VC-3DIL-B
CVC-3DIL-B
PM-20
379

Name Specification
XY-80W90-QL
CXY-80W90-1L
MXY-80W90-QL
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
and Mexico):
XL-12
(Canada):
CXL-12
Mexico): MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
380

Name Specification
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
YN-19
CYN-16-R
MYN-19
YN-12-D
pedal shift grease:
XG-1-E1
XL-5
XL-1
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet • Reduced engine performance.
the defined specification and viscosity • Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
381

We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for Note: Automatic transmissions that require
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
available, use motor oils of the use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
recommended viscosity grade that meet use of any other fluid may cause
API SN requirements and display the API transmission damage.
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms

to current engine, emission system and
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
382

Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION AM and FM frequencies are established by

the Federal Communications Commission
Radio Frequencies and Reception (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Factors Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or

CD and CD Player Information heat sources for extended periods.
Note: CD units play commercially pressed MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact Structure
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable Audio systems capable of recognizing and
compact discs may not function correctly playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
when used in Ford CD players. and folder structures work as follows:
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade • There are two different modes for MP3
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
as the label may peel and cause the CD to WMA track mode (system default) and
become jammed. You should use a MP3 and WMA folder mode.
permanent felt tip marker rather than • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please disc. The player numbers each MP3
contact an authorized dealer for further and WMA track on the disc (noted by
information. the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped T001 to a maximum of T255. The
discs or discs with a scratch protection film maximum number of playable MP3 and
attached. WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
Always handle discs by their edges only. model of radio present.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
383

Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents In track mode, the system displays and
a folder structure consisting of one plays the structure as if it were only one
level of folders. The CD player numbers level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc regardless of being in a specific folder). In
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file folder mode, the system only plays the
extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through AM/FM
the disc files.
WARNING
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how Driving while distracted can result in
the system reads the structures you create. loss of vehicle control, crash and
While various files may be present (files injury. We strongly recommend that
with extensions other than MP3 and you use extreme caution when using any
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA device that may take your focus off the
extension are played; other files are road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
ignored by the system. This enables you to operation of your vehicle. We recommend
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a against the use of any hand-held device
variety of tasks on your work computer, while driving and encourage the use of
home computer and your in-vehicle voice-operated systems when possible.
system. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
Note: Your audio system may not be

equipped with a CD player.
384

Audio System
E176101
A Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.

B Number block: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune
to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
C Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode).
D Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
E TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.
F Seek: Select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system stops at
the first station up or down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset.
G VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
385

Audio System
H MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
I MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
J RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
K Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes.
You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock
Settings.
L Mute: Press this button to mute the playing media.
M Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD
WARNING
386

Audio System
E176104

B Number block:
In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any
station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons
to enter a phone number.
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
F Seek:
387

Audio System
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button
to move quickly forward through the current track.
G CD slot: Insert a CD.
H Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
I VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
J MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
K MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
L RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
functions.
M Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
Settings.
N CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
O Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
388

Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: WARNING

AM/FM/SYNC Driving while distracted can result in
E176102

B Number block:
389

Audio System
In phone mode, press the buttons to dial a phone number.

on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode).
F Seek: Select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system stops at
the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the
next strong radio station or memory preset.
G VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
H PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC™ (page 402).
I MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
J MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
K Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
Settings.
L RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
functions.
M Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
390

Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: WARNING

AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE Driving while distracted can result in
RADIO loss of vehicle control, crash and
Note: Some features, such as Sirius satellite

radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
E176103
391

Audio System

B Number block:
In CD mode, press a button to select a track.
In phone mode, press the buttons to dial a phone number.
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
F Seek:
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button
to move quickly forward through the current track.
G CD slot: Insert a CD.
H Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
I VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
J PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC™ (page 402).
K MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
L MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
M Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
Settings.
N RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
functions.
392

Audio System
O SIRIUS or MUTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Sirius satellite radio, press
this button to listen to Sirius satellite radio. If your vehicle is not equipped with
Sirius satellite radio, press the button to mute the playing media.
P CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
Q Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls

most of the audio features. See
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: Entertainment (page 453).
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
393

Audio System
E176105
A VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
B Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward:
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these buttons. The
system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
C Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
D TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.
E MEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM and
Line In.
F CD slot: Insert a CD.
G Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
394

Audio System
DIGITAL RADIO The multicast indicator appears in FM

mode (only) if the current station is
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
available in all markets. The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
HD Radio technology is the digital content is available. HD1 signifies the main
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your programming status and is available in
system has a special receiver that allows analog and digital broadcasts. Other
it to receive digital broadcasts (where multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
available) in addition to the analog only available digitally.
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
than analog broadcasts with free, can access the following functions:
crystal-clear audio and no static or • Scan allows you to hear a brief
distortion. For more information, and a sampling of all available stations. This
guide to available stations and feature still works when HD Radio
programming, please visit reception is on, although it does not
www.hdradio.com. scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a see the HD logo appear if the station
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, has a digital broadcast.
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your • Memory presets allow you to save an
screen. When this logo is available, you active channel as a memory preset.
may also see Title and Artist fields Touch and hold a memory preset slot
on-screen. until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
395

Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
396

Audio System
Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. The
multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in
recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.
direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. below.
*
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables No action required. This is
when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. normal behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor news, sports, weather, traffic and
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not entertainment satellite radio channels. For
responsible for the content sent using HD more information and a complete list of
Radio technology. Content may be SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
changed, added or deleted at any time at www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
the station owner's discretion. www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
397

Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system may mute.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right news, weather, traffic and entertainment
to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. Your factory-installed
programming including canceling, moving SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
or adding particular channels, and its prices, hardware and a limited subscription term,
at any time, with or without notice to you. which begins on the date of sale or lease
Ford Motor Company shall not be of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
responsible for any such programming for availability.
changes.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
E142593
1-888-539-7474.
398

Audio System
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial satellite radio mode, you can view this
Number (ESN) number by pressing SIRIUS and memory
preset 1 at the same time, or tuning to
You need your ESN to activate, modify or channel 0.
track your satellite radio account. When in
Troubleshooting
Radio display Condition Possible action
Acquiring Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS system There is an internal module If this message does not
failure or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
Updating Update of channel No action required. The
programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS 1-888-539-7474 Your satellite service is no Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
None found. Check Channel All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
Guide. selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
399

Audio System
AUDIO INPUT JACK Your audio extension cable must have

male 1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter)
connectors at each end.
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in 1. Switch off the engine, radio and
loss of vehicle control, crash and portable music player. Set the parking
injury. We strongly recommend that brake and put the transmission in
you use extreme caution when using any position P.
device that may take your focus off the 2. Plug the extension cable from the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe portable music player into the audio
operation of your vehicle. We recommend input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a
tuned FM station or a CD.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable 4. Adjust the volume as desired.
local laws that may affect the use of 5. Switch your portable music player on
electronic devices while driving. and adjust its volume to half its
Do not connect or adjust the settings maximum level.
on your portable music player when 6. Press AUX or MEDIA until LINE or
your vehicle is moving. LINE IN appears in the display. You
Do not place your portable music should hear music from your device
player on the instrument panel. Hard even if it is low.
objects may become projectiles in a 7. Adjust the volume on your portable
crash or sudden stop, which may increase music player until it reaches the volume
the risk of serious injury. level of the FM station or CD. Do this
by switching back and forth between
the AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT (If Equipped)
E191758
The audio input jack allows you to connect

and play music from a portable music
player through your vehicle speakers. You E191759
can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones.
400

Audio System
The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See SYNC™ (page
402).
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)

The media hub is located in a
compartment inside the center console.
A B
E170492
C
A Line in
B USB ports
C SD card slot
See Entertainment (page 453).
401

SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
E142598
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications • Text message.

system that works with your • Use the advanced voice recognition
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and system.
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Charge your USB device (if your device
• Make and receive calls. supports this).
• Access and play music from your *
These features are not available in all
portable music player.
markets and may require activation.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report **
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
& Information).
*
market.
• Use applications, such as Pandora and Make sure that you review your device's
Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink.
** manual before using it with SYNC.
• Access phonebook contacts and music Support
using voice commands.
The SYNC support team is available to
• Stream music from your connected
help you with any questions you cannot
phone.
answer on your own.
402

SYNC™
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST. When using SYNC:

Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. • Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. or damaged. Place cords and cables
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
Times are subject to change due to
compartments or safe driving abilities.
holidays.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
SYNC Owner Account vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
Why do I need a SYNC owner account? device's manual for further information.
• Required to activate Vehicle Health • Do not attempt to service or repair the
Report and to view the reports online. system. See an authorized dealer.
• Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and Privacy Information
to personalize your Saved Points and
When a cellular phone is connected to
Favorites.
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
• Essential for keeping up with the latest your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
software downloads available for phone. This profile is created in order to
SYNC. offer you more cellular features and to
• Access to customer support for any operate more efficiently. Among other
questions you may have. things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
Driving Restrictions (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
For your safety, certain features are phone was not connected to the system.
speed-dependent and restricted when your In addition, if you connect a media device,
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km). the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
Safety Information records a short development log of
WARNING approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
Driving while distracted can result in system data may be used to improve the
loss of vehicle control, crash and system and help diagnose any problems
injury. We strongly recommend that that may occur.
device that may take your focus off the The cellular profile, media device index,
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe and development log will remain in the
operation of your vehicle. We recommend vehicle unless you delete them and are
against the use of any hand-held device generally accessible only in the vehicle
while driving and encourage the use of when the cellular phone or media player
voice-operated systems when possible. is connected. If you no longer plan to use
Make sure you are aware of all applicable the system or the vehicle, we recommend
local laws that may affect the use of you perform a Master Reset to erase all
electronic devices while driving. stored information.
403

SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without

special equipment and access to the Global voice commands
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not "Cancel" This command
access the system data for any purpose ends the voice
other than as described absent consent, a session. You can
court order, or where required by law also cancel a
enforcement, other government session by holding
authorities, or other third parties acting the voice button for
with lawful authority. Other parties may two or more
seek to access the information seconds.
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy "Help" This command
information, see the sections on 911 Assist, provides you with
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, hints, examples and
Directions and Information. instructions.
"Main menu" This command
USING VOICE RECOGNITION restarts the voice
session from the
This system helps you control many initial starting point.
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the Helpful Hints
wheel and focus on what is around you.
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
Initiating a Voice Session as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
Press the voice button. A list of prevent the system from correctly
available voice commands recognizing spoken commands.
E142599 appears in the display. • Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
Global Voice Commands followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
These voice commands are always
register with the system.
available. You can say them at any time.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
404

SYNC™
System Interaction and Feedback

Command The system:
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and "Confirmation Makes a best guess
spoken confirmations depending on the prompts off" from the command;
situation and the chosen level of you may still occa-
interaction. You can customize the voice sionally be asked to
recognition system to provide more or less confirm settings.
instruction and feedback.
"Confirmation Clarifies your voice
The default setting is to a higher level of
prompts on" command with a
interaction in order to help you learn to use
short question.
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Candidate Lists
Adjusting the Interaction Level
The system creates suggestion lists when
Press the voice button. When it has the same confidence level of several
prompted, say "voice settings", options based on your voice commands.
E142599 then any of the following: When switched on, the system may
prompt you with as many as four
possibilities for clarification.
Command The system:
You can switch this feature on or off by
"Interaction mode Provides more speaking one of the following voice
novice" detailed interaction commands:
and guidance.
(Recommended for Command The system:
first time users.)
"Media candidate Makes a best guess
"Interaction mode Provides less lists off" from the media
advanced" audible interaction candidate list. The
and guidance. system may still
occasionally ask
Confirmation Prompts you questions.
Confirmation prompts are short questions "Media candidate Clarifies your voice
the system asks when it is not sure of your lists on" command for
request or when there is more than one media candidates.
possible response to your request. For
example, the system may ask if the "Phone candidate Makes a best guess
command "Phone" is correct. lists off" from the phone
candidate list. The
To adjust this setting, press the voice system may still
button. When prompted, say "voice occasionally ask
settings", then any of the following: you questions.
"Phone candidate Clarifies your voice
lists on" command for
phone candidates
405

SYNC™
Changing the Voice Settings Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in park
In addition to using voice commands to (P).
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display. Using the Audio System
1. Press the MENU button. Note: To scroll through the menus, press
2. Select SYNC-Settings. the up and down arrows on your audio
3. Select Voice Settings. system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR search. See your device's manual if
PHONE necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
Hands-free calling is one of the main audio display indicates there is no
features of SYNC. While the system paired phone, select the option to add.
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's 3. When a message to begin pairing
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular appears in the audio display, search for
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
support the following functions: process.
• Answering an incoming call. 4. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
• Ending a call.
by the system in the radio display. The
• Using privacy mode. display indicates when the pairing is
• Dialing a number. successful.
• Redialing. Depending on your phone's capability and
• Call waiting notification. your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
• Caller ID. phone as the primary phone (the phone
Other features, such as text messaging SYNC automatically tries to connect with
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook first upon vehicle start-up) and
download, are phone-dependent features. downloading your phonebook.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit Using Voice Commands
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca. E142599
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Pairing a Phone for the First Time Bluetooth feature before starting the
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC search. See your device's manual if
allows you to make and receive hands-free necessary.
calls. 2. Start a voice session, and then say
Note: SYNC can support downloading up "Pair device".
to approximately 4000 entries per 3. Follow the instructions on the audio
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. display.
406

SYNC™
Depending on your phone's capability and Phone Voice Commands

your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current Press the voice button. When
phone as the primary phone (the phone prompted, say any of the
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
E142599 following:
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook. "PHONE"
Pairing Subsequent Phones "Call <name>"
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition "Call <name> at home"
and the radio. Put the transmission in park
(P). "Call <name> at work"
Note: To scroll through the menus, press "Call <name> on cell"
the up and down arrows on your audio
system. "Call <name> on other"
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's 1
Bluetooth feature before starting the "Dial"
search. See your device's manual if 2
necessary. "Go to handsfree"
2. Press the PHONE button. "Hold call <on> <off>"
2
3. Select the option for Bluetooth

2
Devices. "Join calls"
4. Press the OK button. 3
"Messages"
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process. 2
"Mute call"
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for "Phone help"
SYNC on your device.
2
7. When prompted on your phone's "Privacy on"
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided "Turn ringer <on> <off>"
by the system in the audio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is "Unmute call"
2
successful.
1
Depending on your phone's capability and See Dial table below.
your market, the system may prompt you 2
These commands are only valid while in
with questions, such as setting the current
a phone call.
phone as the primary phone (the phone 3
SYNC automatically tries to connect with See Messages table below.
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
407

SYNC™
Phone book commands: When you ask Making Calls

SYNC to access things such as a
phonebook name or number, the Press the voice button. When
requested information appears in the prompted, say:
E142599
display to view. Press the phone button
and say, "Call" to call the contact. 1. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial", then the
desired number.
"DIAL" 2. When the system confirms the number,
say, "Dial" again to initiate the call.
"411 (four-one-one)", "911" (nine-one-
one) To erase the last spoken digit, say,
"Delete". To erase all spoken digits, say,
"700" (seven hundred) "Clear".
"800" (eight hundred) To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
"900" (nine hundred) option in the audio display.
"Clear" (deletes all entered digits) Receiving Calls
"Delete" (deletes last set of digits When receiving a call, you can:
entered)
• Answer the call by pressing the accept
"Number <0-9>" call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the accept call option in the
"Plus" audio display.
"Pound" (#) • Reject the call by pressing the reject
call button on the steering wheel or by
"Star" (*) selecting the reject call option in the
audio display.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the • Ignore the call by doing nothing.
phone button or press any button on the
audio system. Phone Options during an Active
Call
"MESSAGES"
During an active call, you have more menu
"Listen to text message <#>" features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
"Forward text message" To access this menu, choose one of the
"Reply to text message" options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
"Call sender" from the following options:
408

SYNC™
Display Description and action
Mic. off Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone
on, select the option again.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call history Access your call history log.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the

Accessing Features through the phone menu.
Phone Menu 2. Select one of the options available
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
409

SYNC™
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.
Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
Call history Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
Speed dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages.
BT devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature

Text Messaging and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
When a new message arrives, an audible
SYNC allows you to receive, send, tone sounds and the audio display
download and delete text messages. The indicates you have a new message.
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have You have these options:
to take your eyes off the road. • Press the voice button and say, "Read
message".
Receiving a Text Message
• Select the listen option to have the
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. system read the message to you.
Your phone must support downloading text • Select the ignore option, or do nothing,
messages using Bluetooth to receive and the message goes into your text
incoming text messages. message inbox.
410

SYNC™
• Select the view option to open the text • If you select the More option, use the
message. Once selected, you have the arrow button to scroll through the
ability to have the message read to you, following options:
to view other messages, or to select
the More option.
Reply to sender Press the OK button to access, and then

scroll through a list of pre-defined
messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of
the message.
Forward msg. Press the OK button to forward the
message to anyone in your phonebook or
call history. You can also choose to enter a
number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and

Sending, Downloading and Deleting then press the OK button.
Your Text Messages
Choose from the following options:
1. Press the PHONE button.
New Allows you to send a new text message

based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
View Allows you to read the full message and, in
addition, provides the option to have the
system read the message to you. To go to
the next message, select the More option.
This allows you to reply to the sender, call
the sender or forward the message.
Delete Allows you to delete current text messages
from the system (not your cellular phone).
The audio display indicates when the
system has deleted all your text messages.
More... Allows you to delete all messages or
manually trigger a download of all unread
messages from your cellular phone.
411

SYNC™
Sending a Text Message Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
Note: You can only send a text message to
and selecting the text option from the audio
one recipient at a time.
display or by replying to a received message
1. Select the send option when the in the inbox.
desired selection highlights in the audio
display. Accessing Your Phone Settings
2. Select the confirmation option when These are phone-dependent features. Your
the contact appears. phone settings allow you to access and
3. Press the OK button again to confirm adjust features such as your ring tone, text
when the system asks if you want to message notification, modify your
send the message. A pre-defined phonebook and set up automatic
signature appears on each text download.
message. 1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
412

SYNC™
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.

Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to turn
the audible tone off or on.
Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
Phonebook preferences
Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
1. Press the PHONE button.

Bluetooth Devices 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you and then press the OK button.
to add, connect and delete devices as well 3. Select from the following options:
as set a phone as primary.
413

SYNC™
Phonebook preferences
Add Pair additional phones to the system.

1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-
digit PIN provided by the system in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. Depending on the functionality of your phone, the
system may prompt you with questions (such as if you
want to download your phonebook). Select either yes or
no to confirm your responses.
Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and

System Settings then press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button. 3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
414

SYNC™
Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's

Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 404).
Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
415

SYNC™
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
SERVICES (If Equipped)
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
In order for the following features to work, sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
your cellular phone must be compatible Notice later in this section for important
with SYNC. To check your phone's information.
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or that setting applies for all paired phones. If
www.syncmaroute.ca. 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of message plays or a display message (or
an emergency. icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
connects.
to and use certain applications such as
Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is Note: Every phone operates differently.
compatible). While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
These features may require activation.
using this feature.
Available AppLink enabled apps varies by
market. If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
911 Assist (If Equipped) belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
WARNINGS vehicle may be able to contact emergency
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on services by dialing 911 through a paired and
before a crash, the system will not connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
dial for help which could delay can learn more about the 911 Assist
response time, potentially increasing the feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it See Supplementary Restraints System
yourself. Dial emergency services (page 43). Important information about
immediately to avoid delayed response airbag deployment is in this chapter.
time which could increase the risk of See Roadside Emergencies (page 277).
serious injury or death after a crash. If you Important information about the fuel pump
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds shut-off is in this chapter.
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional. Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Always place your phone in a secure 1. Press the phone button to enter the
location in your vehicle so it does not phone menu.
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause 2. Scroll to select 911 Assist.
serious injury to someone or damage the 3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from Assist menu.
working properly. 4. Scroll to select between On or Off.
416

SYNC™
5. Press OK when the desired option Before making the call:

appears in the radio display. Set On or • SYNC provides a short window of time
Set Off appears in the display as (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
confirmation. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
Off selections include: attempts to dial 911.
• Off with reminder: Provides a display • SYNC says the following, or a similar
and voice reminder at phone message: "SYNC will attempt to call
connection at vehicle start. 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
• Off without reminder: Provides a your screen or press and hold the
display reminder only without a voice phone button on your steering wheel."
reminder at phone connection. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
To make sure that 911 Assist works makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
correctly: message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
• SYNC must be powered and working to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
properly at the time of the incident and provide your name, phone number and
throughout feature activation and use. location immediately, because not all 911
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on systems are capable of receiving this
before the incident. information electronically.
• You must pair and connect a 911 Assist May Not Work If
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC. • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone hardware sustains damage in a crash.
must have the ability to make and • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
maintain an outgoing call at the time system has no power.
of the incident. • The phones(s) previously paired or
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone connected to the system are thrown
must have adequate network coverage, from the vehicle
battery power and signal strength.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
in a territory in which 911 is the disclose to emergency services that your
emergency number. vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
In the Event of a Crash the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the of electronically or verbally disclosing to
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell 911 operators your vehicle location or other
phone sustains damage or loses its details about your vehicle or crash to assist
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC 911 operators to provide the most
will search for and try to connect to a appropriate emergency services. If you do
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will not want to disclose this information, do
then attempt to call the emergency not turn the feature on.
services.
417

SYNC™
SYNC Mobile Apps Accessing an App's Menu

The system enables voice and steering Once an app is running through SYNC,
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled press the right arrow button on the steering
smartphone apps. Once an app is running wheel control to access the app menu.
through AppLink, you can control main You can access various app features from
features of the app through voice here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
commands and steering wheel controls. down.
Note: You must pair and connect your Press the left arrow button on the steering
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. wheel control to exit the app menu.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port. To Access Using Voice Commands
Note: Android users need to connect the 1. Press the voice icon.
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. 2. When prompted, say "Mobile Apps".
Note: For information on available apps, 3. Say the name of the application after
supported smartphone devices and the tone.
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford 4. The app should start. While an app is
website. running through SYNC, you can press
Note: Make sure you have an active account the voice button and speak commands
for the app that you have downloaded. specific to the app, for example "Play
Some apps work automatically with no Playlist Road Trip". Say, "Help" to
setup. Other apps want you to configure discover the available voice
your personal settings and personalize your commands.
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
outside of your vehicle. The following voice commands are always
Note: AppLink is not available if your available:
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch • "Mobile apps": SYNC prompts you to
system. say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
• "List mobile apps": SYNC lists all of the
1. Press the MENU button to access the currently available mobile apps.
menu on-screen.
• "Find new apps": searches your
2. Select SyncApplications. connected mobile device for
3. Select Mobile Apps. SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
4. Scroll through the list of available • "<the name of an app>": At any time
applications and select a particular app you can say the name of a mobile app
or select Find New Apps. to start the mobile app on SYNC.
Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app • "<the name of an app> help": SYNC
cannot be found, make sure the required lists the available voice commands for
app is running on the mobile device. the specified app if the app is running
on SYNC.
418

SYNC™
App Permissions 2. Select SyncApplications > Mobile

Apps > App Settings.
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions 3. Select the specific app or All Apps.
individually. You can change a permission 4. If push notifications are supported, this
group status any time when not driving, by setting is listed. Select to enable or
using the settings menu. disable the feature as required.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example: In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle requires user consent to send and receive
information to the app such as, but not app authorization information and updates
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel using the data plan associated with the
consumption, engine speed, rain connected device.
sensor, odometer, VIN, external Data is sent to Ford in the United States
temperature, gear position, tire through the connected device. The
pressure, and head lamp status. information is encrypted and includes your
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
characteristic information such as, but usage statistics and debugging
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, information. Updates may take place
engine revolutions per minute, gear automatically.
position, braking events, steering wheel Note: You must enable mobile apps for
angle, and accelerator pedal position. each connected device the first time you
• To allow your vehicle to provide select a mobile app using the system.
location information, including: GPS
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
and speed.
not responsible for any additional charges
• To allow the app to send push you may receive from your service provider,
notifications using the vehicle display when your vehicle sends or receives data
and voice capabilities while running in through the connected device. This includes
a background state. Push notifications any additional charges incurred due to
may be particularly useful for news or driving in areas when roaming out of a home
location based apps. network.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
App Status
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for You can view the current status of an app
any damages or loss of privacy relating to in the settings menu.
usage of an app, or dissemination of any There are three possible statuses:
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
• Update Needed: The system has
provide to an app.
detected a new app requiring
Enabling and Disabling App authorization or a general permissions
Permissions Using the SYNC Menu update is required.
• Up-To-Date: No update is required.
1. Press the MENU button to access the
SYNC menu. • Updating: The system is trying to
receive an update.
419

SYNC™
If an update is required and you want to 3. You can now play music by saying any
request this update manually, for example of the appropriate voice commands.
when in a Wi-Fi hotspot, select Request See the media voice commands.
Update in the settings menu.
Using the System Menu
You can disable automatic updates by
selecting Disable Updates in the settings 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
menu. Doing so also disables the use of port.
Mobile Apps on SYNC. 2. Press the AUX button until an
"initializing" message appears in the
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR display. Depending on how many
media files are on your connected
MEDIA PLAYER device, an indexing message may
appear in the display. When indexing
You can access and play music from your is complete, the screen returns to the
digital music player over your vehicle's playback menu.
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also You can browse the files on the USB device
sort and play your music by specific in categories. Choose from the following:
categories, such as artist and album. • Play all
Note: The system is capable of indexing up • Playlists
to 15,000 songs. • Songs
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any • Artists
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
• Albums
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, • Genres
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. • Browse USB
Connecting Your Digital Media • Reset USB
Player to the USB Port What's Playing?
Note: If your digital media player has a
At any time during playback, you can press
power switch, make sure you switch it on
the voice button and ask the system what
before plugging it in.
is playing. The system reads the metadata
Using Voice Commands tags (if populated) of the current track.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB Media Voice Commands
port.
Press the voice button. When
2. Press the voice button and when prompted, say "USB" or "iPod",
prompted, say "USB" or "iPod". E142599 and then any of the following:
420

SYNC™
Command Description and action
"Pause" Pauses device playback.

"Play" Resumes device playback.
"Play album <album Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
name>" could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
song. This voice command is not available until indexing
is complete on your device.
"Play all" Play all media on the device from the first track to the last.
"Play artist <artist name>" Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
"Play genre <genre name>" Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
"Play playlist <playlist Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
name>" could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
"Play next track" Plays the next track on the current media.
"Play previous track" Plays the previous track on current media.
"Play similar music" Creates a playplan of similar genre to the one currently
playing.
"Play song <song name>" Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
"Repeat off"
"Repeat one" Repeats the current track.
"Shuffle all" Plays the current playplan in a random order. (Not all
devices support this command.)
"Shuffle off"
"What's playing?" or
"What's this?"
421

SYNC™
Examples of USB Commands To switch on Bluetooth audio, use the AUX

or SOURCE button. You can also press
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive the voice button and, when prompted, say,
ways to find and play a song using voice. "Bluetooth audio".
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to "BLUETOOTH AUDIO"
play this song: "Pause"
• Play song "Penny Lane".
"Play"
• Play "Penny Lane".
"Play next track"
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say: "Play previous track"
• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
• Play "Magical Mystery Tour". Media Menu Features
Bluetooth Audio The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
The system is also capable of playing shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
music from your cellular phone through reset the index of your USB devices.
Bluetooth.
1. Press AUX to select USB playback.
2. Select Options to enter the media
menu, and then any of the following:
422

SYNC™
Shuffle Choose to have the system play your music in random

order. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you
switch it off.
Repeat track Choose to have the system repeat the current track. Once
you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music You can play music similar to the current type of music in
the playlist. The system uses metadata information of
each track to compile a playlist, creates a new list of similar
tracks, and then begins playing that list. (Each track must
have populated metadata tags for this feature.)
With some devices, unpopulated metadata tags make
the tracks unavailable for voice recognition, play menu or
this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your
playing device in mass storage device mode, they are
available for voice recognition, play menu and this option.
The system places unknowns into any unpopulated
metadata tag.
Reset SYNC USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Accessing and viewing USB media

Accessing Your USB Song Library
"Browse all songs"
Using Voice Commands
"Browse album <name>"
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands. "Browse artist <name>"
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
"Browse genre <name>"
port.
2. Press the voice button and when "Browse playlist <name>"
prompted, say any of the following
commands: Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
Accessing and viewing USB media
port.
"Browse all albums" 2. Press the AUX button to select USB
playback.
"Browse all artists"
"Browse all genres"
"Browse all playlists"
423

SYNC™
3. Select Browse USB. If there are no media files, you have the following
media files to access, the display options:
indicates there is no media. If there are
Play all Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*
in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*
or MTP).
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
*
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by album.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
424

SYNC™
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and

then press the OK button.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
USB 2 (If Equipped) Voice Commands for Audio

Sources
Your vehicle may come equipped with an Your voice system allows you to change
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 will be audio sources with a simple voice
located at the front of the vehicle at the command.
bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 will
be located inside the storage compartment Press the voice button and say,
of the vehicle's center console. "Audio" when prompted, and
E142599 then any of the following
You can plug in an additional USB device commands:
into the second USB port. To switch
between the two connected USB devices
using voice commands, say, "USB1" or "AUDIO"
"USB2". Saying "USB" defaults to the most
recently played USB device. "AM"
Note: SYNC only supports one connected "AM1"
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a "AM autoset" or "AM2"
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it. "Bluetooth <audio> <stereo>"
"CD"
Line In Audio
"FM"
To access the Line In audio source, start a
voice session and say, "Line in" or "Aux". "FM1"
Bluetooth Devices and System "FM autoset" or "FM2"
Settings
"Line in"
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With "Radio"
Your Phone (page 406). "SAT <1-3>"
"Sirius"
425

SYNC™
"AUDIO" "RADIO"
"USB" "Preset <number>"

"What's playing" "Tune"
"Help" "Help"
Radio Voice Commands Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands

If you are listening to the radio, If you are listening to Sirius
press the voice button, and then satellite radio, press the voice
E142599 any of the commands in the E142599 button, and then any of the
following table. If you are not listening to commands in the following table. If you
the radio, press the voice button and, after are not listening to Sirius satellite radio,
the tone, say, "Radio", and then any of the press the voice button and, after the tone,
following voice commands: say, "Sirius", and then any of the following
voice commands:
"RADIO"
"SIRIUS"
"AM"
"<0-233>"
"AM1"
"SAT"
"AM autoset" or "AM2"
"SAT1"
"AM <530-1710>"
"SAT2"
"AM preset <number>"
"SAT3"
"AM [1] [autoset] preset <number>"
"Preset <number>"
"FM"
"SAT1 preset <number>"
"FM1"
"FM autoset" or "FM2"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"Tune"
"FM [autoset] preset <number>"
"Help"
"FM <radio frequency> HD <1-7>"
"FM1 preset <number>"
"FM2 preset <number>"
"HD <1-7>"
426

SYNC™
CD Voice Commands "CD"

If you are listening to a CD, press *
the voice button, and then any "Shuffle"
E142599 of the commands in the
"Shuffle CD"
following table. If you are not listening to
a CD, press the voice button and, after the "Shuffle folder"
tone, say, "CD", and then any of the
following voice commands: "Shuffle off"
*
You need to indicate to the system which
"CD" track or folder to repeat or shuffle when
using these commands.
"Pause"
"Play" SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
"Play next track"
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
"Play previous track" should questions arise, see the tables
below.
"Play track <1-512>"
Use the website at any time to check your
"Repeat"
* phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
"Repeat folder" access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
"Repeat off" www.SYNCMyRide.com,
"Repeat track"
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
The audio control settings Review your phone's manual

There is excessive back-
on your phone may be about audio adjustments.
ground noise during a phone
affecting SYNC perform-
call.
ance.
Try turning off the device,
During a call, I can hear the
This may be a possible resetting the device,
other person but they
phone malfunction. removing the device's
cannot hear me.
battery, then trying again.
SYNC is not able to down- This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
load my phonebook. feature. your phone's compatibility.
427

SYNC™
Phone issues

resetting the device or
removing the device's
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
This may be a possible the Add Contacts feature.
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
The system says Phonebook Remove any pictures or

Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on special ring tones associ-
phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. ated with the missing
empty or missing contacts. contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
I am having trouble
This is a phone-dependent Try turning off the device,
connecting my phone to
feature. resetting the device or
SYNC.
428

SYNC™
Phone issues
Try deleting your device

from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
This may be a possible your phone.
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
feature. your phone's compatibility.
Text messaging is not Try turning off the device,
working on SYNC. This may be a possible resetting the device or
phone malfunction. removing the device's
USB and media issues

resetting the device,
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
I am having trouble This may be a possible
connecting my device. device malfunction. Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
429

SYNC™
USB and media issues
Make sure you are not

SYNC does not recognize
leaving the device in your
my device when I turn on the This is a device limitation.
vehicle during very hot or
car.
cold temperatures.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your
feature. phone supports the
Bluetooth audio does not Bluetooth audio streaming
stream. function.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
The device is not connected.
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre Make sure that all song
information. details are populated.
SYNC does not recognize
The file may be corrupted.
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
The song may have copy-
change the USB settings
right protection, which does
from mass storage to MTP
not allow it to play.
class.
430

SYNC™
Voice command issues
Review the phone voice

commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand After pressing the voice icon,
what I am saying. wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
You may be speaking too
appears before saying a
soon or at the wrong time.
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
voice commands.
of the media section.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
You may be saying the by Prince and the Revolution
name differently than the or Prince and the New
way you saved it. Power Generation.
SYNC does not understand
Make sure you are saying the
the name of a song or artist.
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
The system may not be them. LOLA requires you to
reading the name the same say "L-O-L-A".
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
SYNC does not understand Review the Phone voice
or is calling the wrong commands at the beginning
voice commands.
contact when I want to of the phone section.
make a call.
431

SYNC™
Voice command issues
Make sure you are saying the

contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it. read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
The system works better if
The system may not be
you list full names, such as
reading the name the same
"Joe Wilson" rather than
way you are saying it.
"Joe".
Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special charac-
may be very short and ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
similar, or they may contain the system does not recog-
special characters. nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
Your phonebook contacts have to spell it. JAKE
may be in CAPS. requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Ensure you have a compat-

ible smartphone; an Android
AppLink Mobile Applica-
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
iPhone 3GS or newer with
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
find any applications.
ally, ensure your phone is
paired and connected to
432

SYNC™
AppLink issues
SYNC in order to find

AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
AppLink-enabled apps are your phone. Some apps
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on require you to register or
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device. login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
Sometime apps do not
restart the app. If the app
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
does not have that option,
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC,
you can also manually
cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for
"Force Close" the app by
example.
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
433

SYNC™
AppLink issues
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to

force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is There is a Bluetooth bug on Reset the Bluetooth on your
connected, my app(s) are some order versions of the phone by turning it off and
running, I restarted them, Android operating system then turning Bluetooth back
but I still cannot find any that may cause apps that on. If you are in your vehicle,
apps. were found on your previous SYNC should be able to
vehicle drive to not be found automatically re-connect to
again if you have not turned your phone if you press the
off Bluetooth. "Phone" button.
434

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Unplug the USB cable from

the phone, wait a moment,
My iPhone phone is and plug the USB cable
connected, my app is back in to the phone. After a
The USB connection to
running, I restarted the app few seconds, the app should
SYNC may need to be reset.
but I still cannot find it on appear in SYNC's Mobile
SYNC. Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
I have an Android phone. I
volume of the device by
found and started my media
The bluetooth volume on using the device's volume
app on SYNC, but there is no
the phone may be low. control buttons which are
sound or the sound is very
most often found on the
low.
side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
bluetooth ports apps can to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have SYNC" setting, disable that
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your setting in the app's settings
phone listed in SYNC's phone than the number of menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu. available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
435

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING

A B
F E D
G C
E161891
A Phone
B Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation)
C Climate (or Settings, if your vehicle is equipped with manual climate control)
D Settings (if your vehicle is equipped with automatic climate control)
E Home
F Information
G Entertainment
436

This system uses a four-corner strategy to Press to select any of the following:
provide quick access to several vehicle • Driver Settings
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cellular • Recirculated Air
phone, multimedia, climate control and • Auto
navigation system. The corners display any • Dual
active modes within those menus, such as
phone status or the climate temperature. • Passenger Settings
• A/C
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving. • Defrost
Note: Your system is equipped with a SETTINGS
feature that allows you to access and E142607
control audio features for 30 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors Press to select any of the following:
open). • Clock
PHONE • Display
Press to select any of the following: • Sound
• Phone • Vehicle
• Quick Dial • Settings
• Phonebook • Help
• History HOME
• Messaging Press to access your home
E142613
• Settings screen. Depending on your
NAVIGATION vehicle’s option package and software,
your screens may vary in appearance from
Press to select any of the following: the descriptions in this section. Your
• My Home features may also be limited depending on
your market. Check with an authorized
• Favorites
dealer for availability.
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest INFORMATION
• Emergency E142608
• Street Address Press to select any of the following:

• Intersection • Services
• City Center • Travel Link
• Map • Alerts
• Edit Route • Calendar
• Cancel Route • Apps
CLIMATE ENTERTAINMENT
437

Press to select any of the following: Using Your Steering Wheel

• AM Controls
• FM Depending on your vehicle and option
• SIRIUS package, you can use your steering wheel
controls to interact with the touchscreen
• CD
system. See Steering Wheel (page 73).
• USB
• BT Stereo Support
• SD Card The SYNC support team is available to
• Line In help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
for cleaning glasses. If dirt or fingerprints
are still visible, apply a small amount of In the United States, call: 1-800-392-3673.
alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.
alcohol onto the display. Do not use
Times are subject to change due to
detergent or any type of solvent to clean
holidays.
the display.
Safety Information
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option WARNING
package, you may also have these controls Driving while distracted can result in
on your bezel: loss of vehicle control, crash and
• Power: Switch the media or climate injury. We strongly recommend that
features off and on. you use extreme caution when using any
• VOL: Control the volume of playing road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
media. operation of your vehicle. We recommend
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally against the use of any hand-held device
would in media modes. while driving and encourage the use of
• Presets: Press and hold a numbered voice-operated systems when possible.
button to store a radio or Sirius station; Make sure you are aware of all applicable
press to recall the stored station." local laws that may affect the use of
• MEDIA: Touch repeatedly to see all
available media modes. The screen
does not change, but you see the • Do not attempt to service or repair the
media change in the lower left status system. See an authorized dealer.
bar. • Do not operate playing devices if the
• Eject: Eject a CD from the power cords or cables are broken, split
entertainment system. or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
• Climate Control: Control the
with the operation of pedals, seats,
temperature, fan speed or settings of
compartments or safe driving abilities.
the climate control system.
438

• Do not leave playing devices in your Speed-restricted Features

vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your Some features of this system may be too
device's user guide for further difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
information. so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• For your safety, some SYNC functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is • Screens crowded with information,
limited to when your vehicle is traveling such as Point of Interest reviews and
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). ratings, SIRIUS Travel Link sports
scores, movie times or ski conditions.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC. • Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Restricted features
Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone

Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook
contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent
phone call entries
System Functionality Editing the keypad code
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active
Wi-Fi and Wireless Editing wireless settings
Editing the list of wireless networks
Videos, Photos and Graphics Playing video
Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper
Text Messages Composing text messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
439

Restricted features
Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination

Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas
with lawful authority. Other parties may

Privacy Information seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
When you connect a cellular phone to Ford of Canada. For further privacy
SYNC, the system creates a profile within information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
your vehicle that links to that cellular Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
phone. This profile helps in offering you Directions and Information.
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile Using Voice Recognition
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and This system helps you control many
unread), and call history, including history features using voice commands. This
of calls when your cell phone was not allows you to keep your hands on the
connected to the system. In addition, if you wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
connect a media device, the system The system provides feedback through
creates and retains an index of supported audible tones, prompts, questions and
media content. The system also records a spoken confirmations depending on the
short development log of approximately situation and the chosen level of
10 minutes of all recent system activity. interaction (voice settings).
The log profile and other system data may
The system also asks short questions
be used to improve the system and help
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
diagnose any problems that may occur.
of your request or when there are multiple
The cellular profile, media device index, possible responses to your request.
and development log remain in your
When using voice commands, words and
vehicle unless you delete them and are
icons may appear in the lower left status
generally accessible only in your vehicle
bar indicating the status of the voice
when the cellular phone or media player
session (such as Listening, Success, Failed,
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
Paused or Try Again).
the system or your vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all How to Use Voice Commands with Your
stored information. System
System data cannot be accessed without Press the voice icon. After the
special equipment and access to your tone, speak your command
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor E142599 clearly.
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
440

• Speak naturally, without long pauses

These commands can be said at any time between words.
during a voice session • At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
"Cancel" the voice icon.
"Exit" Accessing a List of Available Commands
"Go back" • If you use the touchscreen, press the
"List of commands" Settings icon > Help > Voice
Command List.
"Main menu" • If you use the steering wheel control,
press the voice icon. After the tone,
"Next page"
speak your command clearly.
"Previous page"
Available voice commands
"What can I say?"
"Audio list of commands"
"Help"
"Bluetooth audio list of commands"
What Can I Say?
"Browse list of commands"
To access the available voice commands
for the current session, do one of the "CD list of commands"
following: "Climate control list of commands"
• During a voice session, press the Help
icon (?) in the lower left status bar of "List of commands"
the screen. *
"Navigation list of commands"
• Say, "What can I say?" for an
on-screen listing of the possible voice "Phone list of commands"
commands associated with your
current voice session. "Radio list of commands"
• Press the voice icon. After the tone, say, "SD card list of commands"
"Help" to hear a list of possible voice
commands. "Sirius satellite list of commands"
**
Helpful Hints *
"Travel link list of commands"
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from "USB list of commands"
open windows and road vibrations may
"Voice instructions list of commands"
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until
after the tone sounds and Listening
appears before saying a command. Any
command spoken prior to this does not
441

Available voice commands 2. Select from:

• Interaction Mode
"Voice settings list of commands"
• Confirmation Prompts
"Help" • Media Candidate Lists
*
This command is only available when • Phone Candidate Lists
your vehicle is equipped with the • Voice Control Volume.
navigation system, and the navigation To access these settings using voice
system SD card is in the card slot. commands:
**
This command is only available when 1. Press the voice icon. Wait for the
you have an active SIRIUS satellite radio prompt "Please say a command".
subscription. Another tone sounds to let you know
the system is listening.
Voice Settings
2. Say any of the following commands:
Voice settings allow you to customize the
level of system interaction, help and Voice settings using voice commands
feedback. The system defaults to standard
interaction that uses candidate lists and "Confirmation prompts off"
confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback. "Confirmation prompts on"
• Interaction Mode: Novice mode "Interaction mode advanced"
provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode "Interaction mode novice"
has less audible interaction and more
"Media candidate lists off"
tone prompts.
• Confirmation Prompts: The system "Media candidate lists on"
uses these short questions to confirm
your voice request. If turned off, the "Phone candidate lists off"
system simply makes a best guess as "Phone candidate lists on"
to what you requested. The system
may still occasionally ask you to "Help"
confirm settings.
• Phone and Media Candidate Lists: Using Voice Commands with the
Candidate lists are lists of possible Touchscreen Options
results from your voice commands. The Your voice system has a dual mode feature
system creates these lists when it has which allows you to switch between using
the same confidence level of several voice commands and making on-screen
options based on your voice command. selections. This is available only when the
To access these settings using the system displays a list of candidates
touchscreen: generated during a voice session. For
example, when entering in a street address
1. Press the Settings icon > Settings >
or trying to call a contact from the phone
Voice Control.
you paired to the system.
442

SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
A Clock
B Display
C Sound
D Vehicle
E Settings
F Help
Under this menu, you can set Note: If the battery has been disconnected,
your clock, access and adjust the your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal
E142607
display, sound and vehicle to update the clock. Once your vehicle
settings as well as access settings for acquires the signal, it may take a few
specific modes or the help feature. minutes for the update to display the correct
time.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date. E142607
Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you. 1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
443

From this screen, you can also make other • Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you
adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour to adjust screen dimming as the
mode, activate GPS time synchronization outside lighting conditions change from
and have the system automatically update day to night. This feature also allows
new time zones. you to adjust screen brightness using
the instrument panel dimming control.
You can also turn the outside air
temperature display off and on. It appears • Edit Wallpaper
at the top center of the touchscreen, next • You can have your touchscreen
to the time and date. display the default photo or upload
The system automatically saves any your own.
updates you make to the settings.
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Display Screen Wallpaper
You can adjust the touchscreen display Note: You cannot load photos directly from
through the touchscreen or by pressing the your camera. You must access the photos
voice button on your steering wheel either from your USB mass storage device
controls and when prompted, say, "Display or from an SD card.
settings". Note: Photographs with extremely large
Press the Settings icon > dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
Display, to access and make be compatible and appear as a blank
E142607
adjustments using the (black) image on the display.
touchscreen. Your system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
• Brightness allows you to make the
screen display brighter or dimmer. To access, press the Settings
icon > Display > Edit
• Auto DIM, when set to On, lets you use E142607
Wallpaper, and then follow the
the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature. system prompts to upload your
When set to Off, screen brightness photographs.
does not change.
• Mode allows you to set the screen to Only photographs that meet the following
a certain brightness or have the system conditions display:
automatically change based on the • Compatible file formats are as follows:
outside light level, or turn the display .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp
off.
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you
have the options of turning the • Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384
display's Auto Dim feature on or off
and changing the Auto Dim Manual
Sound
Offset feature. Press the Settings icon >
Sound, then select from the
E142607
following:
444

Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, US

Sound Only)
Bass Turn Automatic Reminders on and off

and set the mileage interval at which you
Midrange would like to receive the reports. Press ?
for more information on these selections.
Treble
When done making your selections, press
Set Balance and Fade Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you
want your report.
*
DSP You can find more information on Vehicle
* Health Report in this chapter. See
Occupancy Mode Information (page 476).
Speed Compensated Volume Camera Settings
*
Your vehicle may not have these sound This menu allows you to access settings
settings. for your rear view camera.
Vehicle Press the Settings icon >

Vehicle > Camera Settings,
E142607
Press the Settings icon > then select from the following
Vehicle, then select from the settings:
E142607
following:
• Enhanced Park Aids.
• Ambient Lighting. • Rear Camera Delay.
• Vehicle Health Report. You can find more information on the rear
• Camera Settings. view camera in another chapter. See Rear
• Enable Valet Mode. View Camera (page 206).
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) Enable Valet Mode
When you turn this feature on, ambient Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
lighting illuminates various places, such as No information is accessible until the
the footwells, with a choice of colors. To system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
access and make adjustments:
E142607
E142607 1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >

1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Enable Valet Mode.
Ambient Lighting. 2. Enter a four-digit pin twice, as
2. Touch the desired color. prompted.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or After you press Continue, the system locks
decrease the intensity. until you enter the PIN again.
To turn the feature on or off, press the Note: If the system locks, and you need to
power button. reset the PIN, please contact the Customer
Relationship Center.
445

United States: 1-800-392-3673 System

Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Press the Settings icon >
Settings Settings > System, then select
E142607
from the following:
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish

or French.
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
System Prompt Volume Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.
Touch Screen Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Panel Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices
made through the climate or audio system.
Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or
ABC format.
Install Applications Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Voice Control
Settings > Voice Control, then
E142607
select from the following:
446

Voice control
Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter-

action and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible
interaction and more tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts Have the system ask you short questions if it has not
*
clearly heard or understood your request.
Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at
your request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at
your request with these turned off.
Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.
*
Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system may occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
Media Player
Settings > Media Player, then
E142607
Media player
Autoplay When this feature is on, the system automatically switches

to the media source upon initial connection. This allows
you to listen to music during the indexing process. When
this feature is off, the system does not automatically
switch to the inserted media source.
Bluetooth Devices Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Index Bluetooth Audio When this feature is on, the system automatically indexes
Devices media on your connected Bluetooth device.
447

Media player
Gracenote Database Info This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote Management With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Cover Art Priority With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
cover art for your music files. This overrides any art from
your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.
Navigation
Settings > Navigation, then
E142607
Navigation
Map Preferences Switch breadcrumbs on and off.

Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Switch the Parking POI notification on and off.
Route Preferences Choose to have the system display the Shortest, Fastest
or most Ecological route first. If you set Always Use
Preferred Route to Yes, the system uses the selected
route type to calculate only one route to the desired
destination. Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route
selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on the preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low, medium or
high cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Navigation Preferences Have the system use guidance prompts.
448

Navigation
Have the system automatically fill in State/Province

information.
Traffic Preferences Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the
road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced
visibility.
Have the system switch on your radio for traffic
announcements.
Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.
Switch traffic alert notifications on and off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Avoid Areas Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on
planned navigation routes.
Phone
Settings > Phone, then select
E142607
from the following:
449

Phone
Bluetooth Devices Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as

save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on and off.
Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring
inside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text
message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring
inside your vehicle.
911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 476).
Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notification Select the type of notification for text messages - alert
tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Internet Data Connection If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile
with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings
or have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also

Wireless & Internet gain access the internet if you have a USB
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that mobile broadband connection inside your
creates a wireless network within your vehicle, your phone supports personal area
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices networking and if you park outside a
(such as personal computers or phones) wireless hotspot.
in your vehicle to speak to each other, Press the Settings icon >
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi Settings > Wireless &
E142607
Internet, then select from the
following:
450

Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on
and off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on for
connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previ-
ously stored wireless network. You can categorize by
alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You can
also choose to search for a network, connect to a network,
disconnect from a network, receive more information,
prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access
point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This
forms the local area network within your vehicle for things,
such as game playing, file transfer and internet browsing.
Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view
and change settings for using SYNC as the internet
gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view
recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
USB Mobile Broadband Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB
mobile broadband connection to access the internet. (You
must turn on your mobile broadband device on your
personal computer before connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area
for your USB mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile
broadband settings may not display if the device is already
on.) You can select the following: Country, Carrier, Phone
Number, User Name and Password.
Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving
you your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect,
set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a
registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Prioritize Connection Choose your connection methods and change them as
Methods needed. You can select to Change Order and have the
system either always attempt to connect using a USB
mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
451

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification

mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
Press the Settings icon > Help,
then select from the following:
E142607
E142626
Help
System Information Touchscreen system serial number

Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote Database Information and Library version
Software Licenses View the licenses for any software and applications
installed on your system.
Driving Restrictions Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is
moving.
911 Assist Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Informa-
tion (page 476).
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to
save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access
if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your
phonebook and then select the desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE
1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select appear
at the end of the 911 Assist call process.
Voice Command List View categorized lists of voice commands.
452

To access Help using the voice commands, say "Help". The system provides allowable
press the voice button, then, after the tone, voice commands for the current mode.
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
G
C
D
E
H
F
E161892
A AM 1 and AM AST
B FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST
C SIRIUS
D CD
E USB
F Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as SD Card, BT Stereo
and Line In
G These buttons change with the media mode you are in.
H Radio memory presets and CD controls.
Note: Some features may not be available Browsing Device Content

in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information. When listening to audio on a device, you
You can access these options using the can browse through other devices without
touchscreen or voice commands. having to change sources. For example, if
you are currently listening to audio on an
SD card, you can browse all the artists that
are stored on your USB device.
453

Press the voice icon on the Your voice system allows you to change
steering wheel. When prompted, audio sources with a simple voice
E142599 you can say: command. For example, if you are listening
to music on a USB device, then want to
switch to a satellite radio channel, simply
"BROWSE" within devices press the voice button on the steering
*
wheel controls and say the name of the
"Browse" SIRIUS station (such as, "the Highway").
**
The following voice commands are
"Browse <league> games" available at the top level of the voice
session no matter which current audio
**
"Browse <Sirius category> channels" source you are listening to (such as a USB
device or SIRIUS satellite radio).
"Browse SD card"
Note: This is only available when your
"Browse Sirius channel guide"
** MyFord Touch system language is set to
North American English.
"Browse USB"
Sample commands
"Help"
* "<87.9-107.9>"
If you only say, "Browse", you can then
say any commands in the following chart. "<530-1710>"
**
This command is only usable if you have *
"<Channel name>"
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio. "AM <530-1710>"
"BROWSE" "FM <87.9-107.9>"

**
"<League> Games"
* "Play [album] <name>"
**
"<Sirius category> channels"
* "Play [artist] <name>"
**
"SD card"
** "Play [genre] <name>"
**
"Sirius Channel Guide"
* "Play [playlist] <name>"
**
"USB"
** "Play [song] <name>"
"Help" "Play <name>"

* "Play <name (song or album)> by <artist
This command is only usable if you have
name>"
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB
mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"
section of this chapter.
454

Sample commands Options
* Sound Settings
"Sirius <0-223>"
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
*
"Sports games" • Bass
*
This command is only usable if you have • Midrange
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite • Treble
radio. • Balance and Fade
**
The commands that have [ ] around the • DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
word means that the word is optional. For • Occupancy Mode
example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this
is the same as the voice command, "Play • Speed Compensated Volume.
[artist] <name>". Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
AM/FM Radio
Set PTY for Seek/Scan
Touch the AM or FM tab to
listen to the radio. This allows you to select a category of
E142611 music you would like to search for. You can
To change between AM and FM presets, then choose to either seek or scan for the
just touch the AM or FM tab. stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display
Memory Presets
This allows you to view the information
Save a station by pressing and holding one
broadcast by FM stations.
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station. AST
Sound returns when finished.
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
HD Radio system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The
light on the button illuminates when the TAG Button
feature is on. HD Radio allows you to
receive radio broadcasts digitally, where This feature is available when HD Radio is
available, providing free, crystal-clear on, and allows you to tag a song to
sound. See HD Radio information later in download later. When you select On, TAG
this chapter. appears on-screen when HD Radio is
active. You can touch TAG to save the
Scan information of the song that is playing.
When you plug in your portable music
Touch this button to go to the next strong player, the information transfers, if
AM or FM radio station. The light on the supported by your device. When you are
button illuminates when the feature is on. connected to iTunes, the tags appear to
remind you of the songs you would like to
download. See HD Radio information later
in this chapter.
455

Direct Tune The multicast indicator appears in FM

mode (only) if the current station is
Touch this button to manually enter the broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
desired station number. Touch Enter when The highlighted numbers signify available
you are done. digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
programming status and is available in
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not analog and digital broadcasts. Other
available in all markets. multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your TAG allows you to save a song to
system has a special receiver that allows download later when you are on an
it to receive digital broadcasts (where acquired HD Radio station and the feature
available) in addition to the analog is on. To turn the feature on and use it:
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital 1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG
broadcasts provide a better sound quality Button > On.
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or 2. When you hear a song you like, touch
distortion. For more information, and a TAG.
guide to available stations and 3. The system automatically saves the
programming, please visit song's information and transfers it to
www.hdradio.com. your portable music player (if
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a supported) when you connect it to the
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, system. The system automatically
you may notice the following indicators on transfers the tag to your player (if
your screen: already connected) and a pop-up
confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your
portable music player, the tags appear
to you as a reminder. The system
allows you to tag up to approximately
100 songs. For a list of devices that
support tagging, see
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
E142616 www.syncmaroute.ca.
The HD Radio logo is grey when acquiring
a digital station, and then changes to
orange when digital audio is playing. When
this logo is available, you may also see Title
and Artist fields on-screen.
456

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you • Memory presets allow you to save an
can access the following functions: active channel as a memory preset.
• Scan allows you to hear a brief Touch and hold a memory preset slot
sampling of all available stations. This until the sound returns. There is a brief
feature still works when HD Radio mute while the radio saves the station.
reception is on, although it does not Sound returns when finished. When
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
see the HD logo appear if the station preset, the sound mutes before the
has a digital broadcast. digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
457

Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. The
multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in
recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.
direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. below.
*
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables No action required. This is
when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. normal behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under Radio Voice Commands

license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
If you are listening to the radio,
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
press the voice button on the
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks E142599 steering wheel controls. When
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
prompted, say any of the following
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
commands.
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be If you are not listening to the radio, press
changed, added or deleted at any time at the voice button and, after the tone, say
the station owner's discretion. "Radio", then any of the following
commands.
458

"RADIO"
"RADIO"
3
"Tune"
"<87.9-107.9>"
1
"Help"
"<87.9-107.9> HD" 1
If available.
"<530-1710>" 2
If you have said "Browse", see the
"AM" "Browse" chart later in this section.
3
"AM <530-1710>" If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.
"AM autoset"
"AM autoset preset <#>" "TUNE"
"AM preset <#>" "<530-1710>"
"Browse"
2 "<87.9-107.9>"
*
"FM" "<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
"FM <87.9-107.9>" "AM"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"

1 "AM <530-1710>"
"FM autoset" "AM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>" "AM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>" "AM preset <#>"
"FM 1" "FM"
"FM 1 preset <#>" "FM <87.9-107.9>"

*
"FM 2" "FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
"FM 2 preset <#>" "FM autoset"
"HD <#>"
1 "FM autoset preset <#>"
"Preset <#>" "FM preset <#>"
"Radio off" "FM 1"
"Radio on" "FM 1 preset <#>"
"Set PTY" "FM 2"

"FM 2 preset <#>"
459

"TUNE" Replay
*
Replay audio on the current channel. You
"HD <#>" can replay approximately 45 minutes of
audio as long as you have remained tuned
"Preset <#>"
to the current station. Changing stations
"Help" erases the previous audio.
* While in replay mode:
If available.
• Press and release the seek buttons to
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If hear the previous or next song.
Activated) • Press and hold the seek buttons to
reverse or fast forward in the current
Press the lower left corner of the track.
touchscreen, and then select the
E142611
SIRIUS tab. • Press play or pause to play or pause
the audio.
Memory Presets • Press Replay to return to live audio if
you have been using the feature to
Save a channel by pressing and holding replay audio.
one of the memory preset areas. There is
a brief mute while the radio saves the Scan
channel. Sound returns when finished. Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
ALERT of channels.
Save the current song, artist, or team as a Options

favorite. Touch this button to view and adjust
If you are listening to music, you can save various media settings.
the song or artist, so the system can alert
you when they are playing on a satellite Sound Settings
radio channel. If you are listening to a Touch this button to adjust settings for:
sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so the system can alert you when • Bass
they are playing on a satellite radio • Midrange
channel. You can also edit alerts or turn • Treble
alerts on or off.
• Balance and Fade
When an alert appears on the screen, you
can choose to tune to the channel, cancel • DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
the alert or turn off alerts. • Occupancy Mode
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert • Speed Compensated Volume.
feature on all channels. Ford Motor Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
Company shall not be responsible for Alert sound settings.
feature variation.
460

Set Category for Seek/Scan SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information

This allows you to select a category of Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
music you would like to search for. You can to change, rearrange, add or delete
then choose to either seek or scan for the programming including canceling, moving
stations playing that category. or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Parental Lockout Ford Motor Company shall not be
This allows you to lock and unlock responsible for any such programming
channels, change or reset your PIN or changes.
unlock all channels. To use this feature,
you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts
This feature allows you turn alerts on and
off.
E142593
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
SIRIUS requires this number when subscription-based satellite radio service
communicating with you about your that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
account. news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
Direct Tune SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
Touch this button to manually enter the hardware and a limited subscription term
desired satellite channel number. Touch that begins on the date of sale or lease of
Enter when you are done. your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
Browse For more information on extended
Touch this button to view a list of all subscription terms (a service fee is
available stations. Scroll to see more required), the online media player and a
categories. Touch the station you want to list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
listen to. other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
Touch Skip if you want to skip this www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
channel. 1-888-539-7474.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to Note: This receiver includes the eCos
listen to this channel. real-time operating system. eCos is
Touch Title or Artist to see song and published under the eCos License.
artists on other stations.
461

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number is on the System Information Screen (SR
(ESN) ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your
You need your ESN to activate, modify or ESN, touch the bottom left corner of the
track your satellite radio account. The ESN touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS > Options.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system may mute.
Troubleshooting tips
Radio display Cause Action
Acquiring... Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS System There is an internal module If this message does not
Failure. or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel. The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel. Your subscription does not Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
462

Troubleshooting tips
Radio display Cause Action
No Signal. The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
Updating. Update of channel No action required. The
programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS Your satellite service is no Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
1-888-539-7474. longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
None found. Check Channel All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
Guide. selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated. SIRIUS has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
"SIRIUS"
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands "SAT 1"
If you are listening to SIRIUS "SAT 1 Preset <#>"
satellite radio, press the voice
E142599 button on the steering wheel "SAT 2"
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands. "SAT 2 preset <#>"
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite "SAT 3"
radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "SIRIUS", then any of the "SAT 3 preset <#>"
following commands. "Sirius <0-223>"
"Sirius off"
"SIRIUS"
"Sirius on"
"<Channel name>"
*
"Preset <#>" "Sports game"
"SAT"
"SAT preset <#>"
463

"SIRIUS" CD
** Press the lower left corner of the
"Tune" touchscreen, and then select the
E142611
"Help" CD tab.
*
If you have said "Sports game", see the You can also advance and reverse the
current track or current folder, if applicable.
following "Sports game" chart.
**
If you have said "Tune", see the following Repeat
"Tune" chart. Touch this button to repeat the currently
playing track, all tracks on the disc or turn
"SPORTS GAME" the feature off if already on.
"Tune to the <college name> game" Shuffle
"Tune to the <team city> game" Touch this button to play the tracks or
entire albums in random order, or turn the
"Tune to the <team city> <team name> feature off if already on.
game"
"Tune to the <team name> game" Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
"Help"
of all available tracks.
"TUNE" More Info
"<Channel Name>" Touch this button to see disc information.
"Preset <#>" Options
"SAT" Sound Settings
"SAT 1" Touch this button to adjust settings for:

• Bass
"SAT 1 preset <#>"
• Midrange
"SAT 2" • Treble
"SAT 2 preset <#>" • Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
"SAT 3"
• Occupancy Mode
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
• Speed Compensated Volume.
"Sirius <0-223>" Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
"Help"
Compression
Touch this button to turn the compression
feature on and off.
464

Browse SD Card Slot and USB Port

Touch this button to look through all SD Card
available CD tracks.
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
CD Voice Commands To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
If you are listening to a CD, press pull the card to remove it as this could cause
the voice button on the steering damage.
E142599 wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands. Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 488).
If you are not listening to a CD, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say "CD",
then any of the following commands.
"CD"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
E175710
"Play track <1-512>"
The SD card slot is located in the center
"Repeat" console. To access and play music from
*
your device, press the lower left corner of
"Repeat folder" the touchscreen.
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"Shuffle"
*
"Shuffle CD"
*
"Shuffle folder"
E142620
"Shuffle off"
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
"Help"
*
This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
465

USB Port More Info

Touch this button to see disc information
such as current track, artist name, album
and genre.
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
Sound Settings allows you to adjust
settings for:
• Bass
E175711 • Midrange
• Treble
The USB ports are located in the center
console. To access and play music from • Balance and Fade
your device, press the lower left corner of • DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
the touchscreen. • Occupancy Mode
This feature allows you to plug in media • Speed Compensated Volume.
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
support this feature. sound settings.
Media Player Settings allows you to
Playing Music from Your Device select more settings, which is under Media
Note: The system is capable of indexing up Player. See Settings (page 443).
to 30,000 songs. Device Information displays software
Insert your device and select the and firmware information about the
SD Card or USB tab once the currently connected media device.
E142611
system recognizes it. You can Update Media Index indexes your device
then select from the following options: when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (such as
Repeat adding or removing tracks) to make sure
you have the latest voice commands
This feature replays the currently playing available for all media on the device.
song or album.
Browse
Shuffle
This feature allows you to view the
Touch this button to play music on the contents of the device. It also allows you
selected album or folder in random order. to search by categories, such as genre,
artist or album.
Similar Music
If you want to view song information such
This feature allows you to choose music as Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and
similar to what is currently playing. Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
466

You can also touch What’s Playing to "USB" or "SD CARD"

hear how the system pronounces the
current band and song. This can be helpful "Play podcast <name>"
when using voice commands to make sure
the system correctly plays your request. "Play podcast episode <name>"
SD Card and USB Voice Commands "Play similar music"
If you are listening to a USB "Play song <name>"

device or an SD card, press the **
E142599 voice button on the steering "Play TV show <name>"
wheel controls. When prompted, say any **
of the following commands. "Play TV show episode <name>"
If you are not listening to a USB device or **
"Play video <name>"
an SD card, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card", **
then any of the following commands. "Play video podcast <name>"
**
"Play video podcast episode <name>"
"USB" or "SD CARD"
**
"Play video playlist <name>"
*
"Browse"
"Previous"
"Next"
"Repeat all"
"Pause"
"Repeat off"
"Play"
"Repeat one"
"Play album <name>"
"Shuffle"
"Play all"
"Shuffle album"
"Play artist <name>"
"Shuffle off"
"Play audiobook <name>"
"What's this?"
"Play author <name>"
"Help"
"Play composer <name>" *
If you have said you would like to browse
"Play folder <name>" your USB or SD card, the system prompts
you to specify what you would like to
"Play genre <name>"
browse. When prompted, see the following
** "Browse" chart.
"Play movie <name>" **
These commands are only available in
**
"Play music video <name>" USB mode and are device-dependent.
"Play playlist <name>"
467

"BROWSE"
"BROWSE"
*
"TV show <name>"
"Album <name>"
*
"All albums" "Video <name>"
"All artists" "Video playlist <name>"

*
"All audiobooks" *
"Video podcast <name>"
"All authors"
"Help"
"All composers" *
This command is only available in USB
"All folders" mode and is device-dependent.
"All genres" Supported Media Players, Formats
* and Metadata Information
"All movies"
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
*
"All music videos" digital media player, including iPod,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
"All playlists" most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
"All podcasts"
It is also able to organize your indexed
"All songs" media from your playing device by
*
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
"All TV shows" descriptive software identifiers embedded
*
in the media files, provide information
"All video playlists" about the file.
* If your indexed media files contain no
"All video podcasts" information embedded in these metadata
* tags, SYNC may classify the empty
"All videos" metadata tags as Unknown.
"Artist <name>"
Bluetooth Audio
"Audiobook <name>"
Your system allows you to stream audio
"Author <name>" over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular
"Composer <name>" phone.
"Folder <name>" To access, press the lower left
corner on the touchscreen, then
"Genre <name>" E142611
select the BT Stereo tab.
"Playlist <name>"
"Podcast <name>"
468

Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands Your auxiliary input jack allows you to play
music from your portable music player over
If you are listening to a Bluetooth your vehicle's speakers. The jack is located
audio device, press the voice in your center console.
E142599 button on the steering wheel
control. When prompted, say "Next song", Press the lower left corner of the
"Pause", "Play" or "Previous song". touchscreen, and then select Line In.
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
device, press the voice button and, after make sure that your portable music player
the tone, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play" is designed for use with headphones and
or "Previous song". that it is fully charged. You also need an
audio extension cable with stereo male
1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at
Line In both ends.
WARNINGS 1. Switch off the engine, radio and
Driving while distracted can result in portable music player. Set the parking
loss of vehicle control, crash and brake and put the transmission in
injury. We strongly recommend that position P.
you use extreme caution when using any 2. Attach one end of the audio extension
device that may take your focus off the cable to the headphone output of your
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe player and the other end into the
operation of your vehicle. We recommend adapter in one of the jacks inside the
against the use of any handheld device center console.
voice-operated systems when possible. 3. Press the lower left corner on the
Make sure you are aware of all applicable touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM
local laws that may affect the use of station or a CD (if there is a CD already
electronic devices while driving. loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your 5. Turn the portable music player on and
portable music player while your adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
vehicle is moving. 6. Press the lower left corner on the
Store the portable music player in a touchscreen. Select the Line In tab.
secure location, such as the center (You should hear audio from your
console or the glove box, when your portable music player although it may
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may be low.)
become projectiles in a crash or sudden 7. Adjust the sound on your portable
stop, which may increase the risk of serious music player until it reaches the level
injury. The audio extension cable must be of the FM station or CD by switching
long enough to allow the portable music back and forth between the controls.
player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
469

Troubleshooting • If the music sounds distorted at lower

listening levels, turn the portable music
• Do not connect the audio input jack to player volume down. If the problem
a line level output. The jack only works persists, replace or recharge the
correctly with devices that have a batteries in the portable media player.
headphone output with a volume
control. • Control the portable media player in
the same manner when used with
• Do not set the portable music player's headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
volume level higher than is necessary does not provide control (such as Play
to match the volume of the CD or FM or Pause) over the attached portable
radio as this causes distortion and media player.
reduces sound quality.
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
A Phone
B Quick Dial
C Phonebook
D History
E Messaging
F Settings
470

Hands-free calling is one of the main The first thing you must do to use the
features of SYNC. Once you pair your phone features of SYNC is to pair your
phone, you can access many options using Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with
the touchscreen or voice commands. While SYNC. This allows you to use your phone
the system supports a variety of features, in a hands-free manner.
many are dependent on your cellular Note: Put the transmission in park (P).
phone’s functionality. Switch on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
At a minimum, most cellular phones with 1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left
Bluetooth wireless technology support the corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNC
following functions: appears on the screen, and instructs
• Answering an incoming call. you to begin the pairing process from
• Ending a call. your device.
• Using privacy mode. 2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
and that your cellular phone is in the
• Dialing a number.
proper mode. See your phone’s manual
• Redialing. if necessary.
• Call waiting notification. Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
• Caller ID. appears on your device.
Other features, such as text messaging 3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook device, it does not support Secure
download, are phone-dependent features. Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
To check your phone’s compatibility, see displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the
your phone’s user manual and visit next step.
www.SYNCMyRide.com, 4. When prompted on your phone’s
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or display, confirm that the PIN provided
www.syncmaroute.ca. by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cellular phone.
Pairing Your Phone for the First
Time 5. The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
WARNING SYNC may prompt you with more phone
Driving while distracted can result in options. For more information on your
loss of vehicle control, crash and phone's capability, see your phone's
injury. We strongly recommend that manual and visit the website.
device that may take your focus off the Pairing Subsequent Phones
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe Note: Put the transmission in park (P).
operation of your vehicle. We recommend Switch on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
while driving and encourage the use of 1. Press the Phone corner of the
voice-operated systems when possible. touchscreen > Settings > BT Devices
Make sure you are aware of all applicable > Add Device.
471

2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
and that your cellular phone is in the it as a missed call.
proper mode. See your phone’s manual
if necessary. Phone Menu Options
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN Press the top left corner on your
appears on your device. touchscreen to select from the following
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your options:
device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN Phone
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the Touch this button to access the on-screen
next step. numerical pad to enter a number and place
4. When prompted on your phone’s a call. During an active call, you can also
display, confirm that the PIN provided choose to:
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed • Mute the call.
on your cellular phone.
• Put the call on hold.
5. The display indicates when the pairing • Turn on the privacy feature.
is successful.
• Join two calls.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your • End the call.
phone's capability, see your phone's Quick Dial
manual and visit the website.
Set up favorite contacts from your
Making Calls phonebook or history folder.
Press the voice button on your Phonebook
steering wheel controls. When
E142599 prompted, say, "Call <name>" Touch this button to access and call any
or say "Dial", then the desired number. contacts in your previously downloaded
phone book. The system places the entries
To end the call or exit phone in alphabetical categories summarized at
mode, press and hold the phone the top of the screen.
E165966 button.
To switch on contact picture settings, if
your device supports this feature, press
Receiving Calls Phone > Settings > Manage Phonebook
During an incoming call, an audible tone > Download photos from Phonebook
sounds. Call information appears in the > On.
display if it is available.
History
Accept the call by pressing
Accept on the touchscreen or After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
E165966 by pressing the phone button on phone to SYNC, you can access any
your steering wheel controls. previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to your
Reject the call by pressing Reject on the Favorites or to Quick Dial.
touchscreen or by pressing and holding the
phone button on your steering wheel
controls.
472

Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Composing a Text Message

If your phone does not support downloading
call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
track of calls made with the SYNC system. It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Messaging Note: Downloading and sending text
Send text messages using your messages using Bluetooth are
touchscreen. See Text messaging later phone-dependent features.
in this section. 1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
Settings
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.
Touch this button to access various phone 3. Enter a phone number or choose from
settings, such as turning Bluetooth on and your phonebook.
off, managing your phonebook and more.
See Phone settings later in this section. 4. You can select from the following
options:
Text Messaging • Send, which sends the message as it
is.
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are • Edit Text, which allows you to
phone-dependent features. customize the pre-defined message or
create a message on your own.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available You can then preview the message, verify
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over the recipient as well as update the
3 mph (5 km/h). message list.
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your phone. Text message options
You can send and receive text messages I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, such I just left, I’ll be there soon.
as LOL. Can you give me a call?
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu. I’m on my way.
2. Select Messaging. I’m running a few minutes late.
3. Choose from the following: I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
• Listen (speaker icon). early.
• Dial. I’m outside.
• Send Text.
I’ll call you when I get there.
• View.
• Delete. OK
Yes
No
473

Text message options 911 Assist
Thanks Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature.

See Information (page 476).
Stuck in traffic.
Phone Ringer
Call me later.
Select the ring tone you want to hear when
LOL you receive a call. Choose from possible
system ring tones, your currently paired
Receiving a Text Message phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech
or a silent notification.
Note: If you select View and your vehicle
is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system Text Message Notification
offers to read the message to you instead Select a text message notification, if
of allowing you to view it while driving. supported by your phone. Choose from
When a new message arrives, an audible possible system alert tones,
tone sounds and the screen displays a text-to-speech or silent.
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if
supported by your phone. You can press: Internet Data Connection
• View to view the text message. If your phone is compatible, use this screen
• Listen for SYNC to read the message to adjust your internet data connection.
to you. Select to make your connection profile
with the personal area network or to switch
• Dial to call the contact. off your connection. You can also choose
• Ignore to exit the screen. to adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when
Phone Settings roaming or query on connect. Press ? for
Press Phone > Settings. more information.
Bluetooth Devices Manage Phonebook
Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add Touch this button to access features such
or delete a device, as well as save it as a as automatic phonebook download,
favorite. re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete
Bluetooth or upload your phonebook.
Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on. Roaming Warning
Do Not Disturb Touch this button to have the system alert

you when your phone is in roaming mode.
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go
directly to your voice mail and not ring in Phone Voice Commands
the vehicle. When this feature is on, text
message notifications do not ring inside Press the voice button on the
the cabin either. steering wheel controls. When
E142599 prompted, say any of the
following commands:
474

"PHONE"
"PHONE"
"Pair phone"
"Call"
*
"Privacy on"
"Call <name>"
"Read text message"
"Call <name> at home"
"Reply to text messages"
"Call <name> at work"
"Turn ringer off"
"Call <name> on cell"
"Turn ringer on"
"Call <name> on other"
*
"Call voicemail" "Unmute call"
"Dial" "Help"
*
"Do not disturb off" This command is only available during an
active call.
"Do not disturb on" **
If you say "Messages", see the following
"Forward text messages" "Messages" chart for additional
*
commands.
"Go to hands free"
* "MESSAGES"
"Hold call off"
"Call"
*
"Hold on"
"Forward text messages"
*
"Join calls" "Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text message <#>" "Listen to text messages"
"Listen to text messages" "Reply to text messages"
**
"Messages" "Help"
*
"Mute call"
475

INFORMATION
A
B
C
D
E
E161889
A SYNC Services
B Sirius Travel Link
C Alerts
D Calendar
E SYNC Applications
Under the Information menu, you can SYNC Services (If Equipped,
access features such as: United States Only)
• SYNC Services
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
• Sirius Travel Link
and model year and may require a
• Alerts subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
• Calendar directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
• SYNC Applications
Motor Company reserves the right to change
If your vehicle is equipped with or discontinue this product service at any
Navigation, press the time without prior notification or incurring
E142608
Information button to access any future obligation.
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
476

Note: SYNC Services requires activation Note: When you connect, the service uses
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to GPS technology and advanced vehicle
register and check your eligibility for sensors to collect your vehicle's current
complimentary services. Standard phone location, travel direction and speed to help
and message rates may apply. Subscription provide you with the directions, traffic
may be required. You must also have the reports, or business searches you request.
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled Further, to provide the services you request,
cellular phone paired and connected to the for continuous improvement, the service
system in order to connect to, and use, may collect and record call details and voice
SYNC Services. See Phone (page 470). communications. For more information, see
Note: This feature does not function SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
properly if you have enabled caller ID www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure Ford or its service providers to collect your
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID vehicle travel information or other
before using SYNC Services. information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible service.
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
to follow the suggested directions. Any sensors, integrated GPS technology and
navigation features provided are only an aid. comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing precise turn-by-turn directions, business
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route search, news, sports, weather and more.
suggestions if doing so would result in an For a complete list of services, or to learn
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would Connecting to SYNC Services Using
be directed into an area that you consider Voice Commands
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions. E142599
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow
the voice prompts to request the
desired service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
477

Connecting to SYNC Services Using addresses by street address or by

the Touchscreen name or specific street intersections.
Operator Assist is a feature of your
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC Services subscription. For more
Navigation, press the information on Operator Assist, visit
E142608
Information button. www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
If your vehicle is not equipped with 2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Navigation, press the green tab on your Destination. After the route download
touchscreen. is finished, the phone call automatically
ends.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate
an outgoing call to SYNC Services If your vehicle is not equipped with
using your phone. Navigation:
2. Once connected, follow the voice • Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
prompts to request your desired information display, in the status bar
Service, such as "Traffic" or of your touchscreen system and on the
"Directions". You can also say, "What SYNC Services screen. You also receive
are my choices?" to receive a list of driving instructions from audible
available services from which to prompts.
choose. • When on an active route, you can
3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services select Route Summary or Route
main menu or for help, say, "Help". Status using the touchscreen controls
or voice commands to view the Route
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions Summary Turn List or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice
1. When connected to SYNC Services, guidance on or off, cancel the route or
say "Directions" or "Business search". update the route.
To find the closest business or type of
business to your current location, just If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
say "Business search" and then if you want the route updated. Just say,
"Search near me". If you need further "Yes" when prompted and the system
assistance in finding a location you can delivers a new route to your vehicle.
say "Operator" at any time within a If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
Directions or Business search to speak SYNC Services downloads your requested
with a live operator. The system may destination to the navigation system. The
prompt you to speak with an operator navigation system then calculates the
when it has difficulty matching your route and provides driving instructions.
voice request. The live operator can See Navigation (page 488).
assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
478

SYNC Services quick tips
Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide

quicker access to your most used or favorite information.
You can save address points, such as work or home. You
can also save favorite information like sports teams, such
as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more
about personalization by logging onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while connected to
SYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio
clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-
enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number). You can pair and connect your
phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)

SYNC Services Voice Commands
When a route has been WARNING
downloaded (non-navigation Driving while distracted can result in
E142599 systems), press the voice button loss of vehicle control, crash and
on the steering wheel controls. When injury. We strongly recommend that
prompted, say any of the following you use extreme caution when using any
commands: device that may take your focus off the
"SERVICES" against the use of any handheld device
"Cancel route" while driving and encourage the use of
"Navigation voice off" Make sure you are aware of all applicable
"Navigation voice on" electronic devices while driving.
"Next turn"
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
"Route status" vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
"Route summary" SD card slot.
"Services" Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
"Update route"
"Help"
479

Note: A paid subscription is required to Weather

access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more Touch this button to view the nearby
information. weather, current weather, or the five day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and to see the weather map, which can show
click on Coverage map and details for a storms, radar information, charts and
complete listing of all traffic areas covered winds. Select Area to select from a listing
by Sirius Travel Link. of weather locations.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
Sports Info
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles. Touch this button to view scores and
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link, schedules from a variety of sports. You can
it can help you locate the best gas prices, also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, access. The score automatically refreshes
view the current weather map, get when a game is in progress.
accurate ski conditions and see scores to
Ski Conditions
current sports games.
If your vehicle is equipped with Touch this button to view ski conditions
Navigation, touch the I for a specific area.
E142608
(Information) button to access
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner Press the voice button on the
of the touchscreen with the green tab. steering wheel controls. When
E142599 prompted, say any of the
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby following commands:
Touch these buttons to identify traffic
incidents on your route, nearby your "SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places, if programmed. "5-day weather forecast"
Fuel Prices "Fuel prices"
Touch this button to view fuel prices at "Movie listings"

stations close to your vehicle’s location or *
on an active navigation route. "Sports headlines"
*
Movie Listings "Sports schedules"
Touch this button to view nearby movie "Sports scores"
*
theaters and their show times, if available.

"Traffic"
"Weather"
480

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK" Additional sports-related voice

commands
"Weather map"
"College football schedule"
"Help"
*
"College football scores"
If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports
schedules" or "Sports scores", you can "Golf headlines"
then say any of the commands in the
"Golf leaderboard"
following chart.
"Golf schedule"
Sports-related commands
"MLS headlines"
"Baseball"
"MLS schedule"
"College basketball"
"MLS scores"
"College football"
"Motor sports headlines"
"Golf"
"Motor sports order"
"MLS"
"Motor sports schedule"
"My teams"
"My team headlines"
"NBA"
"My teams schedule"
"NFL"
"My teams scores"
"NHL"
"NBA headlines"
"WNBA"
"NBA schedule"
"Help"
"NBA scores"
Additional sports-related voice "NFL headlines"

commands "NFL schedule"
"Baseball headlines" "NFL scores"
"Baseball schedule" "NHL headlines"
"Baseball scores" "NHL schedule"
"College basketball headlines" "NHL scores"
"College basketball schedule" "WNBA headlines"
"College basketball scores"
"College football headlines"
481

Additional sports-related voice 911 Assist (If Equipped)

commands
WARNINGS
"WNBA schedule" Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
"WNBA scores"
dial for help, which could delay
"Help" response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Alerts Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
If your vehicle is equipped with yourself. Dial emergency services
Navigation, touch the I immediately to avoid delayed response
E142608
(Information) button to access time, which could increase the risk of
these features. If your vehicle is not serious injury or death after a crash. If you
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the touchscreen with the green tab. of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any
of the following services: Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
• View the complete message. become a projectile or damaged in
• Delete the message. a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
• Delete All messages. injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from
This screen displays any system messages working properly.
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
messages by turning the information icon set on prior to the incident.
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white. Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Calendar Notice later in this section for important
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
E142608
(Information) button to access that setting applies for all paired phones. If
these features. If your vehicle is not 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner message plays or a display message (or
of the touchscreen with the green tab. icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
Press Calendar. You can view the current connects.
calendar by day, week or month. Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
482

If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee • You must pair and connect a
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
where fitted or activates the fuel pump phone to SYNC.
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
be able to contact emergency services by must have the ability to make and
dialing 911 through a paired and connected maintain an outgoing call at the time
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn of the incident.
more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or must have adequate network coverage,
www.syncmaroute.ca. battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
See Supplementary Restraints System
and be located in the United States,
(page 43). Important information
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
regarding airbag deployment is in this
the emergency number.
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 277). In the Event of a Crash
Important information regarding the fuel
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
Setting 911 Assist On trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to
contact emergency services if 911 Assist
If your vehicle is equipped with triggers. If a connected phone sustains
Navigation, touch the i damage or loses connection to SYNC,
E142608
(Information) button to access SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
these features. If your vehicle is not to, any available previously paired phone
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner and tries to make the call to 911.
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Before making the call:
Touch Apps > 911 Assist, then select On. • SYNC provides a short window of time
(approximately 10 seconds) to cancel
You can also access 911 Assist
the call. If you fail to cancel the call,
by:
E142607 SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings • SYNC says the following, or a similar
> Phone > 911 Assist, or message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911 your screen or press and hold the
Assist. phone button on your steering wheel."
To make sure that 911 Assist works If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
properly: makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
• SYNC must be powered and working message plays for the 911 operator, and
properly at the time of the incident and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
throughout feature activation and use. to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on provide your name, phone number and
prior to the incident. location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
483

911 Assist May Not Work If: Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
hardware sustains damage in a crash. is no fee or subscription associated with
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
system has no power. to use this feature.
• The phones(s) previously paired or Note: This feature may not function
connected to the system are thrown properly if you have enabled caller ID
from the vehicle. blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
911 Assist Privacy Notice Report Privacy Notice.
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
disclose to emergency services that your your vehicle, you may not be able to create
vehicle has been in a crash involving the a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
deployment of an airbag or activation of odometer has reached 200 miles.
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
of electronically or verbally disclosing to apply when making a report.
911 operators your vehicle location or other Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
details about your vehicle or crash to assist your report preferences at
911 operators to provide the most www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
appropriate emergency services. If you do you can request a Vehicle Health Report
not want to disclose this information, do (inside your vehicle). Return to your
not turn the feature on. account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
Vehicle Health Report (If to remind you automatically to run reports
Equipped, United States Only) at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
WARNING
The system allows you to check your
Always follow scheduled vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
maintenance instructions, regularly diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair Report contains valuable information, for
for any damage or problem you suspect. example:
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and • Vehicle diagnostic information.
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report • Scheduled maintenance.
only monitors certain systems • Open recalls and Field Service Actions.
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status • Items noted during vehicle inspections
of any other system, (such as brake lining by your authorized dealer that still need
wear). Failure to perform scheduled servicing.
maintenance and regularly inspect your Making a Report
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury. If you want to run a report by
using the touchscreen, touch
E142608
Apps > Vehicle Health Report.
484

To run a report by voice information, do not run the feature or set

command, press the voice up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
E142599 button on the steering wheel www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
and, when prompted, say "Vehicle health www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
report". Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report, CLIMATE
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your Touch the lower right corner on the
report request) and diagnostic information touchscreen to access your climate control
about your vehicle. Certain versions or features. Depending on your vehicle line
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also and option package, your climate screen
collect more vehicle information. Ford may may look different from this screen.
use your vehicle information it collects for Note: You can switch temperature units
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
your cellular phone number or vehicle Settings (page 443).
E212081
A Power: Touch the button to turn the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
B Passenger settings:
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
485

Touch DUAL to turn separate passenger side temperature controls off and on.
When you turn off DUAL, the passenger side temperature changes to match
the driver side temperature.
Note: The passenger side temperature and the DUAL indicator automatically
turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature control.
C Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
Note: When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically, all the fan
speed indicators turn off.
D Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculated
air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow
modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
E MAX A/C: Touch the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F A/C: Touch the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air
conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (such as when using Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after you switch off the
air conditioning with the A/C button.
G AUTO: Touch the button to turn on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. You
can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by touching and
holding the button for more than two seconds.
H Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 137).
I MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside air flows
through the windshield vents, fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed
and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position. You can use this
setting to defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated
rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when MAX
Defrost is on.
486

J Air distribution control: Touch these buttons to turn airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system can
distribute air through any combination of these vents.
K Driver settings:
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the driver side
of the vehicle.
Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch and hold
MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.
Touch the heated steering wheel icon to turn the heated steering wheel on and
off (if equipped).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a Climate control commands

wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not
heat between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock "Climate on"
positions.
"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5>
Climate Control Voice Commands degrees"
Note: The fan speed will automatically "Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"
decrease when you start a voice command
session or phone call through SYNC. This "Help"
feature is dependent on the current climate
control settings and helps to reduce the There are additional climate control
background noise in the vehicle. The fan commands but in order to access them,
speed returns to normal when the voice you have to say "Climate" first. When the
session has ended. You can adjust the fan system is ready to listen, you may say any
speed manually during this time by using of the following commands:
the fan button or knob to reach the desired
setting. To disable or enable automatic fan "CLIMATE"
speed, press and hold the AC and
Recirculated air buttons at the same time. "A/C off"
Release the buttons and immediately
increase the fan speed. "A/C on"
Press the voice button on the "Automatic"

steering wheel controls. When
E142599 prompted, say any of the "Defrost off"
following commands: "Defrost on"
"Dual off"
Climate control commands
"Floor on"
"Climate automatic"
"Fan decrease"
"Climate my temperature"
"Fan increase"
"Climate off"
487

"CLIMATE"
"TEMPERATURE"
"MAX A/C off"
"<15.5-29.5> degrees"
"MAX A/C on"
"<60-85> degrees"
"My temp"
"High"
"Off"
"Low"
"On"
"Help"
"Panel floor on"
"Panel off"
NAVIGATION
"Panel on"
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
"Rear defrost off" the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
"Rear defrost on" see an authorized dealer.
"Recirc off" Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
"Recirc on" and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
* card out to remove it; this could cause
"Temperature" damage.
"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees" Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
"Temperature <60-85> degrees" map mode.
"Temperature decrease" To set a destination, press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the Dest button
"Temperature high" when it appears. See Setting a
"Temperature increase" Destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your
"Temperature low" vehicle's current location, touch the green
"Windshield floor on" bar in the upper right-hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See
"Help" Map mode later in this chapter.
*
If you say "Temperature", you can then Setting a Destination
say any of the commands in the following
chart. Press the green corner of your touchscreen,
then the Dest button when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
488

• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads

Destination possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
My Home possible.
Favorites • Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient
route.
Previous Destinations
You can cancel the route or have the
Point of Interest system demo the route for you. Select
Route Prefs to set route preferences like
Emergency avoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries and
Street Address car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes.
Intersection (High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes.
City Center People who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools use these lanes.)
Map
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
Edit Route and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Cancel Route
Route option and begins guidance.
1. Enter the necessary information into During route guidance, you can press the
the highlighted text fields (in any talking bubble icon that appears in the
order). For address destination entry, upper right navigation corner (green bar)
the Go! button appears once you enter if you want the system to repeat route
all the necessary information. Pressing guidance information. When the system
the Go! button makes the address repeats the last guidance instruction, it
location appear on the map. If you updates the distance to the next guidance
choose Previous Destination, the last instruction, since it detects when the
20 destinations you have selected vehicle is moving.
appear.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to set Main categories
this as a waypoint (have the system
route to this point on the way to your Food/Drink & Dining
current destination) or save it as a
favorite. The system considers any Travel & Transportation
Avoid Areas selections in its route
Financial
calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types Emergency
of routes, and then select Start Route.
Community
Health & Medicine
Automotive
489

Main categories When you have selected a point of interest,

the location and information appear, such
Shopping as address and phone number. If cityseekr
lists the point of interest, more information
Entertainment & Arts is available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
Recreation & Sports
hours.
Government Press More Information for a longer
review, a list of services and facilities, the
Domestic Services
average room or meal price as well as the
website. This screen displays the point of
Subcategories interest icon such as:
Restaurant Hotel
Golf
E143884
Parking
Coffeehouse
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services E142636
Auto Dealership Food & Drink
Govt Office
E142637
Public Transit
Nightlife
Education
E142638
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing. Attraction
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available). E142639
This icon appears when your

cityseekr selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
E142640
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in When you are viewing more information
Canada and 11 in Mexico). for hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the
cityseekr, when available, is a hotel has certain services and facilities
service that provides more using icons, such as:
E142634
information about certain points • Restaurant.

of interest such as restaurants, hotels and • Business center.
attractions.
• Handicap facilities.
490

• Laundry. Parking POI Notification

• Refrigerator. Set the automatic parking point of interest
• 24 hour room service. notification. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
• Fitness center. When parking point of interest notification
is on, the icons display on the map when
• Internet access. you get close to your destination. This may
• Pool. not be very useful in dense areas, and may
• Wi-fi. clutter the map when other points of
interest display.
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average Route Preferences
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address. Preferred Route
For hotels, cityseekr can provide Choose to have the system display the
information such as star rating, price Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route
category, review, check-in and checkout first. If you set Always Use Preferred
times, hotel service icons and website Route to Yes, the system uses the
address. selected route type to calculate only one
route to the desired destination.
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences Always Use Preferred Route
Select settings for the system to take into Bypass route selection in destination
account when planning your route. programming. The system only calculates
one route based on preferred route setting.
Settings > Navigation. Eco Time Penalty
E142607
Select a low, medium or high cost for the
Map Preferences calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for
Breadcrumbs the route.
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled Avoid
route with white dots. Switch this feature
ON or OFF. These features allow you to choose to
have the system avoid freeways, toll roads,
Turn List Format ferries and car trains when planning your
Have the system display your turn list Top route. Switch these features ON or OFF.
to Bottom or Bottom to Top. Use HOV Lanes
Have the system use high-occupancy
vehicle lanes, if available, when planning
your route.
491

Navigation Preferences Press Add to program an entry. Once you

make a selection, the system tries to avoid
Guidance Prompts the area(s) if possible for all routes. To
Have the system use Voice & Tones or delete a selection, choose the listing on
Tone Only on your programmed route. the screen. When the screen changes to
Avoid Areas Edit, you can press Delete
Auto - Fill State/Province at the bottom right of the screen.
Have the system automatically fill in the Map Mode
state and province based on the
information already entered into the Press the green bar in the upper right area
system. Switch this feature ON or OFF. of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
Traffic Preferences of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
Avoid Traffic Problems
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
Choose how you want the system to buildings, visible land use and land
handle traffic problems along your route. elements and detailed railway
• Automatic: Have the system reroute infrastructure for the most essential cities
you to avoid traffic incidents that around the globe. These maps also contain
develop and impact the current route. features, such as town blocks, building
The system does not provide a traffic footprints and railways.
alert notification. 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
• Manual: Have the system always objects that are typically recognizable and
provide a traffic alert notification for have a certain tourist value. The 3D
traffic incidents along the planned landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
route. You have a choice to accept or Coverage varies and improves with
ignore the notification before making updated map releases.
the route deviation. Change the appearance of the
Traffic Alert Notification map display by repeatedly
E174016
pressing the arrow button in the
Have the system display traffic alert upper left corner of the screen. It toggles
notifications. between three different map modes:
Other traffic alert features allows you to Heading up, North up and 3D.
turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the Heading up (2D map) always
map such as road work, incident, accidents shows the direction of forward
and closed roads. Scroll down to view all travel to be upward on the
the different types of alerts. Switch these E142642 screen. This view is available for
features ON or OFF. map scales up to 2.5 miles (4
kilometers). The system remembers this
Avoid Areas
setting for larger map scales, but shows
Choose areas which you want the system the map in North up only. If the scale
to avoid when calculating a route for you. returns below this level, the system
restores Heading up.
492

North up (2D map) always In 3D mode, rotate the map view by

shows the northern direction to swiping your finger across the shaded bar
be upward on the screen. with the arrows.
E142643 The ETA box under the zoom buttons
3D map mode provides an appears when a route is active and
elevated perspective of the map. displays the distance and time to your
This viewing angle can be destination. If the button is pressed, a pop
E142644 adjusted and the map can be up appears with the destination listed (and
rotated 180 degrees by touching waypoint if applicable) along with mileage
the map twice, and then dragging your and time to destination. You may also
finger along the shaded bar with arrows at select to have either the estimated time
the bottom of the map. to reach your destination or your estimated
arrival time.
View switches between full map, street
list and exit view in route guidance. Map Icons
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows Vehicle mark shows the current
direct access to navigation settings, location of your vehicle. It stays
View/Edit Route, SIRIUS Travel Link, in the center of the map display,
Guidance Mute and Cancel Route. except when in scroll mode.
E142646
Press the speaker button on the Scroll cursor allows you to
map to mute route guidance. scroll the map; the fixed icon is
E174017 When the light on the button in the center of the screen. The
illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker map position closest to the
E142647
button appears on the map only when cursor is in a window on the top
route guidance is active. center part of the screen.
Re-center the map by pressing Address book entry default
this icon whenever you scroll the icon(s) indicates the location
E146188
map away from your vehicle’s on the map of an address book
current location. E142648 entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been
Auto Zoom stored to the Address Book by any method
other than the map. You can select from
Press the green bar to access map mode,
any of the 22 icons available. You can use
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
each icon more than once.
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto Home indicates the location on
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the the map currently stored as the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map home position. You can only
scale. The map zoom level then save one address from the
E142649
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The Address Book as your Home
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther entry. You cannot change this icon.
the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch off the feature, just press the +
or - button again.
493

POI (Point Of Interest) icons Set as Waypoint

indicate locations of any point
of interest categories you choose Touch this button to set the current
E142650 to display on the map. You can location as a waypoint.
choose to display three point of Save to Favorites
interest categories on the map at one time.
Touch this button to save the current
Starting point indicates the location to your favorites.
starting point of a planned route.
POI Icons
E142651
Touch this button to select icons to display
Waypoint indicates the location on the map. You can select up to three
of a waypoint on the map. The icons to display on the map at the same
number inside the circle is time. Turn these ON or OFF.
E142652 different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the Cancel Route
waypoint in the route list.
Touch this button to cancel the active
Destination symbol indicates route.
the ending point of a planned
route. View/Edit Route
E142653 Access these features when a route is
Next maneuver point indicates active:
the location of the next turn on • View Route
the planned route. • Edit Destination/Waypoints
E142654
• Edit Turn List
No GPS symbol indicates that • Detour
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map • Edit Route Preferences
E142655 positioning. This icon may • Edit Traffic Preferences
display under normal operation • Cancel Route.
in an area with poor GPS access.
Nokia is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
Quick-touch Buttons errors, you may report them directly to
When in map mode, touch anywhere on Nokia by going to
the map display to access the following http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Nokia
options: evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
Set as Dest investigation by e-mail.
Touch this button to select a scrolled
location on the map as your destination.
You may scroll the map by pressing your
index finger on the map display. When you
reach the desired location, simply let go
and then touch Set as Dest.
494

Navigation Map Updates Navigation system voice commands

Annual navigation map updates are 3
available for purchase through your "Navigation"
dealership, by calling 1-866-4NAVTEQ "Navigation voice volume decrease"
(1-866-462-8837) (in Mexico, call
01-800-557-5539) or going to "Navigation voice volume increase"
www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle "Repeat instruction"
1
to determine if there is an update available.

"Show 3D"
Navigation Voice Commands
"Show heading up"
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering "Show map"
E142599 wheel controls. After the tone,
"Show north up"
say any of the following commands:
1
"Show route"
Navigation system voice commands
1
"Show turn list"
1
"Cancel next waypoint"
"Voice guidance off"
1
"Cancel route" "Voice guidance on"
"Destination"
2
"Where am I?"
"Destination <nametag>" "Zoom in"
"Destination <POI category>" "Zoom out"
"Destination favorites" "Help"

1
"Destination home" These commands are only available when
a navigation route is active.
"Destination intersection" 2
If you say "Destination", you can then say
"Destination nearest <POI category>" any command in the following
"Destination" chart.
"Destination nearest POI"
3
If you say "Navigation", you can then say
"Destination play nametags" any command in the following
"Destination POI" "Navigation" chart.
"Destination POI category" "DESTINATION"

"Destination previous destination" "<nametag>"
"Destination street address" "<POI category>"
1
"Detour" "Favorites"
495

"DESTINATION" One-shot Destination Street Address
"Home" When you say either "Navigation

destination street address" or "Destination
"Intersection" street address", the system asks you to say
the full address. The system displays an
"Nearest <POI category>" example on-screen. You can then speak
the address naturally, such as "One two
"Nearest POI" three four Main Street, Anytown".
"Play nametags"
"POI category"
"Previous destination"
"Street address"
"Help"
"NAVIGATION"
*
"Destination"
"Zoom city"
"Zoom country"
"Zoom minimum"
"Zoom maximum"
"Zoom province"
"Zoom state"
"Zoom street"
"Zoom to <distance>"
"Help"
*
If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the "Destination" chart.
496

Accessories
Interior style
For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your • Ambient lighting.
vehicle, please contact your authorized • Floor mats.
dealer or visit our online store at:
• Electrochromatic
Web Address compass/temperature interior mirror.
• Leather-trimmed interior seating*.
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Lifestyle
You can also visit:
• Smoker's package.
Web Address • Bedliners and bedmats.
www.Ford.ca • Bed ramps.
• Bed side step.
Ford Accessories are available for your • Towing mirrors.
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
• Bed extender.
Ford Motor Company repairs or replaces
any properly authorized dealer-installed • Tonneau covers*.
Ford Genuine Accessory found to be • Interior cargo organization and
defective in factory-supplied materials or management.
workmanship during the warranty period,
• Racks and carriers*.
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories. Ford Motor • Truck bed camping tent*.
Company will warrant your accessory • Sportliner cargo liner*.
through the warranty that provides the • Rear-seat entertainment*.
greatest benefit:
• Trailer brake controller.
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• Hitch balls and towbars.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty. • Truck bed cargo organization and
management.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
and a copy of the warranty.
accessories.
Exterior style Peace of mind
• Hood deflector.
• Keyless entry keypad.
• Chrome exhaust tips.
• Vehicle security systems.
• Side window deflectors.
• Protective seat covers*.
• Running boards.
• Locking gas plug for capless fuel
• Splash guards. system.
• Custom graphics*. • Bumper- and hitch-mounted parking
sensors*.
• Remote start.
• Wheel locks.
497

Accessories
• Wheel well liners. • Mobile communications systems may

• Bed hooks*. harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
• Back-up alarm*. not design them specifically for
• Tool or cargo boxes*. automotive use.
*Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
manufacturer designs, develops and any non-Ford electrical or electronic
therefore warrants Ford Licensed accessories or components to your
Accessories, and does not design or test vehicle, you may adversely affect
these accessories to Ford Motor Company battery performance and durability,
engineering requirements. Contact an and may adversely affect the
authorized Ford dealer for the performance of other electrical
manufacturer's limited warranty details, systems in the vehicle.
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
498

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING That means you get:

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. Lincoln dealership
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S. • Repairs performed by factory trained
Only) technicians, using genuine parts
More than 32 million Ford owners have Rental Car Reimbursement

discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended 1st day Rental Benefit
service plan backed by Ford Motor You take advantage of replacement
Company, and provides peace of mind transportation if your vehicle is at your
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited authorized dealer for same day covered
Warranty coverage. repairs.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself Extended Rental Benefits
One service bill – the cost of parts and If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
labor – can easily exceed the price of your repairs, you are eligible for rental car
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP coverage, including bumper to bumper
you minimize your risk for unexpected warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Roadside Assistance
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your • Towing, flat-tire change and battery
authorized dealer for details. jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over • Travel expense reimbursement for
1,000 covered components, this plan lodging, meals and rental car.
is so complete that we generally only • Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
discuss what’s not covered. rental car coverage and emergency
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, transportation.
and includes many high-tech items.
Transferable Coverage
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
components.
you can transfer any remaining coverage
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended higher degree of confidence that vehicle
service plan authorized and backed by Ford was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
Motor Company. thereby improving resale value.
499

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN

Maintaining Your Vehicle! (CANADA ONLY)
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a You can get more protection for your
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
scheduled maintenance, and selected Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so is the only service contract backed by Ford
you never have to worry about affording Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
regular checkups, routine inspections, Extended Service Plan provides benefits
preventive care and replacement of select such as:
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear: • Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• Windshield wiper blades. wear items.
• Spark plugs. • Protection against repair costs after
• The clutch disc. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Brake pads and linings. Coverage expires.
• Shock absorbers. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Struts. There are several Ford Extended Service
• Engine Belts. Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
o-rings. including reimbursement for towing and
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment. rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
Interest Free Finance Options peace-of-mind protection throughout
Available Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
Take advantage of our interest free
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an Note: Repairs performed outside of
affordable, no interest, no fee payment Canada, the United States and Mexico are
program allowing you all the security and not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying coverage.
over time. You are pre-approved with no This information is subject to change. For
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more, more information, visit your local Ford of
call our Ford ESP specialists at Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
800-367-3377. Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
Ford ESP you.
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
500

GENERAL MAINTENANCE Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®

Replacement Parts
INFORMATION
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
Carefully following the maintenance exceed our specifications. Parts installed
schedule helps protect against major repair at your dealership carry a nationwide
expenses resulting from neglect or 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
inadequate maintenance and may help to parts and labor limited warranty.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
completed maintenance with your vehicle. may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
We have established regular maintenance emissions compliance.
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you Convenience
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes; Many dealerships have extended evening
one is to maintain the reliability of your and Saturday hours to make your service
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost visit more convenient and they offer one
of owning your vehicle down. stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
It is your responsibility to have all from general maintenance to collision
scheduled maintenance performed and to repairs.
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
manual. See Capacities and or body shops. Please contact your dealer
Specifications (page 361). for details.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance Protecting Your Investment
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance. Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your reliability, durability and resale value. To
Dealership? maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
Factory-Trained Technicians make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
Service technicians participate in extensive
intervals.
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the Your vehicle is equipped with the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
dealership about the training and displays a message in the information
certification their technicians have display at the proper oil change interval.
received. This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
501

When the oil change message appears in Additives and Chemicals

the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil This owner's manual and the Ford
change within two weeks or 500 miles Workshop Manual list the recommended
(800 kilometers) of the message additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
appearing. Make sure you reset the We do not recommend using chemicals or
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil additives not approved by us as part of
change. See General Information (page your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
103). consult your warranty information.
If your information display resets Oils, Fluids and Flushing
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
six months or 5000 miles (8000 normal operating characteristic and, by
kilometers) from your last oil change. itself, does not necessarily indicate a
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles concern or that the fluid needs to be
(16000 kilometers) between oil change changed. However, a qualified expert, such
intervals. as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built that also show signs of overheating or
with multiple, complex, performance foreign material contamination
systems. Every manufacturer develops immediately.
these systems using different
specifications and performance features. Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
That is why it is important to rely upon your fluids at the specified intervals or in
dealership to properly diagnose and repair conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
your vehicle. viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance. It is critical that systems are
maintenance intervals for various parts flushed only with new fluid that is the same
and component systems based upon as that required to fill and operate the
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company system or using a Ford-approved flushing
relies upon this testing to determine the chemical.
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at Owner Checks and Services
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance Make sure you perform the following basic
schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance checks and inspections every
maintenance information. month or at six-month intervals.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
502

Check every month
Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
503

Multi-Point inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
*
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
**
pressure
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service This means you do not have to remember
advisor or technician about the multi-point to change the oil on a mileage-based
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
way to perform a thorough inspection of an oil change is due by displaying a
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you message in the information display.
immediate feedback on the overall The following table provides examples of
condition of your vehicle. vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
NORMAL SCHEDULED and generally decrease with severity of
MAINTENANCE use.
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor

Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
504

When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Interval Vehicle use and example
Normal
7500-10000 miles Normal commuting with highway driving

(12000-16000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles Moderate to heavy load or towing

(8000-11999 km) Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
*
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
**
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
505

*
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
1
Other maintenance items
Every 30000 miles (48000

Replace engine air filter.
km)
At 100000 miles (160000 2
km) Change engine coolant.
Replace spark plugs.

Every 100000 miles
(160000 km) 3
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Every 150000 miles
Change rear axle fluid.
(240000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
506

SPECIAL OPERATING Perform the services shown in the

following tables when specified or within
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any • Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
of the following conditions, you need to REQUIRED message comes on at
perform extra maintenance, as indicated. 28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
If you operate your vehicle occasionally 30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
under any of these conditions, it is not transmission fluid replacement.
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific • Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
recommendations, see your dealership REQUIRED message has not come
service advisor or technician. on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform
the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information

display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 60,000 mi Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
(96,000 km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information

display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Replace engine air filter.
as required
(96,000 km)
507

Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Inspect frequently, service Replace engine air filter.

as required
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.*
or six months
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Off-road operation
Inspect frequently, service Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate
as required if equipped with grease fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.*
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 30,000 mi Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
(48,000 km) non-sealed bearings are used (Two-wheel drive vehicles).
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
508

Exceptions California Fuel Filter Replacement

There are several exceptions to the Normal If you register your vehicle in California, the
Schedule. California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
Axle(s) and transfer case (4X4 only) fluid before the completion of your vehicle's
changes or level checks are not required useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
unless a leak is suspected or the assembly urges you to have all recommended
has been submerged in water. During long maintenance services performed at the
periods of trailer towing with outside specified intervals and to record all vehicle
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) or at service.
wide-open throttle for long periods above
45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axle Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
fluid every 3,000 mi (4,800 km) or three
months, whichever comes first, if the rear Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid. This North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
interval can be waived and the 150,000 mi locations with similar climates using an
(240,000km) service interval can continue American Petroleum Institute (API)
if the rear axle is filled with 75W85 Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
specification WSS-M2C9Y2-A, part oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
number XY-75W85-QL, or equivalent. Add If the available API SM or SN oils are not
friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or available, then the oil change interval is
equivalent for complete refill of 1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Traction-Lok rear axles.
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
509

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
510

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
511

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
512

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
513

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
514

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
515

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
516

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
517

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
518

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
519

Appendices
END USER LICENSE • The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD

SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
AGREEMENT communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
SYNC End User License Agreement communicate with additional software
(EULA) and/or systems provided by third party
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE") software and service suppliers. The
that includes software licensed by Ford additional software and services of
Motor Company and its affiliates third party origin, as well as associated
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an media, printed materials, and "online"
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation or electronic documentation ("THIRD
("MS") . Those installed software PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
products of MS origin, as well as international intellectual property laws
associated media, printed materials, and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
and "online" or electronic SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") rights reserved.
are protected by international • The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
intellectual property laws and treaties. SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
sold. All rights reserved. and individually will be referred to as
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with "SOFTWARE".
and/or communicate with, or may be IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
later upgraded to interface with and/or USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
communicate with additional software DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
and/or systems provided by FORD THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
software and systems of FORD LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
associated media, printed materials, THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
and "online" or electronic PREVIOUS CONSENT).
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
are protected by international
EULA grants you the following license:
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not • You may use the SOFTWARE as
sold. All rights reserved. installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
520

Appendices
Description of Other Rights and • SOFTWARE Transfer: You may

Limitations permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
• Speech Recognition: If the transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
SOFTWARE includes speech retain no copies, you transfer all of the
recognition component(s), you should SOFTWARE (including all component
understand that speech recognition is parts, the media and printed materials,
an inherently statistical process and any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
that recognition errors are inherent in Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR recipient agrees to the terms of this
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
liable for any damages arising out of any transfer must include all prior
errors in the speech recognition versions of the SOFTWARE.
process.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Decompilation and Disassembly: or MS may terminate this EULA if you
You may not reverse engineer, fail to comply with the terms and
decompile, or disassemble nor permit conditions of this EULA.
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except • Security Updates/Digital Rights
and only to the extent that such activity Management: Content owners use
is expressly permitted by applicable the WMDRM technology included in
law notwithstanding this limitation. your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
• Limitations on Distributing, copyrighted content. Portions of the
Copying, Modifying and Creating SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
Derivative Works: You may not WMDRM software to access
distribute, copy, make modifications WMDRM-protected content. If the
to or create derivative works based on WMDRM software fails to protect the
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the content, content owners may ask
extent that such activity is expressly Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
permitted by applicable law ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
notwithstanding this limitation. protected content. This action does
• Single EULA: The end user not affect unprotected content. When
documentation for the DEVICE and your DEVICE downloads licenses for
related systems and services may protected content, you agree that
contain multiple EULAs, such as Microsoft may include a revocation list
multiple translations and/or multiple with the licenses. Content owners may
media versions (e.g., in the user require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
documentation and in the software). on your DEVICE to access their content.
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you If you decline an upgrade, you will not
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of be able to access content that requires
the SOFTWARE. the upgrade.
521

Appendices
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree supplements, add-on components, or

that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD Internet-based services components
MOTOR COMPANY, third party of the SOFTWARE after the date you
software and systems suppliers, their obtain your initial copy of the
affiliates and/or their designated agent SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
may collect and use technical Components").
information gathered in any manner as If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
part of product support services related software and services suppliers provide or
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
make available to you Supplemental
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
Components and no other EULA terms are
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
provided along with the Supplemental
software and services suppliers, their
Components, then the terms of this EULA
affiliates and/or their designated agent
shall apply.
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
customized services or technologies to and/or their designated agent make
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD available Supplemental Components, and
MOTOR COMPANY, third party no other EULA terms are provided, then
software and systems suppliers, their the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
affiliates and/or their designated agent that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
may disclose this information to others, affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
but not in a form that personally Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
identifies you. Supplemental Component(s).
• Internet-Based Services FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Components: The SOFTWARE may Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
contain components that enable and designated agent reserve the right to
facilitate the use of certain discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services. You Internet-based services provided to you or
acknowledge and agree that MS, made available to you through the use of
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE.
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
522

Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

SOFTWARE may provide you with the All title and intellectual property rights in
ability to link to third party sites through and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third limited to any images, photographs,
party sites are not under the control of animations, video, audio, music, text and
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their "applets" incorporated into the
affiliates and/or their designated SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft materials, and any copies of the
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
designated agent are responsible for Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
(i) the contents of any third party sites, their affiliates or suppliers. The
any links contained in third party sites, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
or any changes or updates to third not copy the printed materials
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
other form of transmission received and intellectual property rights in and to
from any third party sites. If the the content which may be accessed
SOFTWARE provides links to third through use of the SOFTWARE is the
party sites, those links are provided to property of the respective content owner
you only as a convenience, and the and may be protected by applicable
inclusion of any link does not imply an copyright or other intellectual property
endorsement of the third party site by laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their rights to use such content. All rights not
affiliates and/or their designated specifically granted under this EULA are
agent. reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
You recognize your obligation to drive software and service providers, their
responsibly and keep attention on the affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
road. You will read and abide with the services which may be accessed through
DEVICE operating instructions the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
particularly as they pertain to safety respective terms of use relating to such
and assumes any risk associated with services. If this SOFTWARE contains
the use of the DEVICE. documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other subject to U.S. and European Union export
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes applicable international and national laws
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
replacement copy for the existing as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
this EULA, including any additional EULA other governments. For additional
terms accompanying the upgrade information, see
SOFTWARE. http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
523

Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant Adobe

you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft [AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Corporation, third party software or service Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
providers, their affiliates or suppliers. contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
its parent corporation Microsoft Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
Corporation, or their affiliates or reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
subsidiaries. For product support, please trademarks of Adobe Systems
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY Incorporated.
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any End User Notice
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
COMPANY for any other reason, please Automotive Important Safety
Information
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE. This system Ford SYNC contains software
No Liability for Certain Damages: that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND reverse engineering or other unauthorized
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO use of the software from this system in
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, violation of the license agreement is strictly
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL prohibited and may subject you to legal
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN action.
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR Read and follow instructions: Before
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS using your Windows Automotive- based
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY system, read and follow all instructions
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL and safety information provided in this end
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS, user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR following precautions found in this User's
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY Guide can lead to an accident or other
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO serious consequences.
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
$250.00).
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER ready reference for you and other users
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY unfamiliar with the Windows
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW Automotive-based system. Please make
VEHICLE. certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
524

Appendices
WARNING Use of Speech Recognition Functions:

Speech recognition software is inherently
Operating certain parts of this a statistical process which is subject to
system while driving can distract errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
your attention away from the road, any speech recognition functions included
and possibly cause an accident or other in the system and address any errors.
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally Navigation Features: Any navigation
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the features included in the system are
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before intended to provide turn by turn
attempting these operations. This is instructions to get you to a desired
important since while setting up or destination. Please make certain all
changing some functions you might be persons using this system carefully read
required to distract your attention away and follow instructions and safety
from the road and remove your hands from information fully.
the wheel. Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
General Operation setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
Voice Command Control: Functions distract your attention and could cause an
within the Windows Automotive-based accident or other serious consequences.
system may be accomplished using only Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
voice commands. Using voice commands before attempting these operations.
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
the wheel. navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not on your observations of local conditions
access any function requiring a prolonged and existing traffic regulations. Any such
view of the screen while you are driving. feature is not a substitute for your personal
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before judgment. Any route suggestions made by
attempting to access a function of the this system should never replace any local
system requiring prolonged attention. Even traffic regulations or your personal
occasional short scans to the screen may judgment or knowledge of safe driving
be hazardous if your attention has been practices.
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time. Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
excessively. Keep the volume at a level placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
where you can still hear outside traffic and would be directed into an area that you
emergency signals while driving. Driving consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
while unable to hear these sounds could responsible for the safe operation of the
cause an accident. vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
525

Appendices
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used Telenav may revise this Agreement and
by this system may be inaccurate because the privacy policy at any time, with or
of changes in roads, traffic controls or without notice to you. You agree to visit
driving conditions. Always use good http://www.telenav.com from time to time
judgment and common sense when to review the then current version of this
following the suggested routes. Agreement and of the privacy policy.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any 1. Safe and Lawful Use
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask You acknowledge that devoting attention
local authorities or an emergency services to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
operator for these locations. Not all of injury or death to you and others in
emergency services such as police, fire situations that otherwise require your
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to undivided attention, and you therefore
be contained in the map database for such agree to comply with the following when
navigation features. using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
TeleNav Software End User License (b) use your own personal judgment while
Agreement driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
Please read these terms and conditions
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
carefully before you use the Telenav
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
Software. Your use of the Telenav
you into an area that you consider to be
Software indicates that you accept these
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
do not input destinations, or otherwise
these terms and conditions, do not break
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
the seal of the package, launch, or
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
do not use the Telenav Software for any
These terms and conditions represent the illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
agreement (“Agreement”) between you hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
to the Telenav Software (including (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
upgrades, modifications, or additions and cables necessary for use of the
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”). Telenav Software in a secure manner in
All references herein to “you” and “your” your vehicle so that they will not interfere
means you, your employees, agents, and with your driving and will not prevent the
contractors, and any other entity on whose operation of any safety device (such as an
behalf you accept these terms and airbag).
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
harmless against all claims resulting from
account information, as well as other
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
payment and personal information
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
through the use of the Telenav Software,
to comply with the directions above.
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
526

Appendices
2. Account Information or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or

privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
You agree: (a) when registering the
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
regulation, including but not limited to laws
true, accurate, current, and complete
and regulations related to spamming,
information about yourself, and (b) to
privacy, consumer and child protection,
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
to such information, and to keep it true,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
accurate, current and complete.
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
3. Software License otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
Subject to your compliance with the terms access by third parties to the Telenav
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants Software without advanced written
to you a personal, non-exclusive, permission of Telenav.
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection 4. Disclaimers
with your permanent transfer of the
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
Telenav Software license), without the
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
Software (in object code form only) in
employees of any of the foregoing, be
order to access and use the Telenav
liable for any decision made or action
Software. This license shall terminate upon
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
any termination or expiration of this
the information provided by the Telenav
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
Telenav Software only for your personal
the accuracy of the map or other data used
business or leisure purposes, and not to
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
provide commercial navigation services to
not always reflect reality due to, among
other parties.
other things, road closures, construction,
3.1 License Limitations weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
You agree not to do any of the following: entire risk arising out of your use of the
(a) reverse engineer, decompile, Telenav Software. For example but
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or without limitation, you agree not to rely on
otherwise change the Telenav Software the Telenav Software for critical navigation
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive in areas where the well-being or survival
the source code, audio library or structure of you or others is dependent on the
of the Telenav Software without the prior accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
express written consent of Telenav; (c) functionality of the Telenav Software are
remove from the Telenav Software, or not intended to support such high risk
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’ applications, especially in more remote
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or geographical areas.
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
to others, except as part of your permanent CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e) SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
use the Telenav Software in any manner EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
that (i) infringes the intellectual property WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
527

Appendices
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT

TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY YOU.
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, You agree that any dispute, claim or
so this limitation may not apply to you. controversy arising out of or relating to this
5. Limitation of Liability Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER involving a neutral arbitrator and
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO administered by the American Arbitration
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR Association in the County of Santa Clara,
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE California. The arbitrator shall apply the
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, American Arbitration Association, and the
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR judgment upon the award rendered by the
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN arbitrator may be entered by any court
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, binding upon both parties. You expressly
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
This Agreement and performance
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
hereunder will be governed by and
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
construed in accordance with the laws of
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
the State of California, without giving
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES the extent judicial action is necessary in
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY connection with the binding arbitration,
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, both Telenav and you agree to submit to
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT the County of Santa Clara, California. The
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, United Nations Convention on Contracts
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR for the International Sale of Goods shall
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF not apply.
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE 7. Assignment
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
528

Appendices
the terms and conditions of this Notices by posting them on Telenav’s

Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or Website or by downloading such Notices
transfer that is not expressly permitted to your wireless device. If you desire to
under this paragraph will result in withdraw your consent to receive Notices
immediate termination of this Agreement, electronically, you must discontinue your
without liability to Telenav, in which case use of the Telenav Software.
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software. 8.4
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav Telenav’s or your failure to require
may assign this Agreement to any other performance of any provision shall not
party at any time without notice, provided affect that party’s right to require
the assignee remains bound by this performance at any time thereafter, nor
Agreement. shall a waiver of any breach or default of
8. Miscellaneous this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
8.1 of the provision itself.
This Agreement constitutes the entire 8.5
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof. If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
8.2 modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
Except for the limited licenses expressly this Agreement will remain in full force and
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains effect.
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without 8.6
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are The headings in this Agreement are for
not expressly granted in this Agreement convenience of reference only, will not be
are intended to, or shall be, granted or deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
conferred by implication, statute, and will not be referred to in connection
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and with the construction or interpretation of
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
hereby reserve all of their respective rights the words “include” and “including,” and
other than the licenses explicitly granted variations thereof, will not be deemed to
in this Agreement. be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
8.3 “without limitation”.
By using the Telenav Software, you 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices, The Telenav Software utilizes map and
agreements, legally required disclosures other data licensed to Telenav by third
or other information in connection with the party vendors for the benefit of you and
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”) other end users. This Agreement includes
electronically. Telenav may provide such end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
529

Appendices
Agreement), and thus your use of the TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the License Limitations on Use:
following additional terms and conditions, You agree that your license to use this Data
which are applicable to Telenav’s third is limited to and conditioned on use for
party vendor licensors: solely personal, noncommercial purposes,
End User License Agreement For and not for service bureau, timesharing or
Distribution By HERE For North other similar purposes. Except as otherwise
America/APAC set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, disassemble or reverse engineer any
not sold. By opening this package, or portion of this Data, and may not transfer
installing, copying, or otherwise using the or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
Data, you agree to be bound by the terms except to the extent permitted by
of this agreement. If you do not agree to mandatory laws.
the terms of this agreement, you are not
permitted to install, copy, use, resell or License Limitations on Transfer:
transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the Your limited license does not allow transfer
terms of this agreement, and have not or resale of the Data, except on the
installed, copied, or used the Data, you condition that you may transfer the Data
must contact your retailer or HERE North and all accompanying materials on a
America, LLC (as defined below) within permanent basis if: (a) you retain no copies
thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
of your purchase price. To contact HERE, terms of this End-User License Agreement;
please visit www.here.com. and (c) you transfer the Data in the exact
The Data is provided for your personal, same form as you purchased it by
internal use only and may not be resold. It physically transferring the original media
is protected by copyright, and is subject to (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased),
the following terms (this “End User License all original packaging, all Manuals and
Agreement”) and conditions which are other documentation. Specifically,
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or
HERE and its licensors (including their sold as a complete set as provided to you
licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. and not as a subset thereof.
For purposes of these terms, “HERE” shall
mean (a) HERE North America, LLC with Additional License Limitations:
respect to Data for the Americas and/or Except where you have been specifically
the Asia Pacific region and (b) HERE licensed to do so by HERE in a separate
Europe B.V. for Data for Europe, the Middle written agreement, and without limiting
East and/or Africa. the preceding paragraph, your license is
The Data includes certain information and conditioned on use of the Data as
related content provided under license to prescribed in this agreement, and you may
HERE from third parties and is subject to not (a) use this Data with any products,
the applicable supplier terms and systems, or applications installed or
copyright notices set forth at the following otherwise connected to or in
URL: communication with vehicles capable of
http://corporate.navteq.com/supplier_terms.html. vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
530

Appendices
real time route guidance, fleet Disclaimer of Liability:

management or similar applications; or (b)
with, or in communication with, including HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
without limitation, cellular phones, THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
and personal digital -assistants or PDAs. RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE
Note: This Data may contain inaccurate or OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND
incomplete information due to the passage OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY
of time, changing circum-stances, sources OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
used and the nature of collecting WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
comprehensive geographic Data, any of POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY
which may lead to incorrect results. LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS
OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
No Warranty: INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
This Data is provided to you “as is”, and CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
you agree to use it at your own risk. HERE OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
and its licensors (and their licensors and USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS
suppliers) make no guarantees, DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS
representations or warranties of any kind, OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
express or implied, arising by law or ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR
otherwise, including but not limited to, BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF HERE
content, quality, accuracy, completeness, OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
particular purpose, usefulness, use or Some States, Territories and Countries do
results to be obtained from this Data, or not allow certain liability exclusions or
that the Data or server will be damages limitations, so to that extent the
uninterrupted or error ¬free. above may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Warranty: Export Control:
HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING You agree not to export from anywhere
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) any part of the Data or any direct product
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS thereof except in compliance with, and
OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, with all licenses and approvals required
PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, under, applicable export laws, rules and
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE regulations, including but not limited to the
OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, laws, rules and regulations administered
Territories and Countries do not allow by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
certain warranty exclusions, so to that the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
extent the above exclusion may not apply Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
to you. Department of Commerce. To the extent
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
531

Appendices
Entire Agreement: Government End Users:

These terms and conditions constitute the If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
entire agreement between HERE (and its of the United States government or any
licensors, including their licensors and other entity seeking or applying rights
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject similar to those customarily claimed by the
matter hereof, and supersedes in their United States government, this Data is a
entirety any and all written or oral “commercial item” as that term is defined
agreements previously existing between at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
us with respect to such subject matter. accordance with this End¬ User License
Agreement, and each copy of Data
Severability: delivered or otherwise furnished shall be
You and HERE agree that if any portion of marked and embedded as appropriate
this agreement is found illegal or with the following “Notice of Use”, and be
unenforceable, that portion shall be treated in accordance with such Notice:
severed and the remainder of the NOTICE OF USE
Agreement shall be given full force and
effect. CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
Severability: NAME:
You and HERE agree that if any portion of HERE
this agreement is found illegal or
unenforceable, that portion shall be CONTRACTOR
severed and the remainder of the (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
Agreement shall be given full force and ADDRESS:
effect.
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL
Governing Law: 60606.
The above terms and conditions shall be This Data is a commercial item as defined
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois in FAR 2.101
(for Data for the Americas and/or the Asia and is subject to the End User License
Pacific region) or The Netherlands (for Agreement under
Data for Europe, the Middle East and
which this Data was provided.
Africa), without giving effect to (i) its
conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United © 1987-2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
Nations Convention for Contracts for the If the Contracting Officer, federal
International Sale of Goods, which is government agency, or any federal official
explicitly excluded. For any and all refuses to use the legend provided herein,
disputes, claims and actions arising from the Contracting Officer, federal
or in connection with the Data (“Claims”), government agency, or any federal official
you agree to submit to the personal must notify HERE prior to seeking
jurisdiction of (a) the State of Illinois for additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Claims related to Data for the Americas
and/or the Asia Pacific region provided to
you hereunder, and (b) The Netherlands
for Data for Europe, the Middle East and/or
Africa provided to you hereunder.
532

Appendices
Gracenote® Copyright You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
CD and music-related data from Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 and Gracenote Servers for your own
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright personal, non-commercial use only. You
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
service may practice one or more of the transmit the Gracenote Content,
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132, Data (except in a Tag associated with a
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459, music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
pending. Some services supplied under CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
Patent: #6,304,523. GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
Gracenote and CDDB are registered EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote. Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
Gracenote® End User License Agreement violate these restrictions. If your licenses
(EULA) terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
This device contains software from Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
Emeryville, California 94608 respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
("Gracenote"). Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
"Gracenote Software") enables this device including all ownership rights. Under no
to do disc and music file identification and circumstances will either Gracenote
obtain music-related information, including become liable for any payment to you for
name, artist, track, and title information any information that you provide, including
("Gracenote Data") from online servers any copyrighted material or music file
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform information. You agree that Gracenote
other functions. You may use Gracenote may enforce its respective rights,
Data only by means of the intended End collectively or separately, under this
User functions of this device. agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
restrictions set forth herein with respect to queries for statistical purposes. The
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
content and such content providers shall identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
be entitled to all of the benefits and queries without knowing anything about
protections set forth herein that are who you are. For more information, see the
available to Gracenote. web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
533

Appendices
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM Vehicle with SYNC only

OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
FCC ID: KMHSG1P1
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE IC: 1422A-SG1P1
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, or MyLincoln Touch
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT This device complies with Part 15 of the
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE Canada. Operation is subject to the
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF following two conditions: (1) This device
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA may not cause harmful interference, and
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT (2) this device must accept any
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO interference received, including
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER interference that may cause undesired
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE operation.
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR WARNING
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE Changes or modifications not
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR expressively approved by the party
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE responsible for compliance could
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT void the user's authority to operate the
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES certification number only signifies that
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO Industry Canada technical specifications
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE were met.
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL The antenna used for this transmitter must
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, not be co-located or operating in
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, conjunction with any other antenna or
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF transmitter.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
534

Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
RF Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
E202555
Brazil
E207816
Argentina
E207818
European Union EU
E207817
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
E207819
Jordan
E197509
E207820
Malaysia
535

Appendices
E197811 E207822
Moldova Singapore
E207821 E198002
Morocco South Africa
E198001
Philippines
E203899
E197844
Serbia
536

Appendices
E203679
Taiwan
E198009
Ukraine
537

538

Index
3 Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter............320
360 Degree Camera...................................209 Alarm
Camera Views......................................................210 See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................69
Front Camera.......................................................210 Ambient Lighting............................................87
Side Camera..........................................................211 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................69
Arming the Alarm.................................................70
4 Disarming the Alarm...........................................70
Full Guard ...............................................................70
4WD Reduced Guard.....................................................69
See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................180 Appendices....................................................520
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........102
A Airbag Secondary Warning.............................102
Beltminder Warning..........................................102
A/C Door Ajar Warning..............................................102
See: Climate Control..........................................131 Headlamps On Warning..................................102
About This Manual...........................................7 Key in Ignition Warning.....................................102
ABS Keyless Warning Alert.......................................102
See: Brakes...........................................................190 Parking Brake On Warning..............................102
ABS driving hints Rear Park Aid Warning......................................102
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Service Advancetrac Warning.......................102
Brakes................................................................190 Audio Control...................................................74
Accessories....................................................497 Media.........................................................................74
Exterior style........................................................497 Seek, Next or Previous........................................74
Interior style.........................................................497 Audio Input Jack..........................................400
Lifestyle.................................................................497 Audio System................................................383
Peace of mind.....................................................497 General Information.........................................383
Accessories Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
See: Replacement Parts SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................391
Recommendation.............................................11 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
ACC CD...................................................................386
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............213 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
Active Park Assist........................................202 SYNC.............................................................389
Automatic Steering into Parking Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/
Space................................................................204 FM..................................................................384
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature........204 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
Troubleshooting the System.........................205 FM/CD...........................................................393
Using Active Park Assist..................................203 Autolamps.......................................................80
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................312 Windshield Wiper Activated
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................313 Headlamps.........................................................81
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................312 Automatic Climate Control.......................133
Adjusting the Pedals......................................77 Automatic High Beam Control..................82
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................73 Activating the System........................................83
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering Manually Overriding the System....................83
Column................................................................73
Airbag Disposal..............................................50
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................131
539

Index
Automatic Transmission............................174 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L

Brake-Shift Interlock..........................................177 Ecoboost™.................................................369
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Specifications.....................................................370
Snow...................................................................179 Capacities and Specifications -
Understanding the Shift Positions of a 5.0L................................................................378
6–Speed Automatic Transmission.........174 Specifications......................................................379
Understanding your SelectShift Capacities and Specifications.................361
Automatic™ transmission..........................176 Car Wash
Automatic Transmission Fluid See: Cleaning the Exterior................................321
Check............................................................308 Center Console..............................................156
Auto-Start-Stop...........................................164 Changing a Bulb............................................313
Disabling Auto StartStop................................165 Accessing the Halogen High Beam, Low
Enabling Auto StartStop.................................164 Beam and Direction Indicator
Autowipers........................................................78 Bulbs...................................................................314
Auxiliary Power Points................................154 Lamp Assembly Condensation.....................314
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator
Outlet.................................................................154 and Reverse Lamp Bulbs............................316
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................154 Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-mount
Locations...............................................................154 Brake Lamp Bulbs..........................................317
Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror Direction
B Indicator Lamp Bulbs...................................318
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs.............................316
Battery Replacing LED Brake, Rear, Direction
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................309 Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs..........317
Blind Spot Information System..............224 Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot Lamp and
Switching the System Off and On..............226 High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs................317
System Errors......................................................226 Replacing LED Direction Indicator and Side
Using the System...............................................224 Marker Bulbs...................................................316
Bonnet Lock Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs...................316
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........298 Replacing Side Marker Bulb...........................316
Booster Seats..................................................28 Replacing the Halogen High Beam, Low
Types of Booster Seats......................................28 Beam and Direction Indicator
Brake Fluid Check.......................................309 Bulbs...................................................................315
Brakes...............................................................190 Replacing the License Plate Lamp
General Information..........................................190 Bulb.....................................................................317
Breaking-In......................................................272 Changing a Fuse...........................................297
Bulb Specification Chart...........................318 Fuses.......................................................................297
Changing a Road Wheel...........................352
C Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................352
Cabin Air Filter................................................137 Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.........353
California Proposition 65..............................11 Tire Change Procedure....................................354
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L Changing the 12V Battery........................309
EcoBoost™.................................................365 Battery Management System.........................311
Specifications.....................................................366 Changing the Engine Air Filter................320
Capacities and Specifications - Changing the Wiper Blades.......................311
3.5L.................................................................373 Checking MyKey System Status...............59
Specifications......................................................374 Checking the Wiper Blades........................311
540

Index
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Cruise Control..................................................75

Maintenance..................................................41 Principle of Operation.......................................212
Child Restraint Positioning.........................30 Type 1.........................................................................75
Child Safety.......................................................15 Type 2........................................................................75
General Information.............................................15 Cruise control
Child Safety Locks...........................................31 See: Using Cruise Control................................212
Left-Hand Side......................................................32 Customer Assistance.................................282
Right-Hand Side...................................................32
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................325
With King Ranch Edition.................................325
D
Without King Ranch Edition..........................325 Data Recording..................................................9
Cleaning Products........................................321 Event Data Recording...........................................9
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................326 Service Data Recording........................................9
Cleaning the Engine....................................323 Daytime Running Lamps.............................82
Cleaning the Exterior...................................321 Type 1 - Conventional
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................322 (Non-Configurable).......................................82
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................322 Type 2 - Configurable.........................................82
Stripes or Graphics............................................322 Digital Radio..................................................395
Underbody............................................................322 HD Radio Reception and Station
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Troubleshooting............................................396
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................324 Direction Indicators.......................................84
Cleaning the Interior...................................324 Lane Change..........................................................84
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Driver Alert.....................................................220
Blades...........................................................323 Using Driver Alert...............................................220
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................58 Driver and Passenger Airbags...................44
Climate............................................................485 Children and Airbags..........................................44
Climate Control Voice Commands.............487 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Climate Control..............................................131 Adjustment........................................................44
Climate Controlled Seats...........................147 Driving Aids....................................................220
Cooled Seats........................................................148 Driving Hints...................................................272
Collision Warning System........................230 Driving Through Water...............................273
Principle Of Operation.....................................230 DRL
Coolant Check See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................82
See: Engine Coolant Check...........................304
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......49
Creating a MyKey...........................................58
E
Programming/Changing Configurable Economical Driving......................................272
Settings...............................................................58 Electric Parking Brake..................................191
Cross Traffic Alert........................................226 Applying the Electric Parking Brake..............191
False Alerts...........................................................229 Applying the Electric Parking Brake When
Switching the System Off and On..............229 the Vehicle is Moving....................................192
System Errors......................................................229 Battery With No Charge...................................193
System Lights, Messages and Audible Releasing the Electric Parking Brake...........192
Alerts.................................................................228 Electronic Locking Differential................188
System Limitations...........................................228 Activating the Electronic Locking
Using the System...............................................226 Differential.......................................................188
541

Index
Emission Control System............................171 Event Data Recording

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................172 See: Data Recording..............................................9
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Export Unique Options..................................13
(I/M) Testing....................................................173 Extended Service Plan (ESP).................499
End User License Agreement.................520 EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
SYNC End User License Agreement ONLY)...............................................................500
(EULA)..............................................................520 EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S.
Engine Block Heater....................................162 Only).................................................................499
Using the Engine Block Heater......................163 Exterior Mirrors................................................89
Engine Coolant Check...............................304 360-Degree Camera...........................................92
Adding Engine Coolant...................................305 Auto-dimming Feature (if equipped)...........91
Checking the Engine Coolant.......................304 Blind Spot Information System......................93
Recycled Engine Coolant...............................305 Clearance Lamps ................................................92
Severe Climates.................................................306 Direction Indicator Mirrors ................................92
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors..............................90
Cooling.............................................................306 Heated Exterior Mirrors ......................................91
Engine Immobilizer Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................67 Equipped)..........................................................92
Engine Oil Check..........................................303 Memory Mirrors .....................................................91
Adding Engine Oil..............................................303 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................89
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................303 Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................90
Engine Specifications.................................361 Puddle Lamps.......................................................92
Drivebelt Routing................................................361 Spot Lamps............................................................92
Entertainment..............................................453
AM/FM Radio......................................................455
Bluetooth Audio................................................468
F
Browsing Device Content...............................453 Fastening the Seatbelts..............................34
CD...........................................................................464 Fastening the Cinch Tongue.............................35
Line In....................................................................469 Rear Inflatable Safety Belt................................37
SD Card Slot and USB Port...........................465 Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................38
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................36
Activated).......................................................460 Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........35
Supported Media Players, Formats and Using the Safety Belt with Cinch Tongue
Metadata Information................................468 (Front Center Seat)........................................34
Environment......................................................14 Floor Mats.......................................................273
EPB Fog Lamps - Front
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................191 See: Front Fog Lamps........................................84
Essential Towing Checks...........................261 Foot Pedals
Before Towing a Trailer....................................266 See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................77
Hitches...................................................................262 Ford Credit..........................................................11
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal (U.S. Only).................................................................11
Watercraft (PWC).........................................267 Four-Wheel Drive.........................................180
Safety Chains......................................................262 Front Fog Lamps............................................84
Trailer Brakes.......................................................262 Front Passenger Sensing System............45
Trailer Lamps......................................................266 Front Seat Armrest......................................149
Trailer Towing Connector.................................261 Fuel and Refueling.......................................166
Using a Step Bumper.......................................266
When Towing a Trailer.....................................266
542

Index
Fuel Consumption........................................170
Calculating Fuel Economy................................171
H
Filling the Tank.....................................................170 Handbrake
Fuel Filter........................................................309 See: Parking Brake.............................................190
Fuel Quality.....................................................167 Hazard Warning Flashers..........................278
Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel HDC
Vehicle (If Equipped)....................................167 See: Using Hill Descent Control....................199
Choosing the Right Fuel Without a Flex Fuel Headlamp Adjusting
Vehicle (If Equipped)....................................167 See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................312
Octane Recommendations.............................167 Head Restraints............................................139
Fuel Shutoff...................................................278 Adjusting the Head Restraint........................140
Fuses................................................................289 Heated Seats.................................................146
Fuse Specification Chart..........................289 Rear Heated Seats..............................................147
Passenger Compartment Fuse Heated Windows and Mirrors...................137
Panel.................................................................294 Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................137
Power Distribution Box....................................289 Heated Rear Window.........................................137
Heating
G See: Climate Control..........................................131
Hill Start Assist..............................................193
Garage Door Opener Switching the System On and Off...............194
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........150 Using Hill Start Assist.......................................193
Gauges...............................................................95 Hints on Controlling the Interior
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............97 Climate..........................................................134
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge................................97 Cooling the Interior Quickly............................136
Fuel Gauge..............................................................97 General Hints.......................................................134
Information Display.............................................98 Heating the Interior Quickly............................135
Transmission Fluid Temperature Recommended Settings for Cooling...........136
Gauge..................................................................98 Recommended Settings for Heating..........136
Type 1 and 2............................................................95 Side Window Defogging in Cold
Type 3.......................................................................96 Weather.............................................................137
General Information on Radio Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Frequencies....................................................51 Brakes............................................................190
Intelligent Access..................................................51 Hood Lock
General Maintenance Information........501 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........298
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................503
Owner Checks and Services..........................502
Protecting Your Investment...........................501
I
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................501 Ignition Switch...............................................158
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your In California (U.S. Only)............................283
Dealership?......................................................501 Information Display Control.......................76
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Information Displays...................................103
Canada.........................................................285 General Information..........................................103
Getting the Services You Need...............282
Away From Home..............................................282
543

Index
Information....................................................476 Installing Child Restraints............................16

911 Assist...............................................................482 Child Seats...............................................................16
Alerts......................................................................482 Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Calendar...............................................................482 Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Sirius Travel Link.................................................479 Seats....................................................................25
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment
Only)..................................................................476 (Regular Cab)...................................................26
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew
States Only)...................................................484 Cab and Super Cab).......................................27
Information Messages.................................118 Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
4WD........................................................................130 Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Active Park.............................................................118 Seating Use) .....................................................24
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................119 Using Inflatable Safety Belts (Rear Seat
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control...............119 Outboard Positions)........................................21
Airbag......................................................................120 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front
Alarm and Security............................................120 Center Position of Super Cab and Crew
Battery and Charging System.........................121 Cab).......................................................................17
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center
Alert System.....................................................121 Position of Super Cab and Crew
Collision Warning System................................122 Cab).......................................................................19
Doors and Locks..................................................122 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Driver Alert.............................................................122 CHildren (LATCH)............................................23
Drivetrain................................................................122 Using Tether Straps.............................................25
Engine......................................................................123 Instrument Cluster........................................95
Fuel...........................................................................123 Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................81
Keys and Intelligent Access............................123 Interior Lamps.................................................85
Lane Keeping System.......................................124 Front Interior Lamps...........................................85
Maintenance.........................................................125 Rear Interior Lamps.............................................87
MyKey......................................................................125 Interior Mirror...................................................93
Off Road.................................................................126 Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................93
Park Aid...................................................................127 Introduction.........................................................7
Park Brake..............................................................127
Power Steering....................................................128
Remote Start........................................................128
J
Seats........................................................................128 Jump Starting the Vehicle........................279
Starting System .................................................128 Connecting the Jumper Cables....................279
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................129 Jump Starting.....................................................280
Trailer.......................................................................129 Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................279
Removing the Jumper Cables......................280
K
Keyless Entry...................................................64
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................64
Keyless Starting............................................158
Ignition Modes.....................................................159
Keys and Remote Controls..........................51
544

Index
L Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............137
Lane Keeping System................................220 See: Windows and Mirrors...............................88
Switching the System On and Off................221 Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Lighting Control..............................................80 Moonroof...........................................................93
Headlamp Flasher...............................................80 Bounce-Back.........................................................94
High Beams............................................................80 Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............94
Lighting..............................................................80 Motorcraft Parts...........................................362
Load Carrying................................................233 MyFord Touch™...........................................436
Load Limit.......................................................233 General Information.........................................436
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of MyKey Troubleshooting..............................60
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type MyKey™.............................................................57
Vehicles............................................................239 Principle of Operation.........................................57
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................233 N
Locking and Unlocking.................................62
Activating Intelligent Access............................63 Navigation......................................................488
Autolock and Autounlock.................................64 cityseekr...............................................................490
Battery Saver.........................................................64 Map Mode............................................................492
Illuminated Entry..................................................64 Navigation Map Updates...............................495
Power Door Locks................................................62 Navigation Voice Commands.......................495
Remote Control....................................................62 Point of Interest (POI) Categories..............489
Smart Unlock.........................................................63 Quick-touch Buttons.......................................494
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Setting a Destination.......................................488
Keys......................................................................63 Setting Your Navigation Preferences..........491
Locks...................................................................62 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........504
Lug Nuts Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor............................504
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................352 Normal Maintenance Intervals....................505
M O
Maintenance.................................................298 Oil Check
General Information.........................................298 See: Engine Oil Check......................................303
Manual Climate Control..............................131 Opening and Closing the Hood..............298
Manual Seats..................................................141 Ordering Additional Owner's
Manual Lumbar ..................................................142 Literature.....................................................286
Moving the Seat Backward and Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........287
Forward..............................................................141 Overhead Console........................................157
Recline Adjustment...........................................142
Media Hub.......................................................401 P
Memory Function.........................................144
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................145 Parking Aid......................................................201
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Rear Sensing System........................................201
Control or Intelligent Access Key.............145 Parking Aids....................................................201
Saving a PreSet Position.................................145 Parking Brake.................................................190
Message Center Passive Anti-Theft System.........................67
See: Information Displays...............................103 SecuriLock™..........................................................67
545

Index
PATS Refueling.........................................................169
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................67 Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System................169
Pedals..................................................................77 Remote Control...............................................51
Perchlorate.........................................................11 Car Finder................................................................55
Personal Safety System™..........................42 Integrated Keyhead Transmitters ...................51
How Does the Personal Safety System Intelligent Access Key.........................................52
Work?..................................................................42 Memory Feature...................................................54
Phone...............................................................470 Remote Start ........................................................55
Making Calls.........................................................472 Replacing the Battery.........................................52
Pairing Subsequent Phones...........................471 Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................55
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time..........471 Remote Start.................................................138
Phone Menu Options........................................472 Automatic Settings............................................138
Phone Settings...................................................474 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............326
Phone Voice Commands................................474 Replacement Parts
Receiving Calls....................................................472 Recommendation.........................................11
Text Messaging...................................................473 Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Post-Crash Alert System...........................281 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Power Door Locks Repairs...................................................................11
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................62 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Power Running Boards..................................71 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Power Seats....................................................142 Control............................................................56
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Motion ...............................................................143 Only)..............................................................287
Power Lumbar.....................................................143 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Power Steering Fluid Check....................309 Only)..............................................................287
Power Windows.............................................88 Roadside Assistance...................................277
Accessory Delay...................................................89 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Bounce-Back.........................................................88 Assistance........................................................277
One-Touch Up or Down....................................88 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Power Sliding Back Window...........................89 Assistance........................................................277
Window Lock.........................................................89 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Protecting the Environment........................14 Roadside Assistance....................................277
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
R Roadside Assistance....................................277
Roadside Emergencies...............................277
Rear Axle.........................................................188 Running-In
Rear Seat Armrest........................................149 See: Breaking-In..................................................272
Rear Seats.......................................................146 Running Out of Fuel....................................168
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ..............146 Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Returning the Seat to the Seating Container..........................................................168
Position.............................................................146
Rear View Camera......................................206
Using the Rear View Camera System........207
S
Rear View Camera Safety Canopy™............................................48
See: Rear View Camera..................................206 Safety Precautions......................................166
Recommended Towing Weights...........250
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................260
546

Index
Satellite Radio...............................................397 Spot Lamps.....................................................84

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps..................85
(ESN)................................................................399 Stability Control............................................196
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............398 Principle of Operation......................................196
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service.................398 Starter Switch
Troubleshooting.................................................399 See: Ignition Switch...........................................158
Scheduled Maintenance Record............510 Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................159
Scheduled Maintenance...........................501 Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................161
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38 Failure to Start....................................................160
Seatbelt Reminder........................................39 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................162
Belt-Minder™........................................................39 Important Ventilating Information...............162
Seatbelts...........................................................33 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Principle of Operation.........................................33 Moving................................................................161
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Chime..............................................................39 Stationary..........................................................161
Conditions of operation.....................................39 Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................159
Seats.................................................................139 Vehicles with Keyless Start............................160
Security..............................................................67 Starting and Stopping the Engine.........158
Settings...........................................................443 General Information..........................................158
Clock.......................................................................443 Steering...........................................................229
Display...................................................................444 Electric Power Steering...................................229
Settings.................................................................446 Steering Wheel................................................73
Sound....................................................................444 Storage Compartments.............................156
Vehicle...................................................................445 Sunroof
Side Airbags......................................................47 See: Moonroof.......................................................93
Sitting in the Correct Position..................139 Sun Visors.........................................................93
Snow Chains Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................93
See: Using Snow Chains.................................346 Supplementary Restraints System.........43
Snowplowing.................................................274 Principle of Operation........................................43
Engine Temperature while Plowing............276 Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Installing the Snowplow..................................274 SYNC™ Applications and Services.......416
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow 911 Assist................................................................416
Attached...........................................................275 SYNC Mobile Apps.............................................418
Outside Air Temperature While SYNC™...........................................................402
Plowing.............................................................276 General Information.........................................402
Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................427
Vehicle...............................................................275
Snowplow Mode................................................275
Transmission Operation while
Plowing.............................................................276
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................507
Exceptions...........................................................509
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................212
547

Index
T Transmission
See: Transmission...............................................174
Tailgate............................................................239 Transporting the Vehicle..........................269
Bed Extender.......................................................243 Type Approvals.............................................535
Bed Ramp.............................................................245 RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure
BoxLink™ Cleats................................................244 Monitoring Sensor(s)..................................535
Box Side Step......................................................242
Electronic Tailgate Opening .........................240
Manual Tailgate Opening...............................240
U
Tailgate Lock........................................................239 Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
Tailgate Removal................................................241 EcoBoost™.................................................299
Tailgate Step.........................................................241 2.7L EcoBoost.....................................................299
Technical Specifications Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
See: Capacities and Specifications.............361 Ecoboost™................................................300
Terrain Response..........................................199 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................301
Principle of Operation......................................199 Under Hood Overview - 5.0L..................302
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Unique Driving Characteristics................164
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................284 Universal Garage Door Opener...............150
Tire Care...........................................................331 HomeLink Wireless Control System...........150
Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................332 USB Port........................................................400
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................213
Grading..............................................................331 Blocked Sensor....................................................218
Information Contained on the Tire Changing the Set Speed..................................216
Sidewall............................................................333 Detection Issues..................................................217
Temperature A B C............................................332 Disengaging the System..................................216
Traction AA A B C................................................331 Following a Vehicle............................................214
Treadwear..............................................................331 Hilly Condition Usage.........................................217
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........347 Low Speed Automatic Cancellation............217
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Overriding the System......................................216
Monitoring System.......................................348 Resuming the Set Speed.................................216
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Setting a Speed...................................................214
Monitoring System ......................................348 Setting the Gap Distance................................215
Tires Switching the System Off................................217
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................329 Switching the System On................................214
Towing a Trailer............................................249 Switching to Normal Cruise Control............219
Load Placement.................................................249 System Not Available........................................218
Towing Points...............................................268 Using Cruise Control....................................212
Towing the Vehicle on Four Switching Cruise Control Off..........................213
Wheels.........................................................269 Switching Cruise Control On and Off..........212
Emergency Towing............................................269
Recreational Towing.........................................269
Towing.............................................................249
Traction Control............................................195
Principle of Operation.......................................195
Trailer Sway Control...................................250
Transfer Case Fluid Check.......................308
Transmission Code Designation............364
Transmission...................................................174
548

Index
Using Four-Wheel Drive............................180 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........406

4WD Indicator Lights........................................180 Accessing Features through the Phone
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Menu.................................................................409
Vehicles.............................................................183 Accessing Your Phone Settings.....................412
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Bluetooth Devices..............................................413
Vehicles.............................................................183 Making Calls.......................................................408
Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............406
System................................................................181 Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................407
Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD Phone Options during an Active Call........408
system...............................................................180 Phone Voice Commands................................407
Using Hill Descent Control........................199 Receiving Calls...................................................408
Hill descent modes............................................199 System Settings..................................................414
Using MyKey With Remote Start Text Messaging...................................................410
Systems..........................................................60 Using Traction Control................................195
Using Power Running Boards.....................71 System Indicator Lights and
Automatic Power Deploy....................................71 Messages..........................................................195
Automatic Power Stow.......................................71 Using Voice Recognition...........................404
Bounce-back..........................................................72 Initiating a Voice Session...............................404
Enabling and Disabling........................................71 System Interaction and Feedback.............405
Manual Power Deploy..........................................71 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Using Snow Chains.....................................346 Program (Canada Only)........................285
Using Stability Control................................197
AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC™).............................................................197
V
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Vehicle Care....................................................321
Player............................................................420 General Information...........................................321
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............423 Vehicle Certification Label.......................363
Bluetooth Devices and System Vehicle Identification Number................362
Settings............................................................425 Vehicle Storage.............................................327
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the Battery...................................................................328
USB Port..........................................................420 Body........................................................................327
Line In Audio........................................................425 Brakes....................................................................328
Media Menu Features.......................................422 Cooling system....................................................327
Media Voice Commands................................420 Engine.....................................................................327
USB 2......................................................................425 Fuel system..........................................................327
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........425 General...................................................................327
What's Playing?.................................................420 Miscellaneous.....................................................328
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................328
Tires........................................................................328
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................131
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............362
Voice Control....................................................75
549

Index
W Windshield Wipers.........................................78
Speed dependent wipers (if
Warning Lamps and Indicators................98 equipped)...........................................................78
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................98 Wiper Blades
Anti-Lock Braking System................................98 See: Checking the Wiper Blades....................311
Automatic High Beam.......................................98 Wipers and Washers.....................................78
Auto Start-stop....................................................98 Wrecker Towing
Battery.....................................................................99 See: Transporting the Vehicle.......................269
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................99
Brake System........................................................99
Check 4X4..............................................................99
Cruise Control.......................................................99
Direction Indicator...............................................99
Door Ajar.................................................................99
Electric Park Brake...............................................99
Electronic Locking Differential........................99
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................99
Engine Oil..............................................................100
Fasten Safety Belt.............................................100
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................100
Front Airbag.........................................................100
Front Fog Lamps................................................100
High Beam............................................................100
Hill Descent..........................................................100
Low Fuel Level....................................................100
Low Tire Pressure Warning.............................100
Parking Lamps......................................................101
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control..........101
Service Engine Soon...........................................101
Sport Mode............................................................101
Traction and Stability Control........................101
Traction and Stability Control Off.................101
Transmission Tow/Haul...................................102
Washer Fluid Check...................................309
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior................................321
See: Wipers and Washers.................................78
Waxing.............................................................322
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................352
Wheels and Tires.........................................329
General Information.........................................329
Technical Specifications................................360
Windows and Mirrors...................................88
Windshield Washers.....................................79
550

2015 F 150 Owners Manual Version 4 Om en US 08 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 F 150 Owners Manual Version 4 Om en US 08 2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 F 150 Owners Manual Version 4 Om en US 08 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 F-150 Owner’s Manual

2015 F-150 Owner’s Manual

All rights reserved.

Introduction Driver and Passenger Airbags...................44

Personal Safety System™ Steering Wheel

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Pedals Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate Control Unique Driving Character-

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Fuel and Refueling Active Park Assist........................................202

Brakes Load Carrying

Parking Aids Roadside Emergencies

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Hazard Warning Flashers..........................278 Power Steering Fluid Check....................309

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Vehicle Certification Label.......................363 Information....................................................476

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Note: This manual describes product

manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Brake system Front airbag

Cabin air filter Front fog lamps

Check fuel cap Fuel pump reset

Child safety door lock or unlock Fuse compartment

Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers

Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window

Cruise control Heated windshield

Do not open when hot Interior luggage compartment

Engine air filter Jack

Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children

Engine coolant temperature Lighting control

Engine oil Low tire pressure warning

Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level

Fan warning Note operating instructions

Fasten seatbelt Panic alarm

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Parking aid facilities may access or share among them

Event Data Recording

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 For your convenience we offer a number

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

development we validate these parts On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint

• You are required by law to properly use

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

When installing a child safety seat with

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Fourth Printing

The belt webbing below the tongue is the